9999 9999 263 en-GB

HANDBOOK
Access to the Handbook

The Handbook is available on the CITROËN website, in
the "MyCitroën" section or at the following address:
http://service.citroen.com/ACddb/
From the appropriate Store, download the Scan MyCitroën
smartphone application.
Select:
- the language,
- the vehicle, its body style,
Then select: - the issue period of your handbook corresponding to the date of 1st
- the vehicle, registration of your vehicle.
- the issue period corresponding to the date of 1st registration of your
vehicle.
Download the content of the vehicle's Handbook.
Access to the Handbook.
This symbol indicates the latest information

available.
Welcome Key
Thank you for choosing a Citroën C5 AIRCROSS. Safety warning
Your vehicle will be fitted with only some of the equipment described in Additional information
this document, depending on its trim level, version and the specification
Contributes to the protection of the environment
for the country in which it was sold.
The descriptions and illustrations are given as indications only.
Automobiles CITROËN reserves the right to modify the technical Left-hand drive vehicle
specifications, equipment and accessories without having to update this
edition of the guide.
Right-hand drive vehicle
If ownership of your vehicle is transferred, please ensure this
Handbook is passed on to the new owner. Location of the equipment/button described with a black area
All of the instructions and operating recommendations are presented
here to make the most of the vehicle. It is strongly recommended that
you familiarise yourself with it as well as the Maintenance and Warranty
Guide, informing about warranties, servicing and roadside assistance
associated with the vehicle.
1
Contents
Overview . Access Lighting and visibility

Instruments and controls 4 Electronic key with remote control function and built- Lighting control 79
in key 35 Direction indicators 80
Eco-driving . Keyless Entry and Starting

Central locking
37
41
Daytime running lamps/Sidelamps
Parking lamps
81
81
Back-up procedures 41 Automatic illumination of headlamps 81
Doors 44 Guide-me-home and welcome lighting 82
Boot 44 Automatic headlamp dipping 83
Hands-free tailgate 45 Headlamp adjustment 84
Instruments Alarm 49 Cornering lighting 85
Electric windows 51 Wiper control stalk 85
Instrument panels 8
Panoramic opening sunroof 52 Changing a wiper blade 87
Warning and indicator lamps 11
Indicators 26 Automatic windscreen wipers 88
Manual test 29
Lighting dimmer 30 Ease of use and comfort
Trip computer 31 Correct driving position 54
Touch screen 32 Front seats 54 Safety
Date and time adjustment 34 Steering wheel adjustment 58 General safety recommendations 89
Mirrors 58 Hazard warning lamps 89
Rear seats 60 Horn 90
Heating and Ventilation 61 Emergency or assistance call 90
Manual air conditioning 63 Electronic stability control (ESC) 91
Dual-zone automatic air conditioning 64 Advanced Grip Control 95
Recirculation of interior air 67 Hill Assist Descent Control 96
Front demist – defrost 68 Seat belts 97
Heated windscreen 68 Airbags 101
Rear screen demist – defrost 68 Child seats 104
Additional Heating/Ventilation 69 Deactivating the front passenger airbag 106
Front fittings 71 ISOFIX mountings and child seats 111
Courtesy lamps 75 i-Size child seats 114
Interior ambient lighting 75 Child lock 115
Boot fittings 76
2
Contents .
Driving Fuel tank Practical information 180 Technical data
Compatibility of fuels 181
Driving recommendations 116 Towing device 182 Dimensions 221
Anti-theft protection 118 Towing device with quickly detachable towball 183 Identification markings 221
Starting/Switching off the engine with the key 118 Energy economy mode 186 Engine technical data and towed loads 222
Starting/Switching off the engine with Keyless Snow chains 186 Engines and towed loads – Petrol 223
Entry and Starting 120 Engines and towed loads – Diesel 224
Fitting roof bars 187
Electric parking brake 121
Bonnet 188
Manual gearbox 125
Engine compartment 189
Automatic gearbox 125
Checking levels 189
Driving mode 129
Hill start assist
Gear efficiency indicator
129
130
Checks 192
Advice on care and maintenance 194 Audio equipment and telematics .
AdBlue ® (BlueHDi) 194 CITROËN Connect Radio
Stop & Start 130
Tyre under-inflation detection 132 CITROËN Connect Nav
CITROËN ConnectedCAM ® 134
Driving and manoeuvring aids – General
recommendations 135
Speed Limit recognition and recommendation 137
Programmable speed limiter
Cruise control – particular recommendations 144
142 In the event of a breakdown Alphabetical index .
Warning triangle 197
Programmable cruise control 144 Running out of fuel (Diesel) 197
Memorising speeds 146 Tool kit 198 Access to additional videos
Highway Driver Assist 147 Temporary puncture repair kit 199
Adaptive Cruise Control 147 Spare wheel 203
Active Lane Keeping Assist 151 Changing a bulb 206
Active Safety Brake with Collision Risk Alert and Changing a fuse 212
Intelligent emergency braking assistance 156 12 V battery 215
Fatigue detection system 159 Towing the vehicle 219
Active Lane Departure Warning System 161
Active Blind Spot Monitoring System 164 bit.ly/helpPSA
Parking sensors 167
Top Rear Vision – Top 360 Vision 168
Park Assist 173
3
Overview
Instruments and controls 6. Courtesy lamp

Warning lamp display for seat belts and
Steering mounted controls
front passenger airbag

Sunroof and blind controls
Interior rear view mirror
Emergency and assistance call buttons
CITROËN ConnectedCAM ®
7. Touch screen with CITROËN Connect
Radio or CITROËN Connect Nav
8. Ignition switch
or
1. External lighting/direction indicator
START/STOP button
controls
9. Gearbox controls
2. Wiper/screenwash/trip computer controls
10. Electric parking brake control
3. Steering mounted gear control paddles
11. Wireless charger
(with automatic gearbox)
12 V socket/USB socket
4. Speed limiter/cruise control controls
12. Driving mode (ECO, SPORT) selection
5. Audio system setting controls
buttons
Hill Assist Descent Control
Advanced Grip Control
1. Door mirror and electric window control 13. Glove box
panel Front passenger airbag deactivation
2. Bonnet release switch
3. Dashboard fuses 14. Centre switch panel (lower and upper)
4. Horn 15. Side switch panel
Driver front airbag
5. Instrument panel
4
Overview .
Side switch panel 8. Activation/deactivation of the electric child
lock
Centre switch panel (lower and

upper)
1. Touch screen controls (CITROËN Connect

1. Halogen headlamp beam height manual Radio or CITROËN Connect Nav)
adjustment 2. Heated seats controls
2. Deactivation of the Active Lane Departure 3. Windscreen and front windows demisting
Warning System
4. Manual recirculation of the interior air
3. Hands-free tailgate opening/closing
5. Rear screen demisting/defrosting
4. Activation of the Active Lane Keeping
6. Ventilation off
Assist function
7. Locking/Unlocking from the inside
5. Programmable heating operation indicator
8. Deactivation of Stop & Start
lamp
9. Hazard warning lamps
6. Activation of the heated windscreen
7. Deactivation of the interior volumetric and
anti-tilt monitoring alarm
5
Eco-driving
Eco-driving
Eco-driving is a range of everyday practices that allow the motorist to optimise their fuel consumption and CO2 emissions.
Optimise the use of your gearbox Drive smoothly

With a manual gearbox, move off gently and Maintain a safe distance between vehicles, Unless it has automatic regulation, switch off
change up without waiting. While accelerating, use engine braking rather than the the air conditioning as soon as the desired
change up early. brake pedal, and press the accelerator temperature has been reached.
progressively. These practices contribute Switch off the demisting and defrosting
With an automatic gearbox, give preference towards a reduction in fuel consumption and controls, if these are not automatically
to automatic mode and avoid pressing the CO2 emissions and also help reduce the managed.
accelerator pedal heavily or suddenly. background traffic noise. Switch off the heated seat as soon as
The gear efficiency indicator invites you to possible.
If your vehicle has cruise control, make use of
engage the most suitable gear: as soon as the the system at speeds above 25 mph (40 km/h) Switch off the headlamps and front foglamps
indication is displayed in the instrument panel, when the traffic is flowing well. when the ambient light level does not require
follow it straight away. their use.
For vehicles fitted with an automatic gearbox,
this indicator appears only in manual mode. Control the use of your electrical Avoid running the engine before moving off,
equipment particularly in winter; your vehicle will warm up
much faster while driving.
Before moving off, if the passenger
compartment is too warm, ventilate it by As a passenger, if you avoid connecting your
opening the windows and air vents before multimedia devices (film, music, video game,
using the air conditioning. etc.), you will contribute towards limiting the
Above 31 mph (50 km/h), close the windows consumption of electrical energy, and so of
and leave the air vents open. fuel.
Consider using equipment that can help Disconnect your portable devices before
keep the temperature in the passenger leaving the vehicle.
compartment down (sunroof blind and window
blinds, etc.).
6
Eco-driving .
Limit the causes of excess Observe the recommendations on

consumption maintenance
Spread loads throughout the vehicle; place Check the tyre pressures regularly, when cold, With a BlueHDi Diesel engine, if the SCR
the heaviest items at the back of the boot, as referring to the label in the door aperture, system is faulty, your vehicle becomes
close as possible to the rear seats. driver's side. polluting. Visit a CITROËN dealer or
Limit the loads carried in the vehicle and Carry out this check in particular: a qualified workshop as soon as possible to
reduce wind resistance (roof bars, roof rack, - before a long journey, bring your vehicle's nitrogen oxides emissions
bicycle carrier, trailer, etc.). Preferably, use - at each change of season, back in line with regulations.
a roof box. - after a long period out of use.
Remove roof bars and roof racks after use. Do not forget the spare wheel and the tyres on When filling the tank, do not continue after the
any trailer or caravan. 3rd cut-off of the nozzle to avoid overflow.
At the end of winter, remove snow tyres and
refit your summer tyres. Have your vehicle serviced regularly (engine At the wheel of your new vehicle, it is only
oil, oil filter, air filter, cabin filter, etc.) and after the first 1,900 miles (3,000 kilometres)
observe the schedule of operations in the that you will see the fuel consumption settle
manufacturer's service schedule. down to a consistent average.
7
Instruments
Instrument panel with dials Colour display Digital instrument panel

This instrument panel can be customised.
The content and availability of information
depends on the display mode selected and the
vehicle's equipment.
Description
Example with the "PERSONAL" display mode.
Dials 1. Cruise control or speed limiter settings.

1. Speedometer (mph or km/h). Speed suggested by the speed limit
2. Fuel level indicator. recognition system.
3. Engine coolant fluid temperature gauge. 2. Gear efficiency and/or selector position
4. Rev counter (x 1,000 rpm). indicator, gear and Sport and Snow
modes with an automatic gearbox.
5. Display screen.
3. Display area: alert message or state 1. Fuel level indicator.
of functions, trip computer, digital
2. Rev counter (x 1,000 rpm).
speedometer (mph or km/h), range
Control buttons associated with the AdBlue ® and the SCR
3. Gear efficiency indicator.
Status of the automatic gearbox.
A. Resetting the service indicator. system (miles or km), etc.
Driving mode.
Alert log display. 4 Service indicator, then total distance
4. Digital speedometer (mph or km/h).
Reminder of servicing information or the recorder (miles or km).
These functions are displayed 5. Cruise control or speed limiter settings.
remaining range associated with AdBlue ®
and the SCR system (miles or km). successively on switching on the ignition. 6. Display of speed limit signs.
Tyre pressure status information display. 5 Trip distance recorder (miles or km).
B. General lighting dimmer.
C. Resetting the trip distance recorder.
8
Instruments
7.
8.
9.
Analogue speedometer (mph or km/h).
Engine oil temperature gauge.
Engine coolant temperature indicator
Permanent information
Whatever the display mode selected, the
instrument panel displays:
Customisation of the
instrument panel
You can modify the appearance of the
1
(°Celsius).
- in fixed locations:
10. Total distance recorder (miles or km). instrument panel by choosing:
• the analogue speedometer,
11. Trip distance recorder (miles or km). - a display colour,
• the fuel level indicator,
- a display mode.
• the engine coolant temperature indicator,
• the distance recorders,
Display language and units
Control button - in variable locations:
• gearbox and gear efficiency indicator They depend on the configuration of the
A. Short press: display the alerts log, information, touch screen.
reminder of servicing information or the • the digital speedometer, When travelling abroad, the speed must
remaining range associated with the • status or alert messages displayed be shown in the official units of the
AdBlue ® and the SCR system (miles or temporarily. country you are driving in (mph, miles or
km) and tyre pressure status information km/h, km).
display.
Long press: reset the service indicator or
trip distance recorder (depending on the Optional information As a safety measure, these adjustments
context). must be carried out with the vehicle
Depending on the display mode selected and
stationary.
active features, additional information can be
displayed:
- the rev counter, Choosing a display colour
Displays - the trip computer,
F Press Settings in the upper bar of
- driving aids,
Some lamps have a fixed location, the others the touch screen.
- the speed limiter or cruise control,
can alter location.
- the media currently playing,
For certain functions that have indicator lamps
- navigation instructions, F Select "Colour schemes".
for both operation and for deactivation, there is
- the analogue speedometer, F Select a display colour.
only one dedicated location.
- engine oil level and temperature
9
Instruments
Choice of display mode - "DRIVING": standard display, additionally With CITROËN Connect Nav
showing the current driving aid systems
information. F Press Settings in the upper bar
of the touch screen.
- "MINIMAL": minimal display with digital
speedometer and the distance recorders
and, in the event of a warning only, the
fuel level indicator and the engine coolant F Select "OPTIONS".
temperature indicator.
To modify the display mode of the instrument F Select "Instrument panel
panel: personalisation".
F Turn the knob located to the left of the - "PERSONAL": minimal display and
steering wheel to display and scroll through possibility of selecting optional information
F For each personalised display area, left and
the different modes on the left-hand side of to be displayed in the customisable areas
right, select a type of information using the
the instrument panel. on the left and right.
corresponding scroll arrows in the touch
F Once the selected display mode appears, screen:
To enter settings for the "PERSONAL"
press on the knob to validate. • "Driving aids".
display mode and select the information to
The new display mode is applied instantly. • "Fault" (empty).
be displayed in the customisable areas of the
If the knob is not moved, the selected display • "Temperatures" (engine oil).
instrument panel:
mode is automatically applied after a few • "Media".
moments. • "Navigation".
With CITROËN Connect Radio • "Trip computer".
Each mode corresponds to the type of • "Vigilance level".
information displayed in the instrument panel. F Press Settings in the upper bar
of the touch screen. • "Rev counter".
- "DIALS": standard display of the analogue F Confirm to save and quit.
and digital speedometers, the rev counter,
the fuel level indicator, the engine coolant F Select "Configuration". If the current display mode is "PERSONAL", the
temperature indicator and the distance
new selection is displayed immediately.
recorder.
F Select "Instrument panel
- "NAVIGATION": standard display, personalisation".
additionally showing the current navigation As a safety measure, these adjustments
information (map and navigation must be carried out with the vehicle
instructions). stationary.
10
Instruments
Warning and indicator

lamps
Persistent warning lamp
When the engine is running or the vehicle is
being driven, the illumination of a red or orange
1
Displayed as symbols, visual indicators
warning lamp indicates a fault that needs
which inform the driver of the occurrence
further investigation, using any associated
of a malfunction (warning lamps) or of the
message and the description of the warning
operating status of a system (operation or
lamp in the documentation.
deactivation indicator lamps). Certain lamps
light up in two ways (fixed or flashing) and/or in Where a warning lamp remains lit
several colours.
The references (1), (2) and (3) in the warning
and indicator lamp description indicate whether
Associated warnings you should contact a qualified professional
in addition to the immediate recommended
The illumination of a lamp can be accompanied actions.
by an audible signal and/or a message
displayed in a screen. (1): You must stop as soon as it is safe to do
Relating the type of alert to the operating status so and switch off the ignition.
of the vehicle allows you to determine whether
the situation is normal or a fault has occurred: (2): Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
refer to the description of each lamp for further workshop.
information.
(3): Go to a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
When the ignition is switched on

Certain red or orange warning lamps come on
for a few seconds when the ignition is switched
on. These warning lamps should go off as soon
as the engine is started.
For more information on equipment or
a function, refer to the corresponding section.
11
Instruments
List of warning and indicator lamps

Warning/indicator lamp State Cause Actions/Observations
Red warning/indicator lamps

STOP Fixed, associated Indicates a serious fault with the Carry out (1) and then (2).
with another warning engine, braking system, power
lamp, accompanied steering, automatic gearbox or
by the display of a major electrical fault.
a message and an
audible signal.
Engine oil Fixed. There is a fault with the engine Carry out (1) and then (2).
pressure lubrication system.
Maximum Fixed. The temperature of the cooling Carry out (1), then wait until the engine has cooled
coolant system is too high. down before topping up to the required level if
temperature necessary. If the problem persists, carry out (2).
Battery charge Fixed. The battery charging circuit has Clean and retighten the terminals. If the warning
a fault (dirty or loose terminals, slack lamp does not go off when the engine is started, carry
or cut alternator belt, etc.). out (2).
Door(s) open Fixed, associated with If one of the doors or the boot is not
a message identifying fully closed (speed below 6 mph
the door. [10 km/h]).
Fixed, associated with If one of the doors or the boot is not

a message identifying fully closed (speed above 6 mph
the door, together with [10 km/h]).
an audible signal.
12
Instruments
Warning/indicator lamp
Seat belt not

fastened/
State
Fixed or flashing
accompanied by an
Cause
A seat belt has not been fastened or

has been unfastened.
Actions/Observations
1
unfastened audible signal.
Electric parking Fixed. The electric parking brake is applied.

brake
Flashing. The electric parking brake is not Carry out (1): park on level ground (horizontally).
applied automatically. With a manual gearbox, engage a gear.
The application/release is faulty. With an automatic gearbox, place the gear selector
in mode P.
Switch off the ignition and carry out (2).
Braking Fixed. The brake fluid level has dropped Carry out (1), then top up with fluid that complies with
significantly. the manufacturer's recommendations. If the problem
persists, carry out (2).
Fixed. The electronic brake force Carry out (1) and then (2).
distribution (EBFD) system is faulty.
+
13
Instruments
Orange warning/indicator lamps

Anti-lock Braking Fixed. The anti-lock braking system has The vehicle retains conventional braking.
System (ABS) a fault. Drive carefully at reduced speed, then carry out (3).
Service Temporarily on, One or more minor anomalies, Identify the cause of the anomaly using the message
accompanied by the for which there is/are no specific displayed in the instrument panel.
display of a message. warning lamp, have been detected. You can deal with certain anomalies yourself, for
example an open door or the start of saturation of the
particle filter.
For other anomalies, such as a fault with the tyre
under-inflation detection system, carry out (3).
Fixed, accompanied One or more major anomalies, Identify the cause of the anomaly using the message
by the display of for which there is/are no specific displayed in the instrument panel, then carry out (3).
a message. warning lamp, have been detected.
Service warning lamp The servicing interval has been The vehicle must be serviced as soon as possible.
fixed and service exceeded. Only with BlueHDi Diesel engines.
spanner flashing then
+ fixed.
(1): You must stop as soon as it is safe to do (2): Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified (3): Go to a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
so and switch off the ignition. workshop. workshop.
14
Instruments
AdBlue ®
State
On for around
30 seconds when
Cause
The remaining driving range is

between 1,500 and 500 miles
Top up the AdBlue ®.

1
starting the vehicle, (2,400 and 800 km).
accompanied by
a message indicating
the remaining driving
range.
Fixed, on switching The remaining driving range is Top up the AdBlue ® as soon as possible, or carry
on the ignition, between 500 and 62 miles (800 and out (3).
accompanied by an 100 km).
audible signal and
a message indicating the
remaining driving range.
Flashing, The remaining driving range is less You must top up the AdBlue ® to avoid starting
accompanied by an than 62 miles (100 km). being prevented, or carry out (3).
audible signal and
range.
Flashing, The AdBlue ® tank is empty: the To restart the engine, top up the AdBlue ® or carry
accompanied by an starting prevention system required out (2).
audible signal and by legislation prevents starting of the It is essential to add at least 5 litres of AdBlue ® to its
a message indicating engine. tank.
that starting is
prevented.
15
Instruments
SCR emissions Fixed when the ignition is A fault with the SCR emissions This alert disappears once the exhaust emissions
control system switched on, accompanied control system has been detected. return to normal levels.
+ by an audible signal and
a message.
AdBlue ® warning lamp Depending on the message Carry out (3) as soon as possible to avoid starting
flashing, on switching displayed, you can continue driving being prevented.
+
on the ignition, for up to 685 miles (1,100 km) before
associated with the the engine starting prevention
fixed Service and system is triggered.
Engine self-diagnostic
warning lamps,
accompanied by an
audible signal and
range.
AdBlue ® warning An engine immobiliser prevents To start the engine, carry out (2).
lamp flashing, on the engine from restarting (over
switching on the the authorised driving limit after
ignition, associated confirmation of a fault with the
with the fixed Service emissions control system).
and Engine self-
diagnostic warning
lamps, accompanied
by an audible signal
and a message
indicating that starting
is prevented.
16
Instruments
Engine self-
diagnostic
State
Flashing.
Cause
The engine management system has

a fault.
There is a risk that the catalytic converter will be destroyed.

Carry out (2) without fail.
1
system
Fixed. The emission control system has The warning lamp should go off when the engine is started.
a fault. Carry out (3) quickly.
Collision Risk Flashing. The system is operating. The vehicle brakes briefly so as to reduce the speed
Alert/Active of frontal collision with the vehicle ahead.
Safety Brake
Fixed, accompanied The system has a fault. Carry out (3).

by a message and an
audible signal.
Collision Risk Fixed, accompanied The system has been deactivated, via
Alert/Active by the display of the vehicle configuration menu.
Safety Brake a message.
Active Lane Fixed. The system has been automatically

Departure deactivated or placed on standby.
Warning System
Flashing. You are about to cross a broken The system is activated, then corrects the trajectory
lane marking without operating the on the side of the lane marking detected.
direction indicators.
Active Lane Fixed. The system has a fault. Carry out (3).
Departure
+ Warning System
17
Instruments
Active Lane Fixed, accompanied The system has a fault. Carry out (3).
Keeping Assist by the Service
+ warning lamp.
Dynamic Fixed. The system is deactivated. The DSC/ASR system is reactivated automatically
stability control when the vehicle is started, and from around 31 mph
(DSC)/Anti-slip (50 km/h).
regulation (ASR) Below 31 mph (50 km/h), you can reactivate it
manually.
Dynamic Flashing. The DSC/ASR adjustment is

stability control activated if there is a loss of grip or
(DSC)/Anti-slip trajectory.
regulation (ASR)
Fixed. The DSC/ASR system has a fault. Carry out (3).
Emergency Fixed, accompanied Emergency braking does not have If automatic release is not available, use manual
brake fault (with by the message full power. release.
electric parking "Parking brake fault".
+ brake)
18
Instruments
Under-inflation
State
Fixed, accompanied
Cause
The pressure in one or more wheels

is too low.
Check the pressure of the tyres as soon as possible.

Reinitialise the detection system after adjusting the
1
and a message. pressure.
Under-inflation The system is faulty: tyre pressures Under-inflation detection is no longer monitored.
warning lamp flashing are no longer monitored. As soon as possible, check the pressure of the tyres
+ then fixed and and carry out (3).
Service warning lamp
fixed.
Diesel engine Fixed. The ignition is on. Wait until the warning lamp goes off before starting.
pre-heating The period of If the engine does not start, switch the ignition off and
illumination depends then on, wait until the lamp goes off again, then start
on the climatic the engine.
conditions.
Front passenger Fixed. The front passenger airbag is In this case, do NOT install a "rearward facing"
airbag (ON) activated. child seat on the front passenger seat – risk of
The control is in the "ON" position. serious injury!
Front passenger Fixed. The front passenger airbag is You can install a "rearward facing" child seat, unless
airbag (OFF) deactivated. there is a fault with the airbags (Airbags warning lamp
The control is in the "OFF" position. on).
Airbags Fixed. One of the airbags or seat belt Carry out (3).
pretensioners is faulty.
19
Instruments
Low fuel level Fixed (warning When it first comes on, there Refuel without delay to avoid running out of fuel.
lamp or LED) and remains approximately 5 litres of Never drive until completely empty, as this could
needle in the red fuel in the tank (reserve). damage the emissions control and injection systems.
or
zone (depending on
version), accompanied
and a message.
The audible signal
and the message
are repeated with
increasing frequency
as the level drops
towards zero.
Diesel filter Fixed. The Diesel filter contains water. Risk of damage to the injection system: carry out (2)
without delay.
Particle filter Fixed, accompanied This indicates that the particle filter As soon as the traffic conditions permit, regenerate
(Diesel) by an audible signal is beginning to saturate. the filter by driving at a speed of at least 37 mph
and a message about (60 km/h) until the warning lamp goes off.
the risk of particle
filter blockage.
Fixed, accompanied by This indicates that the level in the Carry out (3).
an audible signal and additive tank is low.
a message signalling
that the additive level
in the particle filter is
too low.
20
Instruments
Deactivation of
the automatic
State
Fixed.
Cause
The "automatic application" (on

switching off the engine) and
Carry out (3) if automatic application/release is no

longer possible.
1
functions (with "automatic release" (on acceleration) The brake can be applied or released manually.
electric parking functions are deactivated.
brake) In the event of a fault, illumination of
this warning lamp is accompanied by
a message.
Automatic Fixed, accompanied Automatic application is not Use the electric parking brake control lever.
application by the message available, the parking brake can only If automatic release is also not available, use manual
(with electric "Parking brake fault". be used manually. release.
+ parking brake)
Malfunction Fixed. The electric parking brake has Carry out (3) quickly.
(with electric a fault.
parking brake)
Fixed, accompanied You can no longer immobilise the If manual application and release are not working, the
by the message vehicle with the engine running. electric parking brake control lever is faulty.
"Parking brake fault". The automatic functions must be used at all times and
+
are automatically reactivated in the event of failure of
the control lever.
Carry out (2).
21
Instruments
Malfunction Fixed, accompanied The parking brake is faulty: manual When stationary, to immobilise your vehicle:
(with electric by the message and automatic functions may not be F Pull and hold the control lever for approximately
+ parking brake) "Parking brake fault". working. 7 to 15 seconds, until the indicator lamp comes on
in the instrument panel.
If this procedure does not work, secure your vehicle:
F Park on a level surface.
+ F With a manual gearbox, engage a gear.
F With an automatic gearbox, select P, then put the
supplied chocks against one of the wheels.
Then carry out (2).
Rear foglamps Fixed. The lamps are on.
Parking sensors Fixed, accompanied The system has a fault. Carry out (3).
by the display of
a message and an
audible signal.
Foot on the Fixed. Stop & Start: the change to START Fully depress the clutch pedal.
clutch mode is rejected because the clutch
pedal is not fully depressed.
22
Instruments
Hill start assist

State
Fixed.
Cause
The system has a fault.

Carry out (3).

1
+
Power steering Fixed. The power steering has a fault. Drive carefully at moderate speed, then carry out (3).
Stop & Start Fixed, accompanied The Stop & Start system is The engine will not switch off at the next traffic stop.
by the display of deactivated. Press the button to reactivate the Stop & Start.
a message.
Green warning/indicator lamps

Stop & Start Fixed. When the vehicle stops, the Stop &
Start puts the engine into STOP mode.
Flashing temporarily. STOP mode is momentarily

unavailable or START mode is
automatically triggered.
23
Instruments
Park Assist Fixed. The function is active.
Active Lane Fixed. The function has been activated. All the conditions have been met: the system is
Keeping Assist operating.
Direction Flashing with audible The direction indicators are on.

indicators signal.
Sidelamps Fixed. The lamps are on.
Dipped beam Fixed. The lamps are on.

headlamps
Automatic Fixed. The function has been activated in

headlamp the touch screen (Driving/Vehicle
+ dipping menu).
The lighting control stalk is in the
"AUTO" position.
or
24
Instruments
Front foglamps
State
Fixed.
Cause
The front foglamps are on.

1
Automatic Fixed. Automatic front wiping is activated.
wiping
Blue warning/indicator lamps

Main beam Fixed. The main beams are on.
headlamps
Black/white warning/indicator lamps

Hill Assist Fixed. The function has been activated, Reduce the vehicle speed to below 19 mph (30 km/h).
Descent but is currently paused because the
speed is too high.
(grey)
25
Instruments
Indicators Resetting the service indicator
Service indicator
The service indicator is displayed on the instrument panel. Depending on the vehicle version:
- the distance recorder display line indicates the distance remaining before the next service is
due, or the distance travelled since it was due preceded by the sign "-".
- an alert message indicates the distance remaining, as well as the period before the next service
is due or how long it is overdue.
Warning/indicator Actions/
State Cause The service indicator must be reset after each
lamp Observations
service.
Service Lights up temporarily Between 620 and If you have carried out the service on your
spanner when the ignition is 1,860 miles (1,000 and vehicle yourself:
switched on. 3,000 km) remain before F switch off the ignition,
the next service is due. F press and hold this button,
F switch on the ignition; the distance recorder
Fixed, when the The service is due in Have your vehicle display begins a countdown,
ignition is switched less than 620 miles serviced very soon. F release the button when =0 is displayed; the
on. (1,000 km). spanner disappears.
Service Flashing then fixed, when The servicing interval Have your vehicle
spanner the ignition is switched on. has been exceeded. serviced as soon as
flashing (With BlueHDi Diesel possible.
+ Following this operation, if you wish to
engines, associated
disconnect the battery, lock the vehicle
with the Service warning
and wait at least five minutes for the reset
lamp).
to be registered.
26
Instruments
Retrieving the service

information
You can access the service information at any
The level read will only be correct if the
vehicle is on level ground and the engine
has been off for more than 30 minutes.
In the event of a fault with the electric
indicator, the oil level is no longer
monitored.
1
time in the instrument panel. If the system is faulty, you must check the
engine oil level using the manual dipstick
located under the bonnet.
Low oil level
For more information on Checking levels,
This is indicated by the display of a message refer to the corresponding section.
prompting you to top up, accompanied by the
Service warning lamp and an audible signal.
If the low oil level is confirmed by a check using
F Press this button to temporarily display the
the dipstick, the level must be topped up to
service information.
avoid damage to the engine.
Engine coolant temperature
The distance indicated (in miles or refer to the corresponding section. gauge
kilometres) is calculated according to the
distance covered and the time elapsed
since the last service.
The alert may be triggered close to a due Oil level indicator fault
date.
This is signalled by the display of the "Oil
level measurement invalid" message in the
instrument panel.
Engine oil level indicator Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
(Depending on version.)
On versions fitted with an electric oil level

indicator, the state of the engine oil level is With the engine running:
displayed in the instrument panel for a few - in zone A, the temperature is correct,
seconds after switching the ignition on, after - in zone B, the temperature is too high; the
the servicing information, in the form of associated warning lamp and the central
messages. STOP warning lamp come on in red in the
instrument panel, accompanied by the
display of a message and an audible signal.
27
Instruments
You must stop the vehicle as soon as it is Manual display of the range
safe to do so. Warning/
Remaining
Wait a few minutes before switching off the While the range is greater than 1,500 miles indicator Action
range
engine. (2,400 km), it is not displayed automatically. lamps lit
Top up. Between 1,500 miles

After switching off the ignition, carefully and 500 miles
open the bonnet and check the coolant (2,400 km and 800 km)
level.
Top up as soon Between 500 miles
as possible. and 62 miles
(800 km and 100 km)
refer to the corresponding section.
F Press this button to temporarily display the A top-up is Between

driving range. vital, there is 62 miles
AdBlue® range indicators the risk that the and 0 miles
(BlueHDi) Actions required related to a lack
engine will be (100 km and
prevented from 0 km)
The Diesel BlueHDi engines are equipped with of AdBlue® starting.
a system that associates the SCR (Selective The following warning lamps light up when the
Catalytic Reduction) emissions control system quantity of AdBlue ® is lower than the reserve To be able 0 miles (0 km)
and the Diesel particle filter (DPF) for the level corresponding to a range of 1,500 miles to restart the
treatment of exhaust gases. They cannot (2,400 km). engine, add at
function without AdBlue ® fluid. Together with the warning lamps, messages least 5 litres of
regularly remind you of the need to top up to AdBlue ® to its
avoid engine starting being prevented. Refer to tank.
The engine starting prevention system
the Warning and indicator lamps section for
required by regulations is activated
details of the messages displayed.
automatically once the AdBlue ® tank is
empty. It is then no longer possible to
start the engine until the minimum level of For more information on AdBlue ®
AdBlue ® has been topped up. (BlueHDi engines), and in particular on
topping up, refer to the corresponding
section.
28
Instruments
Malfunction of the SCR

emissions control system
Malfunction detection
The AdBlue warning lamp flashes,
accompanied by the display of a message
("Emissions fault: Starting prevented in x
miles") indicating the remaining range in miles
Manual test in the
instrument panel
This function allows you, at any time, to check
1
or kilometres. certain indicators and display the alerts log.
If a malfunction is detected, While driving, the message is displayed every
these warning lamps come on, 30 seconds. The alert is repeated when
accompanied by an audible signal switching on the ignition.
and the display of an "Emissions You can continue driving for up to 685 miles
fault" message. (1,100 km) before the engine starting
prevention system is triggered.
Have the system checked by a CITROËN

dealer or a qualified workshop as soon as
The alert is triggered while driving as soon
possible. F With the engine running, briefly press this
as the fault is detected for the first time, then
when switching on the ignition for subsequent button.
journeys, while the fault persists. Starting prevented The following information is displayed in the
instrument panel:
Every time the ignition is switched on, the
- the engine oil level,
message "Emissions fault: Starting prevented"
- when the next service is due,
If it is a temporary fault, the alert is displayed.
- the driving range for the AdBlue and the
disappears during the next journey,
SCR system for BlueHDi Diesel versions,
after self-diagnostic checks of the SCR To be able to restart the engine, call
- display of the state of pressure of the tyres,
emissions control system. on a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
- current alerts.
workshop.
Malfunction confirmed during the

permitted driving phase (between
685 miles and 0 miles (1,100 km and 0 km)) This information is also displayed
automatically every time the ignition is
If the warning lamp is still on after 31 miles switched on.
(50 km) of driving, the fault in the SCR system
is confirmed.
29
Instruments
Distance recorders Trip distance recorder and the vehicle's ambient lighting or button B
to reduce it.
It measures the distance travelled since it was Release the button when the desired level is
reset by the driver. reached.
With CITROËN Connect

Radio
F Press this button to select the
Settings menu.
The total and trip distances are displayed for
thirty seconds when the ignition is switched off, F Select "Brightness".
when the driver's door is opened and when the
vehicle is locked or unlocked. Resetting the trip recorder
F With the ignition on, press the button until F Adjust the brightness by pressing
zeros appear. the arrows or moving the slider.
When travelling abroad, you may need to

change the units of distance and speed: Lighting dimmer The settings are applied immediately.
The display of distance and speed must This system allows the brightness of the F Press outside the settings window to exit.
be expressed in the official unit of the instruments and controls to be adjusted to suit
country (km or miles). The change of units the ambient light level.
You can also switch off the screen:
is done via the screen configuration menu,
with the vehicle stationary. With buttons F Press this button to select the
Settings menu.
F Select "Dark".
Total distance recorder
It measures the total distance travelled by the
vehicle since its first registration.
The screen goes off completely.
F Press the screen again (anywhere on its
surface) to activate it.
With the lamps on, press button A to increase
the brightness of the instruments and controls
30
Instruments
With CITROËN Connect Nav
F Press this button to select the

Trip computer
Information displayed about the current journey
(range, fuel consumption, average speed, etc.).
Display of the different trip computer tabs
F Press this button, located on the end of the

wiper control stalk, to display the different
1
Settings menu. tabs in turn.
F Select "OPTIONS".
Display of data in the - The current information with:
• the range,
instrument panel • the current fuel consumption,
F Select "Screen configuration".
• the Stop & Start time counter.
- Trip "1" with:

F Select the "Brightness" tab. • the average speed,
• the average fuel consumption,
F Adjust the brightness by pressing • the distance travelled,
the arrows or moving the slider. for the first trip.
- Trip "2" with:

F Press this button to save and exit. • the average speed,
• the average fuel consumption,
• the distance travelled,
With instrument panels with dials for the second trip.
You can also switch off the screen: The display of trip computer data is selected by
pressing on the end of the wiper control stalk or
Trip reset
F Press this button to select the by rotating the thumb wheel situated to the left
Settings menu. of the steering wheel.
F Select "Switch off screen".
With digital instrument panel
Trip computer data is displayed permanently
when you select the display mode "DRIVING"
The screen goes off completely. or "PERSONAL", depending on version.
F Press the screen again (anywhere on its In all other display modes, pressing the end of F When the desired trip is displayed, press
surface) to activate it. the wiper control stalk will cause this data to the button on the end of the wiper control
appear temporarily in a specific window. stalk for more than 2 seconds.
Trips "1" and "2" are independent and are used
identically.
31
Instruments
A few definitions… Current fuel consumption Stop & Start time counter
Range (mpg or l/100 km or km/l)
(minutes/seconds or hours/minutes)
(miles or km) Calculated during the last few
seconds.
The distance which can
If your vehicle is fitted with Stop & Start, a time
still be travelled with the
counter calculates the time spent in STOP
fuel remaining in the tank This function is only displayed from 19 mph mode during a journey.
(depending on the average (30 km/h). It resets to zero every time the ignition is
fuel consumption over the
switched on.
last few miles (kilometres)
travelled). Average fuel consumption
Touch screen
(mpg or l/100 km or km/l)
This system gives access to:
This value may vary following a change in Calculated since the last trip - the permanent display of the time and
the style of driving or the terrain, resulting computer reset. the exterior temperature (a blue symbol
in a significant change in the current fuel
appears when there is a risk of ice).
consumption.
- the heating/air conditioning controls.
Average speed - the menus for adjusting settings for vehicle
When the range falls below 19 miles (30 km), functions and systems.
dashes are displayed. (mph or km/h) - the audio system and telephone controls
After filling with at least 5 litres of fuel, the Calculated since the last trip and the display of associated information.
range is recalculated and is displayed if it computer reset. - the display of visual manoeuvring aid
exceeds 62 miles (100 km). functions (visual parking sensor information,
Park Assist, etc.).
If dashes instead of figures continue Distance travelled - Internet services and the display of
associated information.
to be displayed when driving, contact
(miles or km) and, depending on equipment, it gives access
a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
Calculated since the last trip to:
computer reset. - the mode and intensity adjustment for the
massage function of the front seats.
- the navigation system controls and the
display of associated information.
32
Instruments
For safety reasons, the vehicle must

always be stationary for the driver to
perform operations that require close
Menus * The availability of connected navigation
services is confirmed by the display of
the TomTom Traffic logo on the map. For
more information, refer to the connected
1
attention.
navigation section.
Some functions are not accessible when
driving. ** Depending on equipment.
Telephone.
Principles See the "Audio equipment and telematics" section.
Use the buttons arranged below the touch Applications.
screen for access to the menus, then press the Display of available connected
virtual buttons in the touch screen. Radio Media. services and access to the Eco-
Some menus may display across two pages: See the "Audio equipment and telematics" section. coaching function.
press the "OPTIONS" button to access the
second page. Air conditioning. For the other functions, refer to the "Audio
Settings for temperature, air flow, equipment and telematics" section.
etc.
After a few moments with no action on the
second page, the first page is displayed For more information on the Manual air Press with three fingers on the touch
automatically. conditioning and the Dual-zone automatic screen to show all of the menu buttons.
air conditioning, refer to the corresponding
To deactivate/activate a function, select "OFF" sections.
or "ON". Volume adjustment/mute.
Connected navigation.* See the "Audio equipment and
Settings for a function. See the "Audio equipment and telematics" section.
telematics" section.
Driving or Vehicle.**
Access to additional information on
the function.
Activation, deactivation and settings Information banner(s)
for certain functions.
Certain information is displayed permanently in
Confirm. The functions accessible from this menu are the touch screen banner(s).
arranged on two tabs: "Driving functions" and
"Vehicle settings".
Return to the previous page or
confirm.
33
Instruments
CITROËN Connect Radio upper

banner
Date and time adjustment F Select "Setting the time-date".
- Time and exterior temperature (a blue

warning lamp appears when there is a risk With CITROËN Connect
of ice). Radio F Select the "Date" or "Time" tab.
- Reminder of the air conditioning information, F Set the date and/or time using the numeric
F Select the Settings menu in
and direct access to the corresponding keypad.
the upper banner of the touch
menu. F Confirm with "OK".
screen.
- Reminder of the Radio Media and
Telephone menus information. F Select "Configuration". Additional settings
- Notifications.
You can choose:
- Access to the Settings of the touch screen
F Select "Date and time". - The time zone.
and digital instrument panel (date/time,
- The display format of the date and time
languages, units, etc.).
(12h/24h).
- The summer time management function
CITROËN Connect Nav side banners (+1 hour).
F Select "Date" or "Time".
F Choose the display formats. - The synchronisation with GPS (UTC).
Left-hand side
F Change the date and/or time using the
- Exterior temperature (a blue warning lamp
numeric keypad. The system does not automatically
appears when there is a risk of ice).
F Confirm with "OK". manage the change between winter and
- Access to the Settings of the touch screen
and digital instrument panel (date/time, summer time (depending on the country
languages, units, etc.). With CITROËN Connect Nav of sale).
- Reminder of the air conditioning information,
and direct access to the corresponding Setting of the time and date is only available if
menu. synchronisation with the GPS is deactivated.
Right-hand side
- Time. F Select the Settings menu in the
- Notifications. touch screen banner.
- Reminder of the air conditioning information,
and direct access to the corresponding
menu. F Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
secondary page.
34
Access
Electronic key with remote Back-up procedures allow the vehicle to be

locked/unlocked in the event of a failure of
With Keyless Entry and Starting
control function and built- the remote control, the central locking, the
2
in key battery, etc. For more information on the Back-
up procedures, refer to the corresponding
Remote control function section.
Integral key
The key built into the remote control can be
used for the following operations, depending
on version:
- unlocking/locking/deadlocking the vehicle, F To eject the key or put it back in place, pull
- activation/deactivation of the mechanical and hold the button.
The remote control can be used for the child lock,
- activation/deactivation of the front
following functions, depending on version:
- unlocking/locking/deadlocking the vehicle passenger airbag,
Unlocking the vehicle
- back-up unlocking/locking of the doors.
and the fuel filler flap, With the remote control
- unlocking – opening/closing the boot,
- remote switching on of the lighting, F Press this button to unlock the
- activating/deactivating the alarm, vehicle.
Without Keyless Entry and Starting
- locating the vehicle,
- opening/closing the windows,
Unlocking is signalled by rapid flashing of
- closing the sunroof and the blind,
the direction indicators for a few seconds.
- locating the vehicle,
Depending on version, the door mirrors unfold
- activating the vehicle's electronic
and the welcome lighting comes on.
immobiliser.
The remote control includes a conventional key

that allows the central locking/unlocking of the
vehicle using the door lock and the starting and
switching off of the engine. F To unfold or fold the key, press the button.
35
Access
Selective unlocking By default, selective tailgate unlocking is If one of the doors or the boot is still open,
activated and and motorised operation is the central locking does not work; the vehicle
Driver's door and fuel filler flap deactivated. locks, then immediately unlocks, identifiable by
F Press the unlocking button. the locks making a rebound sound.
F Press it again to unlock the other doors and F Make a long press on the button
the boot. to unlock the boot and trigger the
motorised opening of the tailgate.
When the vehicle is locked, if it is
The complete or selective unlocking and the
unlocked without the opening of a door
alarm deactivation, depending on version, The doors and fuel filler flap remain locked.
or the boot, it will automatically lock itself
is confirmed by flashing of the direction
again after thirty seconds.
indicators.
Depending on version, the door mirrors unfold.
If selective unlocking of the tailgate is
deactivated, pressing the button unlocks The automatic folding and unfolding of the
Opening the windows the whole vehicle. door mirrors can be deactivated via the
vehicle's configuration menu.
Depending on version, holding the
unlocking button pressed for more If motorised operation of the tailgate is
than 3 seconds opens the windows. deactivated, pressing the button releases
the tailgate. With the key
The windows stop when the button is released. To lock the vehicle, it is necessary to close F Turn the key in the driver's door lock
the tailgate again. towards the rear of the vehicle to lock it.
With the key
F Turn the key in the driver's door lock
Locking the vehicle
Check that the doors and boot are fully
towards the front of the vehicle to unlock.
With the remote control closed.
F Press this button to lock the Closing the windows and sunroof
Selective unlocking and opening vehicle. Maintaining pressure on the locking button
of the tailgate
allows the windows and, depending on version,
The settings for the selective tailgate unlocking Locking is confirmed by fixed illumination of the sunroof to be closed to the desired position.
and motorised operation are made in the the direction indicators for approximately two This operation also closes the sunroof blind.
vehicle configuration menu. seconds. Depending on version, the door
mirrors fold.
36
Access
Ensure that no person or object could

With the remote control F Briefly press this button. The
sidelamps, dipped beam
prevent the correct closing of the windows F Within 5 seconds of locking the headlamps, number plate lamps
2
and sunroof. vehicle, press the button again to and door mirror spotlamps come
If, on versions with alarm, you want to deadlock it. on for 30 seconds.
leave the windows and/or sunroof partly
open, you must first deactivate the Pressing again before the end of the timed
volumetric alarm protection.
With the key period switches off the lamps immediately.
For more information on the Alarm, refer
to the corresponding section. F Within 5 seconds of locking the vehicle, turn
the key to the rear again to deadlock it.
Locating your vehicle Keyless Entry and

Deadlocking This function allows you to identify your vehicle
Starting
from a distance, particularly in poor light. Your
vehicle must be locked.
Deadlocking deactivates the exterior F Press this button. The courtesy

and interior door controls, as well as the lamps will come on and the
central locking button on the dashboard. direction indicators will flash for
The horn remains operational. a few seconds.
You must therefore never leave anyone
inside the vehicle when it is deadlocked.
Welcome lighting
Availability of this function depends on version. This system allows the unlocking, locking
and starting of the vehicle, while carrying the
electronic key in the recognition zone "A".
If your vehicle is fitted with an alarm,
activation is confirmed by fixed
illumination of the direction indicators for
a few seconds.
37
Access
Opening the windows When unlocking the driver's door, flashing

The electronic key is also used as
Depending on version, keeping your hand of the direction indicators for a few seconds
a remote control. For more information
behind the door handle or maintaining the signals:
on the Remote control, refer to the
press on the tailgate opening control allows the - selective unlocking of the vehicle for
corresponding section.
windows to be opened to the desired position. versions without alarm,
- deactivation of the alarm for other versions.
Flashing of the direction indicators for a few Depending on version, the door mirrors unfold.
Unlocking the vehicle seconds signals:
- unlocking of the vehicle for versions without
alarm,
- deactivation of the alarm for other versions. Selective unlocking of the
Depending on version, the door mirrors unfold. tailgate
F Press the tailgate opening control to unlock
just the tailgate.
Selective unlocking The doors remain locked.
Driver's door and fuel flap
F Pass your hand behind the driver's door If selective unlocking of the tailgate is
handle. deactivated, pressing this control also
F To unlock the complete vehicle, pass unlocks the doors.
your hand behind the handle of one of the
passenger doors, with the electronic key
Complete unlocking Activation or deactivation of selective
close to the passenger door, or press the unlocking of the tailgate is done in
F With the electronic key in recognition tailgate opening control with the electronic the Vehicle/Driving menu of the
zone A, pass your hand behind the door key close to the rear of the vehicle. touch screen.
handle of one of the front doors or press the
tailgate opening control (at the left of the The setting for selective unlocking of
control). the driver's door is done in the vehicle
If the motorised tailgate opening control is configuration menu.
activated, this action triggers its automatic
opening.
38
Access
It is not possible to lock the vehicle if one of the

If one of the doors or the boot is still open In order to preserve the battery in the
electronic keys is left inside the vehicle.
or if the electronic key for the Keyless electronic key and the vehicle's battery,
2
Entry and Starting system has been left the "hands-free" functions are put into
inside the vehicle, the central locking does long-term standby after 21 days without Closing the windows and the sunroof
not take place. use. To restore these functions, press Maintaining pressure on the door handle or
If the vehicle is unlocked inadvertently one of the remote control buttons or start the tailgate control allows the windows and,
and there is then no action on the doors the engine with the electronic key in the depending on version, the sunroof to be closed
or boot, the vehicle will automatically lock reader. to the desired position.
itself again after about 30 seconds. For more information on Starting/ This operation also closes the sunroof blind.
If fitted to your vehicle, the alarm will also Switching off the engine with Keyless
be reactivated automatically. Entry and Starting, refer to the
The automatic folding and unfolding of the corresponding section. Make sure that no item or person could
door mirrors can be deactivated via the prevent the correct closing of the windows
vehicle's configuration menu. and sunroof.
Be particularly aware of children when
Locking the vehicle operating the windows.
Normal locking
Illumination of the direction indicators for a few
As a safety measure, never leave the
seconds signals:
vehicle without taking the electronic key
- the locking of the vehicle for versions
for the Keyless Entry and Starting system
without alarm,
with you, even for a short period.
- the activation of the alarm for other
Be aware of the risk of theft of the vehicle
versions.
when the electronic key for the Keyless
Depending on version, the door mirrors fold.
Entry and Starting system is in one of the
defined zones with the vehicle unlocked.
For safety and theft protection reasons,

F With the electronic key in recognition
never leave the electronic key in the
zone A, press on the door handle of one of
vehicle, even when you are close to it.
the front doors (at the markings) or on the
locking control located on the tailgate (on
the right of the control).
39
Access
F With the electronic key in recognition

Accumulations (water, dust, grime, salt Anti-theft protection
zone A, press once with your finger or
etc.) on the inner surface of the door Do not make any modifications to the
thumb on the door handle of one of the front
handle may affect detection. electronic engine immobiliser system; this
doors (at the markings) or on the locking
If cleaning the inner surface of the door could cause malfunctions.
control located on the tailgate (at the right of
handle using a cloth does not restore For vehicles with an ignition switch, do
the control) to lock the vehicle.
detection, contact a CITROËN dealer or not forget to remove the key and turn the
F Within 5 seconds, press the door handle
a qualified workshop. steering wheel to engage the steering
again to deadlock the vehicle.
A sudden splash of water (stream of water, lock.
high pressure jet washer, etc.) may be
identified by the system as the desire to
open the vehicle.
Advice
Locking the vehicle
Remote control Driving with the doors locked could make
Deadlocking The high frequency remote control is it more difficult for the emergency services
a sensitive system; do not operate it while to enter the vehicle in an emergency.
it is in your pocket as there is a possibility As a safety precaution (with children on
that it may unlock the vehicle, without you board), remove the key from the ignition or
being aware of it. take the electronic key when leaving the
Deadlocking deactivates the exterior vehicle, even for a short time.
Do not press the buttons of your remote
and interior door controls, as well as the
control out of range of your vehicle.
central locking button on the dashboard.
It might stop working. It will then be
The horn remains operational.
necessary to reinitialise it again. Purchasing a second-hand vehicle
You must therefore never leave anyone
The remote control does not operate when Have the key codes memorised by
inside the vehicle when it is deadlocked.
the key is in the ignition switch, even when a CITROËN dealer, to ensure that the
the ignition is switched off. keys in your possession are the only ones
Electrical interference which can start the vehicle.
The Keyless Entry and Starting electronic
key may not operate if close to certain
electronic devices: telephone, laptop
computer, strong magnetic fields, etc.
40
Access
Central locking When locking/deadlocking from the Back-up procedures

outside
Manual Lost keys, remote control,
2
When the vehicle is locked or deadlocked
from the outside, the red indicator lamp electronic key
flashes and the button is inactive.
Visit a CITROËN dealer with the vehicle's
F After normal locking, pull one of the
registration certificate, your personal
interior door controls to unlock the
identification documents and if possible, the
vehicle.
label bearing the key code.
F After deadlocking, it is necessary to
The CITROËN dealer will be able to retrieve the
use the remote control, Keyless Entry
key code and the transponder code required to
and Starting or the integral key to
order a new key
unlock the vehicle.
F Press this button to operate the central
locking of the vehicle (doors, boot and
fuel filler flap) from inside the vehicle. The Complete unlocking/locking
indicator lamp in the button comes on.
Automatic (anti-intrusion of the vehicle with the key
F Pressing the button again unlocks the
vehicle completely. The indicator lamp in security) Use these procedures in the following cases:
- remote control battery discharged,
the button goes off. To activate/deactivate this function (activated - remote control fault,
The indicator lamp also goes off when by default): - battery failure,
unlocking one or more doors. - vehicle in an area subject to strong
F Press the button until an audible
electromagnetic interference.
signal is heard and a message
appears in the screen. In the first case, change the remote control
The central locking does not take place if battery.
one of the doors is open. In the second case, reinitialise the remote
Transporting long or bulky objects control.
Pressing the central locking button Refer to the corresponding sections.
unlocks the vehicle.
Above 6 mph (10 km/h), this unlocking is
temporary.
41
Access
In the event of a malfunction with the

central locking system, the battery must
be disconnected to lock the boot and thus
ensure that the vehicle is locked fully.
F Insert the key in the door lock.

F Turn the key towards the front/rear to lock/ Driver's door
unlock the vehicle.
F Turn the key rearwards again within F Turn the key towards the rear of the vehicle
5 seconds of locking to deadlock the to lock it, or towards the front to unlock it.
vehicle. F Remove the black cap on the edge of the
For versions without alarm, the lighting of the door (example: right-hand rear door), using
Passenger doors
direction indicators for a few seconds confirms the key.
that the procedure has completed correctly. Unlocking F Without forcing, insert the key into the
F Pull the interior door opening handle. aperture; then, without turning it, move the
latch sideways towards the inside of the
If the vehicle is fitted with an alarm, this door.
Locking
function will not be activated when locking F Remove the key and refit the black cap.
F Open the door.
with the key. F Close the doors and check from the outside
F For the rear doors, check that the child
If the alarm is activated, the siren sounds that the vehicle is locked.
lock is not on. Refer to the corresponding
on opening the door; switch on the ignition section.
to stop it.
Changing the battery
A message is displayed in the instrument panel
Central locking not when the battery needs changing.
functioning
Version without Keyless Entry and Starting
Use these procedures in the following cases: Battery type: CR1620/3 volts.
- central locking fault,
- battery disconnected or discharged.
42
Access
F Reinitialise the remote control. F Switch off the ignition.

For more information on Reinitialising the F Turn the key to position 2 (Ignition on).
remote control, refer to the corresponding F Immediately press the closed padlock
2
section. button for a few seconds.
F Switch off the ignition and remove the key
Do not throw remote control batteries from the switch.
away as they contain metals which are The remote control is now fully operational
harmful to the environment. Take them again.
to an approved collection point.
Version with Keyless Entry and
Starting
Version with Keyless Entry and Starting Reinitialising the remote
Battery type: CR2032/3 volts. control
Following replacement of the battery or in
the event of a remote control fault, it may be
necessary to reinitialise the remote control.
If the problem persists, contact

a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop as soon as possible.
F Place the mechanical key (integral with the

Version without Keyless Entry remote control) in the lock to unlock your
and Starting vehicle.
F Place the electronic key against the back-up
F Unclip the cover by inserting a small reader on the steering column and hold it
screwdriver in the slot and raise the cover. there until the ignition is switched on.
F Remove the flat battery from its housing.
F With a manual gearbox, place the gear
F Insert the new battery with the correct
lever in neutral then depress the clutch
polarity and clip the cover onto the housing.
pedal fully.
43
Access
F With an automatic gearbox, from mode P,

When selective unlocking is activated, the Closing
fully depress the brake pedal.
first press of the remote control unlocking
When a door is not closed correctly:
button permits unlocking of the driver's
- with the engine running or the vehicle
F Switch on the ignition by pressing the door only.
moving (speed below 6 mph (10 km/h)), a
"START/STOP" button.
message appears in the screen.
The electronic key is now fully operational
From inside - with the vehicle moving (speed above
again.
6 mph (10 km/h)), a message appears in
If the fault persists after reinitialisation, contact the screen, accompanied by an audible
a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop signal.
without delay.
Boot
Doors Opening
Opening F Pull the interior opening control of a front
door; this unlocks the vehicle completely.
From outside
When selective unlocking is activated:

- opening the driver's door unlocks the
driver's door only (if the vehicle has not
already been completely unlocked), F With the vehicle unlocked or with the
- opening one of the passenger doors electronic key of the Keyless Entry and
unlocks the rest of the vehicle. Starting system in the recognition zone,
press the left-hand button on the central
tailgate control.
F After unlocking the vehicle or with the F Lift the tailgate.
electronic key of the Keyless Entry and The interior opening control on a rear door
Starting system in the recognition zone, pull does not work if the child lock is on.
When selective unlocking is activated, the
the door handle. For more information on the Child lock,
electronic key must be close to the rear of
the vehicle.
44
Access
For more information on the Remote control To unlock the boot

Check that there is enough space to
or on the Keyless Entry and Starting, refer to
allow for the movement of the motorised
the corresponding section.
2
tailgate.
If there is a fault or if it is difficult to move

the tailgate when opening or closing
it, have it checked as soon as possible
by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop to prevent the problem
becoming worse, and potentially causing
the tailgate to drop and thereby inflicting
F Fold the rear seats to gain access to the
serious injuries.
lock from inside the boot.
F Insert a small screwdriver into hole A of the
The tailgate is not designed to support lock.
a bicycle carrier. F Move the latch to the left.
Never introduce a finger in the locking
To re-lock the boot
Closing If the problem persists, the boot will remain
system of the motorised tailgate – risk of
a serious injury!
locked after opening and closing.
F Lower the tailgate using the interior grab
handle.
If the tailgate is not fully closed:
- with the engine running or the vehicle
Hands-free tailgate Safety anti-pinch
The motorised tailgate must only be operated The motorised tailgate has an obstacle
moving (speed below 6 mph (10 km/h)), a
with the vehicle stationary. detection system that automatically interrupts
message appears in the screen.
and reverses its movement by a few degrees to
- with the vehicle moving (speed above
allow the obstacle to be cleared.
6 mph (10 km/h)), a message appears in
Please note that this anti-pinch system is not
the screen, accompanied by an audible
active at the end of the closing travel (around
signal.
1 cm from completely closed).
Back-up release
To manually unlock the boot in the event of
a battery or central locking failure.
45
Access
or
To avoid the risk of injury through pinching
F Press the interior tailgate control C (closing
or trapping, before and during operation of
only).
the motorised tailgate:
or
- ensure that there is no-one close to the
F Press twice in succession on the dashboard
rear of the vehicle,
control D.
- monitor the activity of your passengers,
or
particularly any children.
F With the electronic key on your person, use
the "hands-free" access E by performing a
"kicking" movement below the rear bumper.
The command is confirmed by an audible
signal.
Bicycle carrier/Towing device
The motorised tailgate is not designed to
support a bicycle carrier.
The tailgate opens, either completely
When installing a bicycle carrier on a towing
by default, or to the position memorised
device with connection of a cable to the towing There are several ways of operating the
beforehand.
socket, the motorised operation of the tailgate tailgate:
If motorised operation is not activated,
will be automatically deactivated. A. using the electronic key of the Keyless these actions release the tailgate.
If using a towing device or bicycle carrier not Entry and Starting system, The request to open the tailgate with one
recommended by CITROËN, it is essential
B. using the exterior tailgate control, of the controls A, B or E enables you to
to deactivate the motorised operation of the
C. using the interior tailgate control, unlock the vehicle or the tailgate alone
tailgate.
D. using the control on the dashboard, beforehand, if selective unlocking of the
E. using the "hands-free" access below the boot is activated.
rear bumper. Closing the tailgate with the "hands-free"
Motorised operation access function enables you to lock the
vehicle.
Activation/deactivation of the Opening/Closing
motorised operation of the tailgate is
done in the Driving/Vehicle menu of F Press and hold the central button A of the
the touch screen. electronic key.
or
This function is deactivated by default.
F Press the exterior tailgate control B with the
electronic key on your person.
46
Access
Automatic locking using the "Hands- To delete the memorised position:

It is possible to interrupt the operation of
Free Tailgate Access" function F open the tailgate to any position,
the tailgate at any point.
F press button C or the exterior control B
2
Pressing one of these controls again
for more than 3 seconds (the deletion is
interrupts the movement that is underway.
confirmed by a long audible signal).
Following the interruption of a movement,
pressing one of these controls again
reverses the movement.
Manual operation
The tailgate can be manoeuvred by hand, even
"Hands-Free Tailgate Access" Press this button to activate/deactivate
automatic locking of the vehicle when closing with motorised operation activated.
The "Hands-Free Tailgate Access" the tailgate using the "Hands-Free Tailgate The tailgate must be stationary.
function is activated/deactivated in Access" function (confirmed by lighting/ When opening and closing a motorised tailgate
the Driving/Vehicle menu of the extinction of the green indicator lamp). manually, there is no assistance from gas
touch screen. struts. Resistance to opening and closing is
therefore entirely normal.
This function is deactivated by default. Memorising an opening
position
Ensure that you are steady on your
To memorise a position, in order to limit the Repeatedly opening and closing the
feet before performing the quick foot
motorised tailgate opening angle: motorised tailgate can cause overheating
movement.
F move the tailgate to the desired position of its electric motor, after which opening
Take care not to touch the exhaust system
manually or by pressing the button, and closing will not be possible.
which may be hot – risk of burns!
F press button C or the exterior control B Allow at least 10 minutes for the electric
for more than 3 seconds (memorisation is motor to cool down before operating the
confirmed by a brief audible signal). tailgate again.
If you are unable to wait, operate it
manually.
Saving is not available until the height of
opening is more than or equal to 1 metre
between the low position and the high
position of the tailgate.
47
Access
Manual closing of the In wintry conditions

The function may not work correctly if your
vehicle is fitted with a towing device.
motorised tailgate in case To avoid any operating problems, remove
of failure the snow or wait until the ice melts before
In some circumstances, the tailgate may open
requesting motorised opening of the
This operation is only necessary in the case or close by itself, particularly if:
tailgate.
of failure of the tailgate motor. - you hitch or unhitch a trailer,
If the failure originates from the battery, it is - you fit or remove a bicycle carrier,
recommended to recharge it or change it with - you load or unload bicycles from a bicycle
the tailgate closed. When washing carrier,
In this situation, a significant force may be When washing the vehicle in an automatic - you place or lift something behind the
needed to close the tailgate. car wash, do not forget to lock your vehicle vehicle,
F Close it gently without slamming, as slowly to avoid the risk of unexpected opening. - an animal approaches the rear bumper,
as possible, by pushing at the centre of the - you are washing your vehicle,
tailgate. - your vehicle is being serviced,
- you are accessing the spare wheel
Do not lower the tailgate by pushing at one Recommendations related (depending on version).
of its sides – risk of damage! To avoid such operating problems, keep the
to the "Hands-Free Tailgate electronic key away from the recognition zone
Access" function or deactivate "Hands-Free Tailgate Access".
Precautions in use If several kicking movements to operate the
tailgate have no effect, wait a few seconds
To avoid unwanted opening of the tailgate before trying again. After installing a towing device, it is
when using the towing device: essential to contact a CITROËN dealer
The function automatically deactivates in heavy
- deactivate the "Hands-Free Tailgate or a qualified workshop so that it is taken
rain or following a build-up of snow.
Access" function in advance in your into account by the detection system.
vehicle's configuration menu, If it does not work, check that the electronic key Otherwise, risk of "Hands-Free Tailgate
- or remove the electronic key from the is not exposed to a source of electromagnetic Access" function failure.
recognition zone, with the tailgate pollution (smartphone, etc.).
closed.
The function may not work correctly with
a prosthetic leg. Back-up release
To manually unlock the boot in the event of
a battery or central locking failure.
48
Access
Unlocking System which protects and provides a deterrent Locking the vehicle with full
against theft and break-ins. It provides the
F Fold the rear seats to gain access to the following types of monitoring:
alarm system
2
lock from inside the boot. - Exterior perimeter: Activation
The system checks whether the vehicle is
opened. The alarm is triggered if anyone F Switch off the engine and exit the vehicle.
tries to open a door, the boot or the bonnet. F Lock or deadlock the vehicle using the
- Interior volumetric: remote control or the "Keyless Entry and
The system checks for any variation of the Starting" system.
volume in the passenger compartment. When the monitoring system is active, the
The alarm is triggered if anyone breaks indicator lamp in the button flashes once per
a window, enters the passenger second and the direction indicators come on for
compartment or moves inside the vehicle. about 2 seconds.
- Anti-tilt:
F Insert a small screwdriver into hole A of the The exterior perimeter monitoring is activated
The system checks for any change in
lock to unlock the tailgate. after 5 seconds and the interior volumetric and
the attitude of the vehicle. The alarm is
F Move the latch to the left. anti-tilt monitoring after 45 seconds.
triggered if the vehicle is lifted, moved or
knocked.
Locking after closing
If the fault persists after closing again, the boot If an opening (door, boot, bonnet, etc.)
will remain locked. Self-protection function: the system is incorrectly closed, the vehicle is
checks for the disabling of its own not locked, but the exterior perimeter
Alarm components. The alarm is triggered
if the battery, button or siren wiring is
monitoring will be activated after
45 seconds, at the same time as the
disconnected or damaged. interior volumetric and anti-tilt monitoring.
Deactivation
For all work on the alarm system,
F Unlock the vehicle using the remote control
contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
or the "Keyless Entry and Starting" system.
workshop.
With the remote control:
49
Access
short press Locking the vehicle The exterior perimeter monitoring alone is
activated: the indicator lamp flashes once per
with exterior perimeter second.
long press
monitoring only To take effect, this deactivation must be carried
Deactivate the interior volumetric monitoring out after each time the ignition is switched off.
to avoid unwanted triggering of the alarm in
certain cases such as: Reactivating the interior
The monitoring system is deactivated: the - leaving a pet in the vehicle,
indicator lamp in the button goes off and the
volumetric and anti-tilt
- leaving a window partially open, monitoring
direction indicators flash for about 2 seconds. - washing your vehicle,
- changing a wheel, F Deactivate the exterior perimeter monitoring
- having your vehicle towed, by unlocking the vehicle using the remote
- transport by ship. control or the "Keyless Entry and Starting"
If the vehicle automatically locks itself
system.
again (as happens if a door or the boot
F Reactivate the alarm system normally.
is not opened within 30 seconds of Deactivating the interior
unlocking), the monitoring system is volumetric and anti-tilt
automatically reactivated. monitoring Locking the vehicle without
activating the alarm
Triggering of the alarm F Lock or deadlock the vehicle using the key
This is indicated by sounding of the siren and (integral to the remote control) in the driver's
flashing of the direction indicators for thirty door lock.
seconds.
The volumetric and anti-tilt monitoring functions
remain active until the tenth successive time
Failure of the remote
F Switch off the ignition and within
the alarm is triggered. 10 seconds, press this button until the
control
When the vehicle is unlocked using the remote indicator lamp is on continuously. To deactivate the monitoring functions:
control or the "Keyless Entry and Starting" F unlock the vehicle using the key (integral to
F Get out of the vehicle.
system, rapid flashing of the indicator lamp the remote control) in the driver's door lock,
F Immediately lock the vehicle using the
in the button informs you that the alarm was F Open the door; this sets off the alarm.
remote control or the "Keyless Entry and
triggered during your absence. When the F Upon switching on the ignition the alarm
Starting" system.
ignition is switched on, this flashing stops stops. The button indicator lamp goes off.
immediately.
50
Access
Operating fault Automatic operation For your children's safety, press switch
5 to prevent operation of the rear windows
When the ignition is switched on, fixed F To open/close the window, press/pull the irrespective of their positions.
2
illumination of the indicator lamp in the button switch beyond the resistance point: the
indicates a fault with the system. window opens/closes completely when the The red indicator lamp in the button comes
Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or switch is released. on, accompanied by a message confirming
a qualified workshop. Operating the switch again stops the movement activation of the system. It remains on for as
of the window. long as the deactivation is maintained.
Electric windows Use of the rear electric windows from the
driver's controls remains possible.
The electric window switches remain
operational for approximately 45 seconds
after switching off the ignition. Reinitialising the electric
Once this time has elapsed, the electric
windows will not operate. To reactivate
windows
them, switch the ignition on again. Following reconnection of the battery, or if
1. Left-hand front.
the windows move abnormally, the anti-pinch
2. Right-hand front.
function must be reinitialised.
3. Right-hand rear. Safety anti-pinch
The safety anti-pinch function is not active
4. Left-hand rear. When the window rises and meets an obstacle, during these operations.
5. Deactivation of the electric window it stops and immediately partially lowers again. For each of the windows:
controls located at the rear seats. F Lower the window fully, then raise it; it will
rise in steps of a few centimetres each time
Deactivating the rear the control is pressed. Repeat the operation
Manual operation controls for the rear until the window is fully closed.
F Continue to pull the switch for at least one
To open or close the window, press or pull the windows second after reaching the window closed
switch gently, without exceeding the point of position.
resistance. The window stops as soon as the
switch is released.
51
Access
Anti-pinch system
If an electric window meets an obstacle
during operation, the movement of the If the sunroof or blind encounters an obstacle
window must be reversed. To do this, when closing, the movement is automatically
press the switch concerned. reversed.
When the driver operates the passengers' The roof anti-pinch system is designed to be
electric window switches, it is important effective at speeds of up to 75 mph (120 km/h).
to ensure that nothing can prevent the
window from closing properly.
It is important to ensure that the Precautions
A. Sunroof blind control
passengers use the electric windows
B. Sunroof control
correctly. Do not put your head or arms through
Be particularly aware of children when the open sunroof when driving – risk of
The sunroof or blind can be operated when the
operating the windows. serious injury!
ignition is turned on (if the battery is charged
Be aware of passengers and/or other
enough), with the engine running, in STOP
persons present when closing the
mode of Stop & Start, and up to 45 seconds Ensure that any luggage or accessories
windows using the electronic key or the
after turning off the ignition or after locking the carried on the roof bars do not interfere
"Keyless Entry and Starting" system.
vehicle. with the movement of the sunroof.
Do not place heavy loads on the movable
Panoramic opening Before operating the sunroof or blind
control buttons, ensure that no object or
glass panel of the sunroof.
sunroof person might prevent the movement.

Be particularly aware of children when If the sunroof is wet, following a shower
The panoramic sunroof consists of a movable
operating the sunroof or blind. or washing the vehicle, wait until it is
glass panel that slides over the roof and a blind
If the sunroof or blind meets an obstacle completely dry before opening.
that can be opened independently. Opening the
during operation, you must reverse the Do not operate the sunroof if it is covered
sunroof automatically opens the blind.
movement of the sunroof or blind. To do by snow or ice – risk of damage!
F To operate the panoramic opening sunroof
this, press the switch concerned. Use only plastic scrapers to remove snow
or the blind, use the buttons in the roof
The driver must ensure that passengers or ice from the sunroof.
console.
use the sunroof and blind correctly.
52
Access
Check the condition of the sunroof seals

Operation of buttons Reinitialisation
regularly (presence of dust or deposits, F Pressing a button beyond its point of Following reconnection of the battery or in
2
dead leaves, etc.). resistance directly opens or closes the the event of a fault or jerky movement of the
If using a car wash, check that the sunroof sunroof fully. sunroof or blind, reinitialisation is required.
is correctly closed in advance and keep F Pressing the button down again stops the F Check that nothing is interfering with the
the tip of the high-pressure lance at least current movement. sunroof or blind and that the seals are
30 centimetres from the seals. F If you hold a button (without going beyond clean.
the point of resistance), the movement of F With the ignition on, fully close the sunroof
the sunroof or blind stops when you release and blind.
the button. F Press and hold the front part of button B,
Never leave the vehicle with the sunroof F When the sunroof is closed: pressing once until the sunroof and blind move slightly,
open. without passing the point of resistance then hold for a further 1 second before
moves it to a partially open position. releasing.
F When the sunroof is partially open: pressing F Wait 2 seconds and then press and hold
Operation once without passing the point of resistance
opens or closes it fully.
the front part of button B. The blind and the
sunroof will open and close, one after the
When opening the sunroof fully, the movable other. When both are completely closed
glass moves to a partially open position, then You can close the sunroof and windows, again, hold for a further 2 seconds and
slides over the roof. All intermediate positions then the blind, by pressing and holding the release.
are allowed. door locking control. The movement stops
when you release the locking control.
Depending on the speed of the vehicle,
the partially open position may vary to
improve the acoustics.
If there is an operating fault, restart the
Opening and closing Closing of the blind is limited by the whole procedure.
position of the sunroof: the blind cannot go
F To open the sunroof or the blind, use the further than the front of the mobile glass.
part of the button located towards the rear. During simultaneous movements of the
F To close the sunroof or the blind, use the sunroof and blind, the blind automatically
part of the button located towards the front. stops or resumes movement depending on
the position of the sunroof.
53
Ease of use and comfort
Correct driving position Front seats 'Two-way' adjustment model
Before taking to the road and to make the most Caution when moving the
of the ergonomic layout of the instruments and
controls, carry out these adjustments in the
front seats
following order:
- the height of the head restraint, For safety reasons, only adjust seats
- the seat backrest angle, when the vehicle is stationary.
- the seat cushion height,
- the longitudinal position of the seat,
- the height and reach of the steering wheel,
Before moving the seat backwards, ensure
- the rear view mirror and door mirrors. Upwards:
that there is no person or object that might
prevent the full travel of the seat. F pull the head restraint up to the desired
There is a risk of trapping or pinching position; the head restraint can be felt to
passengers if present in the rear seats or click into position.
of jamming the seat if large objects are Downwards:
placed on the floor behind the seat. F press lug A and push the head restraint
down to the desired position.
Front head restraints 'Four-way' adjustment model

Adjusting the height
The adjustment is correct when the upper

edge of the head restraint is level with the
Once these adjustments have been made,
top of the head.
check the instrument panel can be viewed
correctly from your driving position.
Upwards:
F pull the head restraint up to the desired
position; the head restraint can be felt to
click into position.
54
Downwards: F Press the lug(s) A (depending on version) F Release the bar to lock the seat in position
F press and hold button B and push the head to unlock the head restraint and remove it on one of the runners.
restraint down to the desired position. completely,
F Stow the head restraint securely. Backrest angle
Adjusting the angle Refitting a head restraint
3
'Four-way' adjustment model F Introduce the head restraint rods into the
guides in the seat backrest.
F Push the head restraint down as far as it will
go.
F Press the lug(s) A (depending on version) to
release the head restraint and push it down. F Turn the knob forwards or rearwards.
F Adjust the height of the head restraint.
Never drive with the head restraints Lumbar support

removed; they should be in place and
(driver only)
correctly adjusted for the occupant of the
F press and hold button B and push the seat.
lower part of the head restraint forwards or
backwards.
Manually-adjusted seats
Removing a head restraint Longitudinal
F Turn the knob forwards or backwards to
obtain the desired level of lumbar support.
F Raise the control bar and slide the seat

forwards or backwards.
F Pull the head restraint up as far as it will go.
55
Height Backrest angle Seat cushion height and angle
F Tilt the rear of the control upwards or

F Pull the control upwards to raise or push F Tilt the control forwards or rearwards.
downwards to obtain the required height.
it downwards to lower, as many times as
F Tilt the front of the control upwards or
necessary to obtain the position required.
downwards to obtain the required angle.
Electric lumbar adjustment
Electrically-adjusted seats
Comfort functions
To avoid discharging the battery, carry
out these adjustments with the engine
Storing driving positions
running. (Depending on the country of sale.)
The control allows independent adjustment of
the depth and vertical position of the lumbar Associated with the electrically-adjusted
support.
Longitudinal adjustment driver's seat, this function allows two driving
positions to be memorised, to make these
F Press and hold the front or rear
adjustments easier if there are frequent driver
of the control to increase or
changes.
reduce the lumbar support.
F Press and hold the top or bottom It takes account of the electric adjustments of
of the control to raise or lower the the seat and the door mirrors.
lumbar support area.
F Push the control forwards or rearwards to

slide the seat.
56
Heated seats Prolonged use is not recommended for

persons with sensitive skin.
There is a risk of burns for people whose
perception of heat is impaired (illness,
taking medication, etc.).
There is a risk of overheating the system if
3
material with insulating properties is used,
Using buttons M/1/2 such as cushions or seat covers.
F Take your seat and switch on the ignition. Do not use the system:
F Adjust your seat and the door mirrors. - if wearing damp clothing,
F Press the button corresponding to your
F Press button M, then press button 1 or - if child seats are fitted.
seat.
2 within 4 seconds. To avoid breaking the heating element in
F Each press changes the level of heating; the
An audible signal confirms the memorisation. the seat:
corresponding number of indicator lamps
Memorising a new position cancels the - do not place heavy objects on the seat,
come on (low/medium/high).
previous position. - do not kneel or stand on the seat,
F Press the button again until all the indicator
- do not place sharp objects on the seat,
lamps are off.
- do not spill liquids onto the seat.
The state of the system stays in the memory
To avoid the risk of short-circuit:
Recalling a stored position when the ignition is switched off.
- do not use liquid products for cleaning
With the ignition on or engine running the seat,
F Press button 1 or 2 to recall the - never use the heating function when
corresponding position. Do not use the function when the seat is the seat is damp.
An audible signal sounds when the adjustment not occupied.
is finished. Reduce the intensity of the heating as
You can interrupt the current movement by soon as possible.
When the seat and passenger Multi-point massage
pressing button M, 1 or 2 or by using one of the
seat adjustment controls. compartment have reached an adequate System with a choice of type of massage and
A stored position cannot be recalled while temperature, stop the function; reducing adjustment of its intensity.
driving. the consumption of electrical current This system operates with the engine running,
Recalling stored positions is deactivated reduces fuel consumption. as well as in STOP mode of Stop & Start.
45 seconds after switching off the ignition.
57
The massage settings are adjusted in the touch

screen.
Steering wheel adjustment They can also be folded for parking in narrow
spaces.
The function is activated using the button on
the front seat. Demisting/Defrosting
F Press this button; its indicator If fitted to your vehicle, the
lamp comes on. demisting/defrosting of the door
mirrors is done by pressing the rear
screen defrosting control.
The function is activated immediately with the
last settings memorised and the settings page For more information on Rear screen demist –
is displayed in the touch screen. defrost, refer to the corresponding section.
If the settings suit you and you make no
changes, the display returns to its original
state.
F When stationary, pull the control A to
If you want to change the settings: release the steering wheel. Adjustment
F select another type of massage from the F Adjust the height and reach to suit your
five offered, driving position.
F select a massage intensity from the three F Push the control A to lock the steering
levels offered: "1" (Low), "2" (Normal) or "3" wheel.
(High).
The changes are applied immediately. For safety reasons, these adjustments
Once activated, the system starts a one hour must only be carried out with the vehicle
massage cycle, made up of sequences of stationary. F Move control A to the right or to the left to
6 minutes of massage followed by 4 minutes select the corresponding mirror.
at rest. F Move control B in any of the four directions
The system stops automatically at the end of
the cycle; the indicator lamp for the button goes
Mirrors to adjust.
F Return control A to its central position.
off.
Door mirrors
Each fitted with an adjustable mirror glass
providing the lateral rearward vision necessary
for overtaking or parking.
58
As a safety measure, the mirrors should The folding and unfolding of the door Rear view mirror
be adjusted to reduce the blind spots. mirrors when locking or unlocking the
Equipped with an anti-dazzle system, which
The objects that you see in the mirrors are vehicle can be deactivated via the vehicle
darkens the mirror glass and reduces the
in fact closer than they appear. configuration menu.
nuisance to the driver caused by the sun,
Take this into account in order to
headlamps from other vehicles, etc.
correctly judge the distance of vehicles
3
approaching from behind.
Manual model
If necessary, the mirrors can be folded
manually. Adjustment
F Adjust the mirror so that the glass is
Folding directed correctly in the "day" position.
F From outside: lock the vehicle using the Automatic tilting in reverse gear
remote control or the key. Day/night position
System which automatically tilts the mirrors
F From inside: with the downwards to assist with parking manoeuvres
ignition on, pull the control in reverse gear.
A from the central position With the engine running, on engaging reverse
rearwards. gear, the mirror glasses tilt downwards.
They return to their initial position:
- a few seconds after coming out of reverse
If the mirrors are folded using control gear,
A, they will not unfold when the vehicle - once the speed of the vehicle exceeds
is unlocked. It will be necessary to pull 6 mph (10 km/h), F Pull the lever to change to the "night" anti-
control A again. - on switching off the engine. dazzle position.
F Push the lever to change to the normal
This function is activated/ "day" position.
Unfolding deactivated via the "Vehicle
F From outside: unlock the vehicle using the settings" tab in the Driving/Vehicle
remote control or the key. menu of the touch screen.
F From inside: with the ignition on, pull

the control A from the central position
rearwards.
59
Automatic "electrochrome" model Rear head restraints Never drive with passengers seated at
the rear when the head restraints are
removed; they must be in place and in the
high position.
Longitudinal adjustment
Seat operations must only be done with
They have two positions: the vehicle stationary.
This system automatically and progressively - a high position, for when the seat is in use:
changes between day and night use by means F pull the head restraint fully up.
of a sensor measuring the light coming from the - a low position, for stowing, when the seat Each seat can be adjusted individually.
rear of the vehicle. is not in use:
F press the lugs A to release the head
In order to ensure optimum visibility during restraint and push it fully down.
your manoeuvres, the mirror lightens
automatically when reverse gear is The rear head restraints can be removed.
engaged. To remove a head restraint:
F pull the head restraint as far up as it will go,
restraint and remove it completely,
Rear seats F stow the head restraint.
The 3 seats of the 2nd row are independent To refit a head restraint: F Raise the control and slide the seat
and of the same width. Their backrests are F insert the head restraint rods into the guides forwards or backwards.
adjustable to adapt the boot load space. in the corresponding seat backrest,
F push the head restraint down as far as it will
Once the backrest is folded, it is no longer
go,
possible to slide the seat.
restraint and push it fully down.
60
Backrest angle F check that the outer seat belts are properly F Check that the release strap 1 has correctly
tensioned along the pillars, that the central returned to its position.
Several adjustment positions are possible. belt is stowed and that the tongues of the F Ensure that the outer seat belts are not
three belts are correctly in the storage trapped during the operation.
position.
3
Please note: an incorrectly latched
backrest compromises the safety of
passengers in the event of sudden braking
or an impact.
The contents of the boot may be thrown
forward – risk of serious injury!
F Move the seat forward.

F Pull the strap forward, then tilt the backrest
Heating and Ventilation
F Pull the strap 1 firmly to release the
to the desired position. backrest. Air entry
F Guide the backrest 2 down to the horizontal
The air circulating in the passenger
Folding the backrests position.
compartment is filtered and originates either
from the outside via the grille located at the
The backrests must only be operated with Repositioning the backrests base of the windscreen, or from the inside in air
the vehicle stationary. recirculation mode.
Before raising the backrest of the outer

Preliminary operations:
Controls
seats to the normal position, please
F lower the head restraints, retrieve the seat belt and hold it during the The controls are accessible in the "Air
F if necessary, move the front seats forward, operation. conditioning" menu of the touch screen and
F check that no person or object could are also grouped together on the control panel
interfere with the folding of the backrests of the centre console.
(clothing, luggage, etc.), F Put the backrest 2 in the upright position
and push firmly to latch it home.
61
Air distribution 6. Air outlets to the rear footwells.

Avoid driving for too long with the
ventilation off and prolonged operation
7. Adjustable air vents with blower,
with recirculation of interior air – risk of
depending on version.
misting and deterioration of the air quality!
Advice
Using the ventilation and air
conditioning system If the interior temperature is very high
F To ensure that the air is distributed after the vehicle has stood for a long
evenly, keep the external air intake time in the sunshine, air the passenger
grilles at the base of the windscreen, compartment for a few moments.
the nozzles, the vents, the air outlets Put the air flow control at a setting high
and the air extractor in the boot free enough to quickly change the air in the
from obstructions. passenger compartment.
F Do not cover the sunshine sensor,
located on the dashboard; this is used
for regulation of the automatic air The condensation created by the air
conditioning system. conditioning results in a discharge of water
F Operate the air conditioning system for under the vehicle which is perfectly normal.
at least 5 to 10 minutes once or twice
a month to keep it in perfect working
order.
F If the system does not produce cold air,
switch it off and contact a CITROËN
1. Windscreen demisting/defrosting vents. dealer or a qualified workshop.
When towing the maximum load on
2. Front side window demisting/defrosting a steep gradient in high temperatures,
vents. switching off the air conditioning increases
the available engine power and so
3. Side adjustable and closable air vents. improves the towing ability.
4. Central adjustable and closable air vents.
5. Air outlets to the front footwells.

62
Servicing the ventilation and air Manual air conditioning The air conditioning system operates only with
the engine running.
conditioning system
F Ensure that the cabin filter is in good Temperature adjustment
condition and have the filter elements
replaced regularly. F Press one of the arrows 6 to decrease (blue)
We recommend the use of a combined or increase (red) the value.
3
cabin filter. Thanks to its special active
Press the Air conditioning menu
additive, it contributes to the purification of The value indicated corresponds to a level of
button located under the touch
the air breathed by the occupants and the comfort and not to a precise temperature.
screen to display the system
cleanliness of the passenger compartment
controls page.
(reduction of allergic symptoms, bad
For maximum cooling or heating of the
odours and greasy deposits).
passenger compartment, press the
F To ensure correct operation of the air
temperature setting button down or up
conditioning system, have it checked
until LO or HI is displayed.
according to the recommendations in
the Maintenance and Warranty Guide.
Air flow adjustment
F Press one of the buttons 5 to increase (+) or
Stop & Start decrease (-) the speed of the ventilation fan.
The heating and air conditioning systems The air flow symbol (a fan) is filled in
only work when the engine is running. 1. Automatic visibility programme. progressively as the speed of the fan is
Temporarily deactivate the Stop & 2. Recirculation of interior air. increased.
Start system to maintain a comfortable 3. Rear screen demisting – defrosting.
temperature in the passenger 4. System off. By reducing the air flow to a minimum, you are
compartment. stopping ventilation.
5. Air flow adjustment.
For more information on Stop & Start,
6. Temperature adjustment.
7. Air distribution adjustment. Avoid driving for too long without
8. Air conditioning on/off. ventilation – risk of condensation and
9. Maximum air conditioning. deterioration of air quality!
63
Air distribution adjustment Automatic visibility System switch-off

programme F Press button 4; its indicator lamp comes
You can vary the air distribution in the
For more information on the button 1 on and all the other indicator lamps of the
passenger compartment using the three
"Automatic Visibility Programme", refer to system go off.
buttons 7.
the section "Front demist – defrost". This action deactivates all functions of the air
Windscreen and side windows. conditioning system.
Temperature is no longer regulated. A slight
Air conditioning on/off flow of air can still be felt, resulting from the
Central and side air vents. forward movement of the vehicle.
The air conditioning is designed to operate
effectively in all seasons, with the windows
Avoid driving for long periods with
closed.
Footwells. the system off – risk of misting and
It enables you to:
deterioration of air quality!
- lower the temperature in summer,
Pressing any button reactivates the
- increase the effectiveness of the demisting
system with the settings that were in use
Each press on a button activates or deactivates in winter, above 3°C.
before the deactivation.
the function. The indicator lamp is on when the
F Press button 8 to activate/deactivate the air
button is activated. For a uniform distribution
conditioning system.
of air in the passenger compartment, the three
buttons can be activated simultaneously. When the indicator lamp is on, the air
conditioning function is activated.
Dual-zone automatic air
Maximum air conditioning conditioning
The system automatically adjusts the The air conditioning does not operate when
temperature setting to the lowest possible, the the air flow adjustment is inhibited.
air distribution towards the centre and outer To obtain cool air more quickly, you can
vents, the air flow to maximum. use recirculation of the interior air for a few
moments. Then return to the intake of
Press the Air conditioning menu
F Press button 9 to activate/deactivate the exterior air.
button located under the touch
function; its indicator lamp comes on/goes Switching off the air conditioning may result
screen to display the system
off. in some discomfort (humidity, misting).
controls page.
64
11. Access to the secondary page.

For maximum cooling or heating of the
12. Passenger compartment pre-conditioning
passenger compartment, press the
(depending on version).
temperature setting button down or up
13. Selection of adjustment for the automatic until LO or HI is displayed.
comfort programme (Soft/Normal/Fast).
14. Mono-zone/Dual-zone.
Automatic comfort
3
15. "AQS" (Air Quality System) function
(depending on version). programme
F Press button 10 "AUTO" to activate
The air conditioning system operates with
automatic mode of the air conditioning
the engine running, but the ventilation and its
system.
controls are available with the ignition on.
Operation of the air conditioning and regulation When the indicator lamp in the button is on, the
of temperature, air flow and air distribution air conditioning system operates automatically:
in the passenger compartment are regulated the system manages the temperature, air
automatically. flow and air distribution in the passenger
compartment in an optimum way according to
the comfort level you have selected.
It is possible to adjust the intensity of the

1. Automatic visibility programme. Temperature adjustment automatic comfort programme by choosing one
2. Recirculation of interior air. of the settings offered in the secondary page,
The driver and front passenger can each set
3. Rear screen demisting – defrosting. accessible from button 11 "OPTIONS".
the temperature independently of one another.
4. System off.
To change the current setting, shown by
5. Air flow adjustment. F Press one of the buttons 6 to decrease
illumination of the corresponding indicator
6. Temperature adjustment. (blue) or increase (red) the value.
lamp, press button 13 repeatedly until the
7. Air distribution adjustment. desired mode is displayed:
The value indicated corresponds to a level of
8. Air conditioning on/off. comfort and not to a precise temperature. "Soft": provides soft and quiet operation by
9. Maximum air conditioning. limiting air flow.
10. Activation of automatic comfort It is recommended that you avoid a difference
programme. of more than 3 in the settings for left and right.
65
"Normal": offers the best compromise between Automatic visibility Manual control
a comfortable temperature and quiet operation
(default setting).
programme You can manually adjust one or more of these
For more information on the button 1 functions, while retaining automatic control of
"Fast": provides strong and effective air flow. "Automatic Visibility Programme", refer to the other functions by the system:
the section "Front demist – defrost". - air flow, button 5,
Use the "Normal" or "Fast" modes to ensure - air distribution, button 7,
the comfort of passengers in the rear seats.
This setting is associated with automatic mode "Air Quality System" (AQS) As soon as you change a setting, the indicator
only. However, on deactivation of AUTO mode, function lamp for the button 10 "AUTO" goes out.
the indicator lamp for the last setting remains F Press button 10 again to reactivate the
on. Using a pollution sensor, this function automatic comfort programme.
Changing the setting does not reactivate AUTO automatically activates recirculation of the
mode if this was deactivated. interior air once a certain level of polluting
substances in the exterior air is detected. Air flow adjustment
When the air quality returns to a satisfactory
F Press one of the buttons 5 to increase (+) or
level, recirculation of interior air is automatically
decrease (-) the fan speed.
In cold weather with the engine cold, the deactivated.
The air flow symbol (a fan) is filled in
air flow is increased gradually until the This function is not designed to detect
progressively as the speed of the fan is
comfort setting has been reached, in order unpleasant odours.
increased.
to limit the delivery of cold air into the Recirculation is automatically activated when
passenger compartment. the front screenwash is used or when reverse
By reducing the air flow to minimum, you are
On entering the vehicle, if the interior gear is engaged.
stopping ventilation.
temperature is much colder or warmer The function does not operate if the exterior
"OFF" is displayed alongside the fan.
than the comfort setting requested, there temperature is below 5°C, to avoid the risk of
is no need to alter the value displayed misting of the windscreen and side windows.
to more quickly reach the required level
Avoid driving for too long without
of comfort. The system automatically To activate or deactivate the function, go
ventilation – risk of condensation and
corrects the temperature difference as to the secondary page by using button 11
deterioration of air quality!
quickly as possible. "OPTIONS", then press button 15.
66
Air distribution adjustment When the indicator lamp is on, the air This function does not allow the operation of
conditioning function is activated. the air conditioning system.
You can vary the air distribution in the passenger
compartment using the three buttons 7.
The air conditioning does not operate
System switch-off
Windscreen and side windows. when the air flow adjustment is inhibited. F Press button 4.
To obtain cool air more quickly, you can Its indicator lamp comes on and all other
3
use recirculation of the interior air for indicator lamps for the system go off.
Central and side air vents. a few moments. Then return to the intake This action deactivates all functions of the air
of exterior air. conditioning system.
Switching off the air conditioning may By reducing the air flow 5 to a minimum, you
Footwells. result in some discomfort (humidity, are stopping ventilation.
misting). Temperature is no longer regulated. A slight
flow of air can still be felt, resulting from the
Each press on a button activates or deactivates
Mono-zone/Dual-zone forward movement of the vehicle.
the function. The indicator lamp is on when the The passenger temperature setting can be
button is activated. For a uniform distribution
of air in the passenger compartment, the three
linked to the driver's setting (mono-zone
function).
Recirculation of interior air
buttons can be activated simultaneously. It is available in the secondary page by The intake of exterior air prevents the formation
In AUTO mode, the indicator lamps in all three pressing button 11 "OPTIONS". of mist on the windscreen and side windows.
buttons 7 are off. F Press button 14 to activate the "MONO" Recirculation of the interior air isolates the
function; its status is displayed as "ON". passenger compartment from outside odours
Air conditioning on/off The function is automatically deactivated if the
and fumes and allows the temperature required
in the passenger compartment to be reached
The air conditioning is designed to operate passenger uses their temperature adjustment more rapidly.
effectively in all seasons, with the windows buttons (dual-zone function).
closed. F Press this button to activate/
It enables you to: Ventilation with the ignition on deactivate the function (confirmed
- lower the temperature in summer, by the illumination/extinction of the
- increase the effectiveness of the demisting When the ignition is switched on, you can indicator lamp).
in winter, above 3°C. use the ventilation system to adjust the air
flow 5 and air distribution 7 settings in the The system activates automatically when
F Press button 8 to activate/deactivate the air passenger compartment, for a period which reverse gear is engaged.
conditioning system. depends on the battery charge.
67
Front demist – defrost In wintry conditions, remove all snow or Switching on/off
ice on the camera on the windscreen
Automatic visibility before moving off.
programme Otherwise, this can affect the function
of the equipment associated with the
The automatic visibility programme allows the camera.
windscreen and side windows to be demisted
or defrosted as quickly as possible.
F With the engine running, press this button to

F Press this button to activate/ Heated windscreen activate/deactivate the function (confirmed
deactivate the function.
by the illumination/extinction of the indicator
lamp).
When the indicator lamp is on, the function is The function is active as soon as the outside
activated. temperature drops below 0°C. It is deactivated
automatically each time the engine is switched
The system automatically manages the air
off.
conditioning (depending on version), air
flow and air intake, and provides optimum
distribution towards the windscreen and side Rear screen demist –
In cold weather, this system heats the bottom of
windows.
the windscreen, as well as the areas alongside defrost
The system allows the manual modification of the windscreen pillars.
air flow without causing automatic deactivation Without changing the settings for the air
On/Off
of the automatic visibility programme. conditioning system, it allows faster release F Press this button to demist/defrost
of the windscreen wiper blades when they the rear screen and, depending
are frozen to the windscreen and helps avoid on version, the door mirrors
With Stop & Start, when demisting – the accumulation of snow resulting from the (confirmed by the illumination/
defrosting has been activated, STOP operation of the windscreen wipers. extinction of the indicator lamp).
mode is not available.
Demisting/defrosting switches off automatically
to prevent an excessive consumption of
current.
68
This indicator lamp is lit while the F Press the "Parameters" tab to select
Switch off the demisting/defrosting of the
system is programmed or set in "Heating" mode to heat the engine and
rear screen and door mirrors as soon as
operation remotely via the remote passenger compartment or "Ventilation"
possible to reduce fuel consumption.
control. mode to ventilate the passenger
It flashes during the whole duration compartment.
of the heating and goes off at the end F Then programme/preset the activation time
3
of the heating cycle or when stopped for each selection.
Rear screen demisting – defrosting can
using the remote control.
only be operated when the engine is F Press "OK" to confirm.
running.
Ventilation
Long range remote control
This system allows ventilation of the passenger
Additional Heating/ compartment with exterior air to improve the
temperature experienced on entering the
This enables you to switch the heating in
the passenger compartment on or off from
Ventilation vehicle in summer. a distance.
The range of the remote control is about
Programming 0.6 miles (1 km) in open country.
You can programme the heating or ventilation

to come on using the second page of the "Air
conditioning" menu of the touch screen.
F Press the "Air conditioning"

menu.
Heating
This is an additional and separate system F Press the "OPTIONS" tab.
which heats the passenger compartment and
Switching on
improves defrosting performance. F Press "Temperature F Pressing and holding this button
programming". starts the heating immediately
(confirmed by the temporary
illumination of the green indicator
F Press the "Status" tab to activate/deactivate
lamp).
the system.
69
Switching off Do not throw remote control batteries

F Pressing and holding this button away as they contain metals which are
stops the heating immediately harmful to the environment. Take them
(confirmed by the temporary to an approved collection point.
illumination of the red indicator Always switch off the additional heating
lamp). while refuelling – risk of fire or explosion!
The indicator lamp in the remote control The maximum heating period is about
flashes for about 2 seconds if the vehicle 45 minutes depending on the climatic
has not received the signal. conditions.
You should then move to a different To avoid the risks of poisoning or
location and repeat the command. asphyxia, the programmable heating must
The additional heating system is powered not be used, even for short periods, in
by the fuel in the vehicle's fuel tank. a closed environment such as a garage or
Changing the battery
Before use, ensure that there is enough workshop which is not equipped with an
If the indicator lamp in the remote control fuel in the tank. exhaust gas extraction system.
becomes orange, the state of charge of the If the tank level is on reserve, the system Do not park the vehicle on a flammable
battery is low. cannot be used. surface (dry grass, dead leaves, paper,
If the indicator lamp is not on, the battery is The ventilation is activated provided that etc.) – risk of fire!
discharged. the battery is sufficiently charged.
The heating is activated provided that:
- the battery is sufficiently charged,
- the fuel level is adequate,
Glazed surfaces such as the rear screen
- the engine has been started since the
or windscreen can become very hot in
previous heating cycle.
places.
Never put objects on these surfaces;
never touch these surfaces – risk of burns!
F Use a coin to unscrew the cap and replace

the battery.
70
Front fittings 6. USB socket

Cigarette lighter/12 V accessory socket
(120W)
7. Storage compartment
8. Storage compartment or Wireless charger
9. Cup holders
3
10. Front armrest with storage compartment
11. USB charger socket
Sun visor
It houses the front passenger airbag

deactivation switch.
F With the ignition on, raise the concealing
flap; the mirror is illuminated automatically.
This sun visor is also equipped with a ticket Never drive with the glove box open when
holder. a passenger is at the front – it may cause
injury during sharp deceleration!
1. Grab handle
2. Sun visor Glove box
3. Storage compartment below the steering
F To open the glove box, raise the handle.
wheel
The glove box is lit when the lid is opened.
Card holder
4. Illuminated glove box
5. Door pockets
71
Cigarette lighter/12 V USB sockets When the USB socket is used, the
accessory socket(s) portable device charges automatically.
While charging, a message is displayed
if the power consumption of the portable
device exceeds the amperage supplied by
the vehicle.
For more information on how to use this
equipment, refer to the Audio equipment
and telematics section.
They allow the connection of a portable device,
such as an iPod ® -type digital audio player, to
F To use the cigarette lighter, press it in charge the device.
and wait a few seconds until it pops out
automatically. The USB socket located at the front Wireless smartphone
F To use a 12 V accessory (max. power: also allows a smartphone to be charger
120 W), remove the cigarette lighter and connected by MirrorLinkTM, Android
connect an appropriate adapter. Auto ® or CarPlay ®, so that certain
smartphone applications can be used
You can use this socket to connect a telephone
on the touch screen.
charger, a bottle warmer, etc.
After use, put the cigarette lighter back into
place straight away.
To achieve the best results, it is necessary to

The connection of an electrical device use a cable made or approved by the device It allows the wireless charging of a portable
not approved by CITROËN, such as manufacturer. device, such as a smartphone, using the
a USB charger, may adversely affect the These applications can be managed using the principle of magnetic induction, based on the Qi
operation of vehicle electrical systems, steering mounted controls or those of the audio 1.1 standard.
causing faults such as poor radio system. The portable device to be charged must be
reception or interference with displays in
compatible with the Qi standard, either by
the screens.
design or by using a compatible holder or shell.
The charging area is identified by the Qi
symbol.
72
Operation Fixed, orange Fault with the portable

device's battery meter.
The charger works with the engine running and
Temperature of the
in STOP mode of Stop & Start.
portable device's battery
Charging is managed by the smartphone.
too high.
For versions with Keyless Entry and Starting, Charger fault.
Do not leave any metal objects (coins,
operation of the charger may be interrupted
3
keys, vehicle remote control, etc.) in
when opening a door or switching off the
the charging area while a device is
ignition.
being charged – risk of overheating or
interrupting the charging process!
Charging
If the indicator lamp is lit orange:
F With the charging area clear, place a device Checking operation - remove the portable device, then reposition
at its centre. it in the middle of the charging zone.
The status of the indicator lamp allows the
or
operation of the charger to be monitored.
- remove the portable device and try again in
Once the portable device is detected, the a quarter of an hour.
Status of the
charge indicator lamp comes on in green. It Meaning If the problem persists, have the system
indicator lamp
stays lit for the whole time that the battery is checked by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
Off Engine switched off. workshop.
being charged.
No compatible portable
device detected.
The system only supports charging one
Charging finished. Front armrest
portable device at a time.
Fixed, green Compatible portable It includes a refrigerated storage space
device detected. (depending on version) and is illuminated when
Charging. the cover is opened.
Flashing, orange Foreign object detected

in the charging zone.
Portable device not
correctly centred in the
charging zone.
73
Opening Closing When fitting the mat for the first time, on the
driver's side, use only the fixings provided in
the wallet attached.
The other mats are simply placed on the
carpet.
Removing/refitting
F To remove on the driver's side, move the
seat back and unclip the fixings.
F To refit, position the mat and secure it by

pressing.
F Press the lever beneath the cover. F Fold the two parts of the cover back.
The cover opens in two parts.
Mats To avoid any risk of jamming the pedals:
- only use mats which are suited to the
Storage Fitting fixings already present in the vehicle;
these fixings must be used.
- never fit one mat on top of another.
The use of mats not approved by
CITROËN may interfere with access to
the pedals and hinder the operation of the
cruise control/speed limiter.
The mats approved by CITROËN have two
fixings located below the seat.
The small removable tray can be installed in

front of or behind the storage space.
A ventilation nozzle circulates fresh air.
74
Courtesy lamps - when the vehicle is locked,

- when the ignition is switched on,
Take care not to put anything in contact
with the courtesy lamps.
- 30 seconds after the last door is closed.
Interior ambient lighting

Permanently off.
The dimmed passenger compartment lighting
3
improves visibility in the vehicle when the light
is poor.
Permanent lighting.
1. Front courtesy lamp At night, the interior ambient lighting comes on
2. Front map reading lamps automatically when the sidelamps are switched
In "permanent lighting" mode, the lighting time varies on.
according to the circumstances:
- when the ignition is off, approximately ten minutes, Depending on version, the ambient lighting
- in energy economy mode, approximately thirty includes:
seconds, - two LEDs located in the front courtesy lamp.
- with the engine running, unlimited. - a light source in the storage compartment at
the front of the centre console.
When the front courtesy lamp is in the - a light source for each of the front footwells.
"permanent lighting" position, the rear - illuminated bezels for the front cup holders.
3. Rear courtesy lamp courtesy lamp also comes on, except if it - a light source for each of the interior door
4. Rear map reading lamps (depending on is in the "permanently off" position. opening controls.
version) To switch off the rear courtesy lamp, put it
Front and rear courtesy lamps in the "permanently off" position. The ambient lighting switches off automatically
when the sidelamps are switched off.
In this position, the courtesy
lamp comes on gradually:
Front and rear map reading
- on unlocking the vehicle, lamps The interior ambient lighting can
- on removing the key from the ignition, F With the ignition on, operate the be activated or deactivated and its
- on opening a door, corresponding switch. brightness adjusted in the Driving/
- on activating the remote control locking Vehicle menu of the touch screen.
button, in order to locate your vehicle.
It switches off gradually:
75
Boot fittings Load space cover 12 V accessory socket

It is in two parts:
- a fixed part with an open storage space,
- a movable part which rises when the boot is
opened, with an open storage space.
F To connect a 12 V accessory (max. power:

120 W), remove the cap and connect an
appropriate adapter.
1. Load space cover F Switch on the ignition.
2. 12 V accessory socket (120 W)
3. Boot lamp The connection of an electrical device
4. Movable cross-piece of the rear seats (to not approved by CITROËN, such as
increase the volume of the boot) a USB charger, may adversely affect the
5. Stowing rings operation of vehicle electrical systems,
6. Adjustable boot floor (2 positions) causing faults such as poor radio
To remove the load space cover:
7. Storage wells/tool box under the floor reception or interference with displays in
F unhook the two cords 1,
the screens.
F gently lift the movable part 2, then unclip it
on each side 3,
The stowing rings are designed to secure F unclip the fixed part on each side 4, then
luggage using different types of retaining remove the load space cover.
nets.
Such nets are available as an option or as
When sharp deceleration occurs, objects
an accessory.
placed on the load space cover can turn
For more information, contact a CITROËN
into projectiles.
dealer.
For the installation of a high load retaining
net, refer to the corresponding section.
76
High load retaining net Behind the front seats F Remove the load space cover.
F Insert the ends of the bar, one after the
other, into the fixing points of the roof.
F Attach the straps of the net to the lower
rings, located on each side trim of the boot.
F Pull on the straps to stretch the net.
2-position boot floor 3

This two-position floor allows the boot volume
F Fold down the rear seats. to be optimised using the lateral stops located
F Insert the ends of the bar, one after the on the sides:
other, into the fixing points in the roof. - High position (100 kg max): to obtain a flat
F Attach the net's straps to the upper floor up to the front seats, when the rear
This removable net allows the entire loading anchoring points, located in the housing of seats are folded down.
volume up to the roof to be used: the Top Tether fixings. - Low position (150 kg max): maximum boot
- behind the front seats (1st row) when the F Pull on the straps to stretch the net. volume.
rear seats are folded down,
- behind the rear seats (2nd row) when the
load space cover is removed. Behind the rear seats
It offers protection to the occupants when

very sharp braking occurs.
77
To change the height: Storage well Boot lighting

F Lift and pull the floor towards you using its
central handle, then use the lateral stops to
move it.
F Push the floor all the way forwards to place
it in the desired position.
Ensure that the boot is empty before

moving the boot floor.
F Raise the boot floor as much as possible to

access the storage well.
This comes on automatically when the boot is
Depending on version, it includes: opened and goes off automatically when the
- a temporary puncture repair kit with the boot is closed.
vehicle tools,
- a spare wheel with the vehicle tools.
The lighting time varies according to the
circumstances:
- when the ignition is off, approximately
To increase the boot volume with the floor in ten minutes,
the low position: - in energy economy mode,
F Pull the cross-piece of the rear seats up approximately thirty seconds,
vertically to the level of the markings to - with the engine running, unlimited.
remove it.
F To put it back in place, push it as far as it will
go, until it engages.
78
Lighting and visibility
Lighting control Main lighting Foglamps

Rear foglamps
In some weather conditions (e.g. low
temperature or humidity), the presence
of misting on the internal surface of the
glass of the headlamps and rear lamps is
normal; it disappears after the lamps have
been on for a few minutes.
They operate with the dipped or
4
Automatic illumination of headlamps/ main beam headlamps on.
If one or more lamps fails, a message Daytime running lamps.

asks you to check the lamp or lamps Sidelamps only. F Rotate the ring forwards to switch them on
concerned. and rearwards to switch them off.
When the lighting is switched off automatically
Dipped or main beam headlamps.
("AUTO" position), the foglamps and the dipped
beam headlamps will remain on.
Travelling abroad
The design of the dipped beam headlamps
allows, without modification, driving in Headlamp dipping Front and rear foglamps
a country that drives on the other side
of the road to the country in which your
vehicle was sold.
Never look too closely at the luminous

beam of "Full LED" headlamps: risk of
They operate with the dipped beam
serious eye injury.
headlamps on, in manual or auto
mode.
Pull the stalk to switch between dipped and
main beam headlamps.
79
Turn and release the ring:

F once forwards to switch on the front
Switching off of the lighting when the Direction indicators
ignition is switched off
foglamps and then a second time for the
On switching off the ignition, all of the
rear foglamps.
lighting turns off immediately, except for
F once rearwards to switch off the rear
dipped beam if automatic guide-me-home
foglamps and then a second time for the
lighting is activated.
front foglamps.
If the lighting is switched off automatically
("AUTO" position) or the dipped beam
headlamps are switched off manually, the Switching on the lighting after
foglamps and sidelamps remain on. switching off the ignition
F Turn the ring rearwards to switch the From the AUTO position, move the main
foglamps off; the sidelamps will then switch lighting ring to the desired position or,
off. from another position, move the ring to the
AUTO position then to a position.
On opening the driver's door a temporary F Left or right: lower or raise the lighting
audible signal warns the driver that the control stalk, beyond the point of resistance.
In good or rainy weather, both day and lighting is on.
night, using the front foglamps and the It will go off automatically after a period of
rear foglamp is prohibited. In these time that depends on the state of charge Three flashes
situations, the power of their beams may in battery (entering energy economy
dazzle other drivers. They should only be mode). F Press briefly upwards or downwards,
used in fog or falling snow. without going beyond the point of
In these weather conditions, it is your resistance; the direction indicators will flash
responsibility to switch on the foglamps 3 times.
and dipped beam headlamps manually as
the sunshine sensor may detect sufficient
light.
Switch off the foglamps when they are no
longer necessary.
80
Daytime running lamps/ F Depending on version, within one minute

of switching off the ignition, operate the
Malfunction
sidelamps lighting control stalk up or down depending
on the traffic side (for example: when In the event of a malfunction of
parking on the left; lighting control stalk the sunshine sensor, the lighting
upwards; the right-hand sidelamps come comes on and this warning lamp is
on). displayed in the instrument panel,
This is confirmed by an audible signal and accompanied by an audible signal
illumination of the corresponding direction and/or a message.
indicator lamp in the instrument panel. Contact a CITROËN dealer or
4
The front and rear lamps light up automatically To switch off the parking lamps, return the a qualified workshop.
when the engine starts. lighting control stalk to the central position.
They provide the following functions: Do not cover the sunshine sensor, linked
- Daytime running lamps (lighting control with the rain sensor and located at the
stalk at position "AUTO" with adequate light top centre of the windscreen behind the
level). Automatic illumination of interior rear view mirror; the associated
- Sidelamps (lighting control stalk at "AUTO"
position with low light levels or "Sidelamps
headlamps functions would no longer be controlled.
only" or "Dipped/main beam headlamps"). When the ring is at the "AUTO" position and
a low level of ambient light is detected by the
The LEDs are brighter when operating as rain/sunshine sensor, the number plate lamps,
daytime running lamps. sidelamps and dipped beam headlamps are In fog or snow, the sunshine sensor may
switched on automatically, without any action detect sufficient light. In this case, the
on the part of the driver. They can also come lighting will not come on automatically.
on if rain is detected, at the same time as
automatic operation of the windscreen wipers.
Parking lamps As soon as the brightness returns to
a sufficient level or after the windscreen wipers
Side markers for the vehicle by illumination of are switched off, the lamps are switched off
the sidelamps on the traffic side only. automatically.
81
Guide-me-home and Automatic exterior welcome Door mirror spotlamps

welcome lighting lighting
With the "Automatic illumination of headlamps"
Automatic function activated, under low ambient light, the
With the ring in the "AUTO" position, if the sidelamps, dipped beam headlamps and door
brightness is low, the dipped beam headlamps mirror spotlamps come on automatically when
come on automatically when the ignition is the vehicle is unlocked.
switched off. Activation, deactivation and
the duration of the exterior
The activation, deactivation
welcome lighting are set in the
and the duration of the guide-
Driving/Vehicle menu of the touch
me-home lighting are set in the
screen.
Driving/Vehicle menu of the touch
screen.
Welcome lighting
Manual To make your approach to the vehicle easier,
Availability of this function depends on version.
these illuminate:
F Make a short press on this - the zones facing the driver's and
remote control button. passenger's doors,
- the zones forward of the mirror and
The sidelamps, dipped beam headlamps, rearward of the front doors.
number plate lamps and door mirror spotlamps
come on for 30 seconds. Switching on/off
Pressing again before the end of the timed When the front courtesy lamp
period switches off the lighting immediately. switch is in this position, the
Switching on/off spotlamps come on automatically:
F With the ignition off, "flash" the headlamps
using the lighting control stalk to switch the
- on unlocking the vehicle,
function on/off.
- on opening a door,
Manual guide-me-home lighting goes off
- when a request to locate the vehicle is
automatically at the end of a given period of
received from the remote control.
time.
82
Whatever the position of the front courtesy - dipped beam is kept on, these
lamp switch, they also come on with the indicator lamps come on in the
exterior welcome lighting and the guide-me- instrument panel.
home lighting.
They go off automatically after 30 seconds.
If the ambient light level is very low and the

traffic conditions permit:
Automatic headlamp - main beam comes on
dipping automatically: these indicator
4
lamps come on in the instrument
This system automatically changes between panel.
dipped and main beam headlamps according Activation/Deactivation
to the brightness and driving conditions, using
F Turn the lighting control stalk ring to the When the system detects thick fog, it
a camera located at the top of the windscreen.
"AUTO" position. temporarily deactivates the function.
As soon as the vehicle leaves the area of thick
F In the Vehicle/Driving menu,
fog, the function reactivates automatically.
select the "Driving functions"
tab, then "Automatic headlamp
This system is a driving aid.
dip". This indicator lamp goes off while
The driver remains responsible for the
the function is deactivated.
vehicle's lighting, its correct use for the
Until deactivated, the lighting system changes
prevailing conditions of light, visibility and
traffic, and for observation of driving and
to "automatic illumination of headlamps" mode. Pause
The status of the system remains in memory
vehicle regulations. If the situation requires a change of headlamp
when the ignition is switched off.
beam, the driver can take over at any time.
The system will be operational as soon as Operation F Flashing the headlamps pauses the function
you exceed 16 mph (25 km/h).
If the speed drops below 9 mph (15 km/h), If the ambient light level is sufficient and/or if and the system changes to "automatic
the system no longer operates. the traffic conditions do not allow illumination of illumination of headlamps" mode:
the main beam headlamps: - if the "AUTO" and "Dipped beam"
indicator lamps are on, the system
changes to main beam,
83
- if the "AUTO" and "Main beam" indicator

lamps are on, the system changes to
Headlamp adjustment Automatic adjustment
dipped beam.
of "Full LED" technology
headlamps
To reactivate the function, flash the headlamps Manual adjustment of the
again. halogen headlamps
The system may suffer interference or not

work correctly:
- under poor visibility conditions (snow,
heavy rain, etc.),
- if the windscreen is dirty, misted or
obscured (by a sticker, etc.) in front of
the camera,
- if the vehicle is facing highly reflective To avoid causing a nuisance to other road
signs. users, the height of the halogen headlamps
should be adjusted according to the load in the This system automatically adjusts the height
When the system detects thick fog, it
vehicle. of the beams from this type of headlamp,
temporarily deactivates the function.
according to the load in the vehicle, to avoid
The system is not able to detect: 0 Driver only or driver + front passenger. causing a nuisance to other road users.
- road users that do not have their own
1 5 people.
lighting, such as pedestrians, If a fault occurs, this warning lamp
4 5 people + loads in the boot.
- vehicles whose lighting is obscured comes on in the instrument panel,
(for example: vehicles running behind 5 Driver + loads in the boot.
accompanied by a message and an
a safety barrier on a motorway), audible signal.
- vehicles at the top or bottom of
The system then places the headlamp beams
a steep slope, on winding roads, on The initial setting is position "0".
in the lowest position.
crossroads.
Have the system checked by a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop.
Do not touch the "Full LED" technology

headlamps – risk of electrocution!
84
Cornering lighting Wiper control stalk

Programming
Your vehicle may also include some functions
that can be configured:
- automatic windscreen wipers,
- rear wiping on engaging reverse gear.
If fitted to the vehicle, this system makes use

of the beam from a front foglamp to illuminate
With cornering lighting
Activation/Deactivation
In wintry conditions, remove snow, ice or
frost present on the windscreen, around
the wiper arms and blades and the
windscreen seal, before operating the
4
the inside of a bend, when the main or dipped The cornering lighting can be wipers.
beam headlamps are on and the vehicle speed activated or deactivated in the
is below 25 mph (40 km/h) (urban driving, Vehicle/Driving menu of the touch
winding road, junctions, parking manoeuvres, screen.
etc.). Do not operate the wipers on a dry
Switching on windscreen. Under extremely hot or cold
conditions, ensure that the wiper blades
This system starts:
are not stuck to the windscreen before
- when the corresponding direction indicator
operating the wipers.
is switched on,
or
- from a certain angle of rotation of the
steering wheel.
Switching off
The system does not operate:
- below a certain angle of rotation of the
steering wheel,
Without cornering lighting - above 25 mph (40 km/h),
- when reverse gear is engaged.
85
With manual wiping Single wipe (press down or pull Reverse gear
the stalk briefly towards you, then
release). When reverse gear is engaged, the rear wiper
will come into operation automatically if the
front windscreen wipers are operating.
or
The system is activated or deactivated via the
Automatic wiping (press down, vehicle settings menu in the screen.
then release). This function is activated by default.
Single wipe (pull the stalk briefly
towards you).
With AUTO wiping In the event of snow or hard frost or

Rear wiper if a bicycle carrier is fitted to a towing
device, deactivate the automatic rear
wiper via the vehicle parameters menu.
Front screenwash
Windscreen wipers To select the rear wiper: turn the ring to place F Pull the wiper control stalk towards you and
To select the wiping speed: raise or lower the the desired symbol against the marking. hold.
stalk to the desired position. The screenwash and windscreen wiper operate
Off. for as long as the control stalk is pulled.
Termination of the screenwash is followed by
Fast wiping (heavy rain). a final wiping cycle.
Intermittent wipe.
Normal wiping (moderate rain).
Wash-wipe.
Intermittent wiping (proportional to
the speed of the vehicle).
Turn the ring fully; the rear screen wash, then
Off.
the rear wiper automatically operate for a set
duration.
86
The screenwash jets are integrated in the To maintain the effectiveness of the flat Changing a wiper blade
tips of each arm. wiper blades, it is advisable to:
The screenwash fluid is sprayed along the - handle them with care, Removing/refitting at the front
length of the wiper blade. This improves - clean them regularly using soapy
visibility and reduces the consumption of water,
screenwash fluid. - avoid using them to retain cardboard
In some cases, depending on the contents on the windscreen,
or colour of the liquid and on the exterior - replace them at the first signs of wear.
brightness, the liquid spray may be hardly
noticeable.
To avoid damaging the wiper blades, do

not operate the windscreen washer if the
Before removing a front wiper blade 4
windscreen washer reservoir is empty.
Only operate the windscreen washer if F Carry out these wiper blade replacement
there is no risk of the fluid freezing on the operations from the driver's side.
windscreen and hindering visibility. Always F Starting with the wiper blade farthest from
use windscreen washer fluid suitable for you, hold each arm by the rigid section and
low temperatures during the winter period. raise it as far as possible.
F Within one minute of switching off the
ignition, any operation of the wiper control
Special position of the stalk will position the wiper blades vertically.
Take care not to hold the arms at the jet
locations.
windscreen wipers F Proceed with the desired operation or the Do not touch the wiper blade as you may
replacement of the wiper blades. cause irreparable damage.
This maintenance position is used for cleaning
or replacement of the wiper blades. It can also Do not release them while moving them –
be useful, in winter (ice, snow), to release the risk of damaging the windscreen!
wiper blades from the windscreen. After refitting a front wiper blade
F To return the wiper blades to their initial
position, switch on the ignition and operate
the wiper control stalk.
87
F Clean the windscreen using screenwash

fluid.
Automatic windscreen This indicator lamp goes off in the
instrument panel, accompanied by
wipers a message.
Do not apply "Rain X" type water-repellent The windscreen wipers operate automatically,
products. adapting their speed to the intensity of the The automatic windscreen wipers must be
rainfall without any action on the part of the reactivated by pushing the control stalk
F Unclip the worn wiper blade closest to you driver. downwards, if the ignition has been off for
and remove it. Detection of rainfall is by means of a sensor at more than one minute.
F Install the new wiper blade and clip it to the the top centre of the windscreen, behind the
arm. rear view mirror.
F Repeat the procedure for the other wiper
blade. Switching on
F Starting with the wiper blade closest to Malfunction
you, once again hold each arm by the rigid
section, then fold it carefully, guiding it to If a fault occurs with automatic wiping, the
the windscreen. wipers will operate in intermittent mode.
Have them checked by a CITROËN dealer or
a qualified workshop.
Removing/refitting at the rear
F Give the control stalk a brief push
F Hold the arm by the rigid section and raise it downwards.
as far as possible. A wiping cycle confirms that the instruction has Do not cover the rain sensor linked to the
F Clean the rear window using screenwash been accepted. sunshine sensor and located at the top
fluid. centre of the windscreen.
F Unclip the worn wiper blade and remove it. This indicator lamp comes on in the Switch off the automatic wipers when using
F Install the new wiper blade and clip it to the instrument panel, accompanied by an automatic car wash.
arm. the display of a message. In winter, it is advisable to wait until the
F Once again hold the arm by the rigid section windscreen is completely clear of ice before
then fold it carefully, guiding it to the rear Switching off activating the automatic windscreen wipers.
window.
F Give the control stalk a further brief push
downwards or place the control stalk in
another position (Int, 1 or 2).
88
Safety
General safety We draw your attention to the following Installation of accessory radio
recommendations points:
- The fitting of electrical equipment
communication transmitters
Before installing a radio communication
or accessories not approved by transmitter with an external aerial, you
CITROËN may cause excessive must without fail contact a CITROËN
Labels are affixed in different locations on current consumption and faults and dealer for the specification of transmitters
your vehicle. They include safety warnings failures with the electrical system of which can be fitted (frequency, maximum
and vehicle identification information. Do your vehicle. Contact a CITROËN power, aerial position, specific installation
not remove them: they are an integral part dealer for information on the range of requirements), in line with the Vehicle
of your vehicle. recommended accessories. Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive
- As a safety measure, access to (2004/104/EC).
the diagnostic socket, used for the
vehicle's electronic systems, is
5
reserved strictly for CITROËN dealers
or qualified workshop, equipped
For any work on your vehicle, use
with the special tools required (risk
a qualified workshop that has the technical
of malfunctions of the vehicle's
information, skills and equipment required,
electronic systems that could cause
all of which a CITROËN dealer is able to
provide.
breakdowns or serious accidents). Hazard warning lamps
The manufacturer cannot be held
responsible if this advice is not
followed.
- Any modification or adaptation not
Depending on country regulations, some intended or authorised by CITROËN
safety equipment may be compulsory: or carried out without meeting the
high visibility safety vests, warning technical requirements defined by
triangles, breathalysers, spare bulbs, the manufacturer will result in the
spare fuses, fire extinguisher, first aid kit, suspension of the legal and contractual
mud flaps at the rear of the vehicle, etc. warranties. F When you press this red button, all four
direction indicators flash.
They can operate with the ignition off.
89
Safety
Automatic operation of Emergency or assistance If an impact is detected by the airbag

hazard warning lamps call control unit, an emergency call is made
automatically and independently of the
When braking in an emergency, depending on deployment of any airbags.
the force of deceleration, the hazard warning
lamps come on automatically. They switch off
* In accordance with the general conditions of
automatically when you next accelerate.
service available from dealers and subject
It is also possible to switch them off by pressing
to technological and technical limitations.
the button.
** As per the geographic coverage of

Horn "Localised Emergency Call", "Localised
Localised Emergency Call Assistance Call" and the official national
language chosen by the owner of the
In an emergency, press button 1 for more than vehicle.
2 seconds. The list of countries covered and of
The flashing LED and a voice message confirm telematic services is available from dealers
that the call has been made to the "Localised or on the website for your country.
Emergency Call" call centre*.
Pressing this button again immediately cancels Operation of the system

the request; the LED goes off.
When the ignition is switched on, the indicator
F Press the central part of the multifunction
The LED remains on (without flashing) when lamp comes on for 3 seconds indicating that
steering wheel.
communication is established. the system is operating correctly.
It goes off at the end of the call. If the indicator lamp lights up continuously red:
"Localised Emergency Call" immediately there is a system fault.
locates your vehicle, contacts you in your own If the indicator lamp flashes red: replace the
language**, and – if necessary – requests back-up battery.
the appropriate public emergency services to In either case, emergency and assistance calls
be sent**. In countries where the service is may not function.
not operational, or where the locating service Contact a qualified repairer as soon as
has been expressly refused, the call is sent possible.
directly to the emergency services (112) without
location.
90
Safety
The system's fault does not prevent the If you purchased your vehicle outside the Electronic stability control
vehicle from being driven. CITROËN dealer network, we invite you to
have a dealer check the configuration of
(ESC)
these services and, if desired, modify it to Electronic stability control programme
Localised Assistance Call suit your wishes. In a multilingual country, comprising the following systems:
configuration is possible in the official - Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) and
Press button 2 for more than 2 seconds to Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBFD).
national language of your choice.
request assistance if the vehicle breaks down - Emergency braking assistance (EBA).
(confirmed by a voice message** ). - Anti-slip regulation (ASR).
- Dynamic stability control (DSC).
Pressing this button again immediately cancels
For technical reasons, in particular to - Trailer stability assist (TSA).
the request (confirmed by a voice message).
improve the quality of telematic services
for customers, the Manufacturer reserves
** As per the geographic coverage of
Definitions
5
the right to carry out updates to the
"Localised Emergency Call", "Localised
vehicle's on-board telematic system at
Assistance Call" and the official national Anti-lock braking system (ABS)
any time.
language chosen by the owner of the and electronic brake force
vehicle. distribution (EBFD)
The list of countries covered and of
If you benefit from the Citroën Connect These systems improve the stability and
telematic services is available from dealers
Box offer with the SOS and assistance manoeuvrability of your vehicle when braking
or on the website for your country.
pack included, there are additional and contribute towards improved control in
services available to you in your personal corners, in particular on poor or slippery road
Geolocation space, via the website for your country. surfaces.
Deactivate/reactivate geolocation by The ABS prevents wheel lock in the event of
simultaneously pressing buttons 1 and 2 and emergency braking.
then a single press of button 2 to confirm. The EBFD manages the braking pressure
wheel by wheel.
91
Safety
Emergency braking assistance Trailer stability assist (TSA) Normal operation of the ABS may make
(EBA) itself felt by slight vibrations of the brake
This system allows control of the vehicle to be
In an emergency, this system enables you to pedal.
retained when towing a trailer, so as to avoid
reach the optimum braking pressure more the risk of snaking.
quickly and therefore reduce the stopping
distance. When braking in an emergency, press
It is triggered in relation to the speed at which Anti-lock braking system very firmly and maintain this pressure.
the brake pedal is pressed. This is felt by
(ABS) and electronic brake
a reduction in the resistance of the pedal and
an increase in braking efficiency.
force distribution (EBFD)
When changing wheels (tyres and rims),
ensure that these are approved for your
Anti-slip regulation (ASR) The fixed illumination of this warning
vehicle.
lamp signals that there is a fault with
This system optimises traction in order to
the ABS.
avoid wheel slip by acting on the brakes of
the driving wheels and on the engine. It also The vehicle retains conventional braking. Drive After an impact, have these systems
improves the directional stability of the vehicle carefully at moderate speed. checked by a CITROËN dealer or
on acceleration. Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified a qualified workshop.
workshop as soon as possible.
Dynamic stability control (DSC) Illumination of this warning lamp, Intelligent traction control
coupled with the STOP and ABS system ("Snow motion")
If there is a difference between the path warning lamps, accompanied by the
followed by the vehicle and that required by the Depending on version, your vehicle has
display of a message and an audible
driver, this system monitors each wheel and a system to help driving on snow: intelligent
signal, signals that there is a fault
automatically acts on the brake of one or more traction control.
with the electronic brake force
wheels and on the engine to return the vehicle This system detects situations of poor surface
distribution (EBFD).
to the required path, within the limits of the laws grip that could make it difficult to move off
of physics. You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so. or make progress on deep fresh snow or
Call a CITROËN dealer or a qualified compacted snow.
workshop. In these situations, the intelligent traction
control limits the amount of wheel spin to
provide the best traction and trajectory control
for your vehicle.
92
Safety
With Advanced Grip Control With Advanced Grip Control

The use of snow tyres is strongly
recommended on surfaces offering low F Place the dial in a different
levels of grip. position to this.
Anti-slip regulation (ASR)/ With the touch screen

Dynamic stability control
(DSC) The reactivation is carried out via the
Driving/Vehicle menu.
Operation F Place the dial in this position.
These systems are activated automatically It is confirmed by this warning lamp

every time the vehicle is started. going out in the instrument panel and
With the touch screen
They come into operation in the event of the display of a message.
5
a problem with grip or trajectory. The deactivation is carried out via the
Driving/Vehicle menu. Malfunction
This is indicated by this warning
Illumination of this warning lamp,
lamp flashing in the instrument It is confirmed by the illumination of
accompanied by the display of
panel. this warning lamp in the instrument
a message and an audible signal,
panel and the display of a message.
indicates a fault with the system.
Deactivation
Reactivation Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
In exceptional conditions (starting a vehicle
These systems are reactivated automatically workshop to have the systems checked.
which is bogged down, stuck in snow, on soft
ground, etc.), it may be advisable to deactivate each time the ignition is switched back on or
these systems, so that the wheels can turn above 31 mph (50 km/h).
freely and regain grip. Below 31 mph (50 km/h), you can reactivate
Reactivate these systems as soon as the level them manually.
of grip permits.
93
Safety
ASR/DSC Trailer stability assist (TSA) Operating fault

These systems offer increased safety When towing, this system reduces the risk of Should a fault occur with the system,
in normal driving, but they should not the vehicle or trailer swaying. this warning lamp comes on in the
encourage the driver to take extra risks or instrument panel, accompanied by
drive at high speed. the display of a message and an
It is in conditions of reduced grip (rain, Operation audible signal.
snow, ice) that the risk of loss of grip The system is activated automatically when the
increases. It is therefore important for your If you continue to tow a trailer, reduce your
ignition is switched on.
safety to keep these systems activated in speed and drive carefully!
The electronic stability control (ESC) must not
all conditions, and particularly in difficult Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
have any faults.
conditions. workshop to have the system checked.
If the system detects oscillations (snaking) in
The correct operation of these the movement of the trailer at speeds between
systems depends on observation of The trailer stability assist system offers
37 and 99 mph (60 and 160 km/h), it acts
the manufacturer's recommendations increased safety in normal driving,
on the brakes to stabilise the trailer and, if
regarding both the wheels (tyres and provided that the recommendations on
necessary, reduces the engine power to slow
rims), braking and electronic components towing a trailer are observed. It should not
down the vehicle.
and the assembly and repair procedures encourage the driver to take risks, such
used by CITROËN dealers. as towing a trailer in adverse operating
The use of snow tyres is recommended, conditions (overloading, failure to observe
The correction is signalled by the
in order to be able to benefit from the the trailer nose weight, worn or under-
flashing of this warning lamp in the
efficiency of these systems in winter inflated tyres, faulty braking system, etc.)
instrument panel and illumination of
conditions. or drive at too high a speed.
the brake lamps.
In this case, it is essential to equip the In certain cases, snaking of the trailer
four wheels with tyres approved for your For information on the weights and towed may not be detected by the ESC system,
vehicle. loads, refer to the "Technical data" section or particularly with a light trailer.
the registration certificate for your vehicle. When driving on slippery or poor surfaces,
To ensure complete safety while driving with the system may not be able to prevent
a Towbar device, refer to the corresponding sudden snaking of the trailer.
section.
94
Safety
Advanced Grip Control Operating modes All terrain (mud, damp grass,
etc.)
Special patented traction control system which
This mode, when moving off, allows
improves traction on snow, mud and sand.
considerable spin on the wheel with
This system, the operation of which has been
the least grip to optimise clearing of
optimised for each situation, allows you to
the mud and to regain grip. At the
manoeuvre in most conditions of poor grip
same time, the wheel with the most
(encountered during touring use).
grip is controlled in such a way
Associated with all-season M+S (Mud and
as to transmit as much torque as
Snow) tyres, this system offers a compromise
possible.
between safety, adhesion and traction.
The accelerator pedal should be pressed When moving, the system optimises wheel spin
sufficiently to allow the system to use the power to respond to the driver's requirements as fully
of the engine. Operation at high engine speeds as possible.
5
is completely normal. Standard (ESC) (mode active up to 31 mph (50 km/h))
A five-position selector knob allows you to
choose the setting best suited to the driving This mode is calibrated for a low
conditions encountered. level of wheel spin, based on the Sand
An indicator lamp associated with each mode different levels of grip normally
encountered on the road. This mode allows little spin on the
comes on, accompanied by the display of
two driving wheels at the same time
a message to confirm your choice.
to allow the vehicle to move forward
and limit the risks of getting stuck in
Every time the ignition is switched off, the the sand.
system automatically resets to this mode. (mode active up to 75 mph
(120 km/h))
Snow Do not use the other modes on sand as

This mode adapts its strategy to the vehicle may become stuck.
the conditions of grip encountered
for each of the two front wheels on
moving off.
(mode active up to 50 mph
(80 km/h))
95
Safety
You can deactivate the ASR Hill Assist Descent The system is not available:
and DSC systems by turning
the knob to the "OFF" position.
Control - if the speed of the vehicle is above
43 mph (70 km/h),
System that provides assistance when - if the speed of the vehicle is being
descending on loose or soft surfaces (gravel, controlled by the Adaptive Cruise
The ASR and DSC systems will no longer
mud, etc.) or a steep gradient. Control, depending on the type of
act on the engine operation or the brakes
This system reduces the risk of slip or loss gearbox.
in the event of an involuntary change of
of control of the vehicle when descending,
trajectory.
These systems are reactivated
whether going forward or in reverse. Operation
During a descent, it assists the driver in
automatically from 31 mph (50 km/h) or
maintaining a constant speed, depending Switching on
every time the ignition is switched on.
on the gear engaged, while progressively By default, the system is not selected.
releasing the brakes. The state of the function is not saved when the
Recommendations ignition is switched off.
Your vehicle is designed principally to The driver can select the system when
drive on tarmac roads but it allows you to the engine is running, when the vehicle is
For the system to activate, the slope must stationary or when moving at speeds up to
occasionally drive on other less passable
be greater than 5%. approximately 31 mph (50 km/h).
terrain.
The system can be used with the gearbox
However, it does not permit off-road
in neutral.
driving such as:
Otherwise engage a gear corresponding
- crossing and driving on terrain which
to the speed to prevent the engine stalling.
could damage the underbody or strip
With an automatic gearbox, the system
away components (fuel pipe, fuel
can be used with the selector at N, D or R.
cooler, etc.) due to obstacles or stones
in particular,
- driving on terrain with steep gradients
and poor grip, With instrument panels with dials
- crossing a stream.
When the system is regulating, the Active F To select the system, at a speed
Safety Brake system is automatically below 31 mph (50 km/h), press
deactivated. this button until its indicator lamp
comes on; up; this indicator lamp
appears in green in the instrument
panel.
96
Safety
The system becomes active at a speed below On a descent, with the vehicle stationary, if you Malfunction
19 mph (30 km/h). release the accelerator and brake pedals, the
system will release the brakes to set the vehicle If a fault occurs with the system, a message is
With digital instrument panel gradually in motion. displayed in the instrument panel.
The brake lamps light up automatically when
F To select the system, at a speed Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or
the system is regulating.
below 31 mph (50 km/h), press a qualified workshop.
If the speed exceeds 19 mph (30 km/h),
this button until its green indicator regulation is paused automatically, the indicator
lamp comes on; this indicator lamp lamp goes back to grey in the instrument panel,
comes on in grey in the instrument
panel.
but the green indicator lamp in the button Seat belts
remains on.
F The system becomes active at Regulation resumes automatically when the Front seat belts
a speed below 19 mph (30 km/h); speed falls below 19 mph (30 km/h) again, if the
this indicator lamp comes on in slope and pedal release conditions are met.
5
green in the instrument panel. You can depress the accelerator or brake pedal
again at any time.
F When the vehicle begins its descent, you
can release the accelerator and brake
pedals; the system regulates the speed: Switching off
- if the gearbox is in first or second

gear, the speed decreases and the
indicator lamp flashes rapidly,
- if the gearbox is in neutral or if
the clutch pedal is depressed, the
speed decreases and the indicator
lamp flashes slowly; in this case,
the maintained descent speed is F Press this button until its indicator lamp
lower. goes off; the indicator lamp also goes off in
the instrument panel.
Above 43 mph (70 km/h), the system is The front seat belts are fitted with a pyrotechnic
automatically deactivated; the indicator lamp in pretensioning and force limiting system.
the button goes off.
97
Safety
This system improves safety in the front Height adjustment Before performing any operations on the
seats in the event of a front or side impact.
rear seats, to avoid damage to the seat
Depending on the severity of the impact, the
belts, check that:
pyrotechnic pretensioning system instantly
- the outer seat belts are correctly in the
tightens the seat belts against the body of the
storage position, lying vertically along
occupants.
the pillar,
The pyrotechnic pretensioning seat belts are
- the central seat belt is stowed.
enabled when the ignition is on.
The force limiter reduces the pressure of the
seat belt on the chest of the occupant, thus
improving their protection. Fastening
F To adjust the height of the anchorage point,
squeeze control A and slide it to the notch F Pull the strap then insert the tongue in the
Fastening buckle.
desired.
F Check that the seat belt is fastened
correctly by pulling the strap.
Rear seat belts
Unfastening
F Press the red button on the buckle.
F Guide the seat belt as it is reeled in.
F On the side seat belts, raise the bar to the
top of the backrest to prevent the tongue
F Pull the strap, then insert the tongue in the from knocking against the side trim.
buckle.
F Check that the seat belt is fastened
correctly by pulling the strap. Rear central seat belt
The seat belt for the rear central seat is
Each of the rear seats has a three-point seat
integrated into the roof.
Unfastening belt with inertia reel.
F Press the red button on the buckle. The outer seats are fitted with a pyrotechnic
F Guide the seat belt as it is reeled in. pretensioning and force limiting system.
98
Safety
Installation F Guide the strap as it reels in and take Front seat belts not fastened
tongue B, then A to the magnet at the alerts
anchoring point on the roof.
When the ignition is switched on, the warning
lamp and the corresponding location warning
Seat belts not fastened/ lamps light up if the driver and/or the front
unfastened alerts passenger have not fastened their seat belts.
At speeds above 12 mph (20 km/h), these
warning lamps flash, accompanied by an
audible signal for two minutes. After that
period, these warning lamps remain lit until the
seat belts have been fastened.
F Pull the strap and insert tongue A into the
right-hand buckle (which is on your left
5
when you are seated in the vehicle). Seat belts unfastened alert
F Insert tongue B into the left-hand buckle
(which is on your right when you are seated After the ignition is switched on, the warning
in the vehicle). lamp and the corresponding location warning
F Check that each buckle is fastened correctly Not fastened/unfastened warning lamp lamps light up if the driver and/or one or more
by pulling the strap. passengers unfasten their seat belts.
It comes on in red in both the At speeds above 12 miles (20 km/h), these
Removal and storage instrument panel and the front warning lamps flash, accompanied by an
passenger airbag and seat belts audible signal for two minutes. After that
Before performing any operations on the warning lamps display, once the period, these warning lamps remain lit until the
rear seats, to avoid damage to the seat system detects that a seat belt is not seat belts have been refastened.
belts, check that the outer seat belts are fastened or is unfastened.
properly tensioned and attach the tongues
to their anchorage points. The central seat Seat belts not fastened/unfastened
belt must be completely reeled in. identification warning lamp
It comes on in the display: the
illuminated red warning lamps
indicate the location of the not
F Press the red button on buckle B, then the
fastened or unfastened seat
black button on buckle A.
belts.
99
Safety
Advice Installation Servicing

The lower part of the strap must be In accordance with current safety
The driver must ensure that passengers positioned as low as possible on the regulations, for all repairs on your
use the seat belts correctly and that they pelvis. vehicle's seat belts, go to a qualified
are all fastened before setting off. The upper part must be positioned in the workshop with the skills and equipment
Wherever you are seated in the vehicle, hollow of the shoulder. needed, which a CITROËN dealer is able
always fasten your seat belt, even for In order to be effective, a seat belt must: to provide.
short journeys. - be tightened as close to the body as Have your seat belts checked regularly
Do not interchange the seat belt buckles, possible, by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
as they will not fulfil their role fully. - be pulled in front of you with a smooth workshop, particularly if the straps show
The seat belts are equipped with an movement, checking that it does not signs of damage.
inertia reel which allows the strap length twist, Clean the seat belt straps with soapy
to automatically adjust to your shape. - be used to restrain only one person, water or a textile cleaning product, sold by
The seat belt returns to its storage - not show any signs of cuts or fraying, CITROËN dealers.
automatically when it is not used. - not be converted or modified in order
The inertia reels are fitted with a device not to affect its performance.
which automatically locks the strap in the
event of a collision, emergency braking or In the event of an impact
if the vehicle rolls over. You can release Depending on the nature and seriousness
the device by pulling the strap firmly and of the impacts, the pyrotechnic device
then releasing it so that it reels in slightly. may trigger before and independently of
Before and after use, ensure that the seat Recommendations for children
airbag deployment. Deployment of the
belt is reeled in correctly. Use a child seat appropriate to the child's
pretensioners is accompanied by a slight
After folding or moving a seat or rear age, weight and size.
discharge of harmless smoke and a noise,
bench seat, ensure that the seat belt is Never use the same seat belt to secure
due to the activation of the pyrotechnic
positioned and reeled in correctly. more than one child.
cartridge incorporated in the system.
Never allow a child to travel on your lap.
In all cases, the airbag warning lamp
For more information on Child seats, refer
comes on.
to the corresponding section.
Following an impact, have the seat belt
system checked, and, if necessary,
replaced, by a CITROËN dealer or
100
Safety
Airbags The airbags do not operate when the Front airbags

ignition is switched off.
General information This equipment will only deploy once. If
a second impact occurs (during the same
System designed to help improve the safety
or a subsequent accident), the airbag will
of the occupants sitting in the front seats and
not be deployed again.
the rear outer seats in the event of violent
collisions. The airbags supplement the action
of the seat belts fitted with force limiters at the Impact detection zones
front seats and at the rear outer seats.
If a collision occurs, the electronic detectors
record and analyse the front and side impacts
sustained in the impact detection zones:
- In the event of violent impact, the airbags System which protects the driver and front
5
deploy instantly and help better protect passenger in the event of a serious front impact
the occupants of the vehicle; immediately in order to limit the risk of injury to the head and
after the impact, the airbags deflate rapidly chest.
in order not to hinder the visibility or the A. Front impact zone.
The driver's airbag is fitted in the centre of the
possible exit of the occupants, B. Side impact zone. steering wheel; the front passenger airbag is
- in the case of a minor or rear impact or fitted in the dashboard above the glove box.
in certain rollover conditions, the airbags The deployment of one or more airbags
may not be deployed; the seat belt is accompanied by a slight emission of
alone contributes towards ensuring your These front airbags are adaptive. In
smoke and a noise, due to the detonation
protection in these situations. particular, their hardness will decrease in
of the pyrotechnic charge incorporated in
the presence of an occupant of shorter
the system.
height, with the seat adjusted to a forward
This smoke is not harmful, but sensitive
longitudinal position.
individuals may experience slight irritation.
The detonation noise associated with the
deployment of one or more airbags may
result in a slight loss of hearing for a short
time.
101
Safety
Deployment to mitigate the risk of injury to the chest, Malfunction

between the hip and the shoulder.
They deploy, except the front passenger airbag Each lateral airbag is fitted in the seat backrest
if it is deactivated*, in the event of a serious frame, door side. If this warning lamp comes on in the
front impact to all or part of the front impact
instrument panel, you must contact
zone A.
The front airbag inflates between the thorax
Deployment a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop to have the system
and head of the front occupant of the vehicle They deploy on one side in the event of checked.
and the steering wheel, driver's side, and the a serious side impact applied to all or part of
The airbags may no longer be deployed in the
dashboard, passenger's side, to cushion their the side impact zone B.
event of a serious impact.
forward movement. The lateral airbag inflates between the hip and
shoulder of the vehicle's occupant and the
* For more information on Deactivating In the event of a minor impact or bump on
corresponding door trim panel.
the front passenger airbag, refer to the the side of the vehicle or if the vehicle rolls
corresponding section. over, the airbags may not be deployed.
Curtain airbags In the event of a rear or front collision,
none of the lateral airbags are deployed.
System contributing towards greater protection
Lateral airbags for the driver and passengers (with the
exception of the rear centre passenger) in the
At the front event of a serious side impact in order to limit
the risk of injury to the side of the head.
Each curtain airbag is built into the pillars and
the upper passenger compartment area.
Deployment
It deploys simultaneously with the
corresponding lateral airbag in the event of
a serious side impact applied to all or part of
the side impact zone B.
The curtain airbag inflates between the front
and rear occupants of the vehicle and the
This system protects the driver and front corresponding windows.
passenger in the event of a serious side impact
102
Safety
Advice Front airbags Lateral airbags

Do not drive holding the steering wheel Use only approved covers on the seats,
For the airbags to be fully effective, by its spokes or resting your hands on the compatible with the deployment of the
observe the safety recommendations centre part of the wheel. lateral airbags. For information on the
below. Passengers must not place their feet on range of seat covers suitable for your
Adopt a normal and upright sitting the dashboard. vehicle, contact the CITROËN network.
position. Do not smoke as deployment of the Do not fix or attach anything to the seat
Wear a correctly adjusted seat belt. airbags can cause burns or the risk of backrests (clothes, etc.), as this could
Do not leave anything between the injury from a cigarette or pipe. cause injuries to the thorax or arm when
occupants and the airbags (a child, pet, Never remove or pierce the steering wheel the lateral airbag is deployed.
object, etc.), nor fix or attach anything or hit it violently. Do not sit with the upper part of the body
close to or in the way of the airbag release Do not fix or attach anything to the any nearer to the door than necessary.
trajectory; this could cause injuries during steering wheel or dashboard, as this The vehicle's front door panels include
5
their deployment. could cause injuries when the airbags are side impact sensors.
Never modify the original definition of your deployed. A damaged door or any unauthorised or
vehicle, particularly in the area directly incorrectly executed work (modification or
around the airbags. repair) on the front doors or their interior
After an accident or if the vehicle has trim could compromise the operation of
been stolen, have the airbag systems these sensors – risk of malfunction of the
Curtain airbags
checked. lateral airbags!
Do not fix or attach anything to the roof,
All work on the airbag systems must only Such work must only be done by
as this could cause head injuries when the
be carried out by a CITROËN dealer or a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
curtain airbag is deployed.
a qualified workshop. workshop.
Even if all of the precautions mentioned
are observed, a risk of injury or of minor
burns to the head, chest or arms cannot
be ruled out when an airbag is deployed.
The bag inflates almost instantly (within
a few milliseconds) then deflates within
the same time discharging the hot gas via
openings provided for this purpose.
103
Safety
General points relating to Ensure that the seat belt is positioned and Advice
child seats tightened correctly.
For child seats with a support leg, ensure An incorrectly installed child seat
that the support leg is in firm and steady compromises the child's safety in the
The legislation on carrying children is
contact with the floor. event of an accident.
specific to each country. Refer to the
At the front: if necessary, adjust the Ensure that there is no seat belt or seat
legislation in force in your country.
passenger seat. belt buckle under the child seat, as this
At the rear: if necessary, adjust the could destabilise it.
relevant front seat. Remember to fasten the seat belts or
the child seat harness keeping the slack
For maximum safety, please observe the
relative to the child's body to a minimum,
following recommendations:
even for short journeys.
- In accordance with European regulations,
Remove and stow the head restraint When installing a child seat using the seat
all children under the age of 12 or less
before installing a child seat with backrest belt, ensure that the seat belt is tightened
than one and a half metres tall must
on a passenger seat. Refit the head correctly on the child seat and that it
travel in approved child seats suited to
restraint once the child seat has been secures the child seat firmly on the seat
their weight, on seats fitted with a seat belt
removed. of your vehicle. If your passenger seat is
or ISOFIX mountings.
adjustable, move it forwards if necessary.
- Statistically, the safest seats in your
The head restraint must be removed
vehicle for carrying children are the rear
before installing a child seat with
seats.
a backrest on a passenger seat.
- A child weighing less than 9 kg must
Ensure that the head restraint is stored or
travel in the "rearward facing" position
attached securely to prevent it from being
both in the front and in the rear.
thrown around the vehicle in the event
of sharp braking. Refit the head restraint
once the child seat has been removed.
It is recommended that children travel on

the rear seats of your vehicle:
- "rearward facing" up to the age of 3,
- "forward facing" over the age of 3.
104
Safety
Children at the rear Installing a booster seat Child seat at the front
At rear seating positions, always leave The chest part of the seat belt must be
sufficient space between the front seat positioned on the child's shoulder without
and: touching the neck.
- the "rearward facing" child seat, Ensure that the lap part of the seat belt
- the child's feet for a child seat fitted passes correctly over the child's thighs.
"forward facing". We recommend using a booster seat with
To do this, move the front seat forwards backrest, equipped with a belt guide at When a child seat is installed on the
and, if necessary, straighten its backrest. shoulder level. front passenger seat, adjust this seat
For optimal installation of the "forward to the highest position, in the rearmost
facing" child seat, verify that its backrest is longitudinal position, with the backrest
as close as possible to the backrest of the straightened.
vehicle seat, if possible in contact with it.
Additional protections
"Rearward facing"
5
A child seat with ISOFIX or i-Size
To prevent accidental opening of the doors
mountings must never be installed on the
and rear windows, use the "Child lock".
centre rear passenger seat.
Take care not to open the rear windows by
more than one third.
To protect young children from the rays
of the sun, fit side blinds on the rear
The front passenger airbag must be
Children at the front windows.
deactivated. Otherwise, the child risks
Deactivate the front passenger airbag As a safety precaution, do not leave:
being seriously injured or killed if the
when a "rearward facing" child seat is - a child or children alone and
airbag is deployed.
installed on the front passenger seat. unattended in a vehicle,
Otherwise, the child would risk being - a child or an animal in a vehicle
seriously injured or killed if the airbag which is exposed to the sun, with the "Forward facing"
were deployed. windows closed,
- the keys within reach of children inside
the vehicle.
You must leave the front passenger airbag

active.
105
Safety
Deactivating the front Passenger airbag OFF When the ignition is switched on:
passenger airbag This indicator lamp comes on and

remains lit to signal the deactivation.
Or
This indicator lamp comes on

for about a minute to signal the
activation.
For more information on the Airbags,

refer to the corresponding section. To guarantee the safety of your child,
Warning label – Front passenger airbag
the front passenger airbag must be
deactivated when you install a "rearward
Deactivating/reactivating facing" child seat on the front passenger
seat.
the front passenger airbag Otherwise, the child would risk being
Only the front passenger airbag can be seriously injured or killed if the airbag
deactivated. were deployed.
The control is located in the glove box.
You must comply with the following instruction,
repeated by the warning label on both sides of
the passenger sun visor:
NEVER install a rearward facing child

With the ignition off,
restraint system on a seat protected by an
F To deactivate, turn the control to the "OFF"
ACTIVATED FRONT AIRBAG. This could
position.
cause the DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY of
F To reactivate, turn the control to the "ON"
the CHILD.
position.
106
Safety
Child seat at the rear Summary table for installation of universal, ISOFIX and
i-Size child seats
"Rearward facing" and As required by European regulations, this table gives the options for installing child seats secured
"Forward facing" using the seat belt and universally approved (a) as well as the larger ISOFIX and i-Size child seats
on seat positions equipped with ISOFIX mountings in the vehicle.
Seat numbers
Front seats Rear seats
3
1 4 5 6
(b), (c), (e)
5
When a "rearward facing" or "forward facing"
child seat is installed on a rear passenger 1
3 4 5 6
seat, move the vehicle's front seat forward and (b), (c), (e)
straighten the backrest so that the legs of the
Position compatible with yes
child in the "forward facing" or the "rearward no yes yes yes
a universal (a) child seat (f)
facing" child seat do not touch the vehicle's
front seat. Position compatible with an
no yes yes no yes
i-Size child seat
Centre rear seat
Position equipped with a TOP
A child seat with a support leg must never be no yes yes no yes
TETHER fixing
installed on the centre rear passenger seat.
"Carrycot" type of child seat no no no no no
The incorrect installation of a child seat in

"Rearward facing" ISOFIX child R3
a vehicle compromises the protection of no R2 no R2
seat (d)
the child in the event of an accident.
"Forward facing" ISOFIX child F3
no F3 no F3
seat (d)
107
Safety
Rules: Front passenger's airbag ISOFIX "forward facing" child seat:

- A position that is i-Size compatible is also deactivated. - F2X: ISOFIX child seat for
compatible for R1, R2 and F2X, F2. toddlers.
- A position that is R3 compatible is also - F2: ISOFIX child seat low height.
Front passenger's airbag activated.
compatible for R1 and R2. - F3: ISOFIX child seat tall height.
- A position that is F3 compatible is also
compatible for F2X and F2.
Seat position suitable for the (a) Universal child seat: child seat that can be
installation of a child seat secured installed in all vehicles using the seat belt.
using the seat belt and universally (b) To install a "rearward facing" child seat
approved "rearward facing" and/or at this seat position, the front passenger's
"forward facing". airbag MUST be deactivated "OFF".
(c) Only a "forward facing" child seat of
Seat position suitable for the
group 1, 2 or 3 is authorised at this seat
installation of a child seat secured
position with the front passenger's airbag
using the seat belt and universally
activated "ON".
approved for "forward facing" use.
(d) Tilt the seat backrest to 45°, then install
Seat position where securing an the child seat.
i-Size child seat is authorised. Straighten the backrest until it contacts
the child seat's backrest.
Presence of a TOP TETHER (e) It is forbidden to install a "forward facing"
anchoring point at the rear of the child seat of group 0 or 0+ at this seat
backrest, allowing a universal position (weight of the child less than
ISOFIX "forward facing" child seat 13 kg) if the front passenger's airbag is
to be secured. activated "ON".
(f) For a seat with height adjustment, set it to
ISOFIX "rearward facing" child seat:
the maximum height.
- R1: ISOFIX child seat for an
infant.
Key - R2: ISOFIX child seat small size.
- R3: ISOFIX child seat large size.
Seat position where the installation of
a child seat is forbidden.
108
Safety
Recommended child Groups 2 and 3: from 15 to 36 kg

seats
Range of recommended child seats which are
secured using a three-point seat belt.
Group 0+: from birth to 13 kg

L5
"RÖMER KIDFIX"
Can be fitted to the vehicle's ISOFIX
mountings.
The child is restrained by the seat belt.
A version with a removable backrest may be
5
used for children weighing more than 25 kg.
L1
However, for better protection, use a booster
"RÖMER Baby-Safe Plus"
seat with backrest for all children weighing up
Installed in the "rearward facing" position.
to 36 kg.
109
Safety
Locations for child seats secured using the seat belt

In accordance with European regulations, this table indicates the options for installing child seats secured using the seat belt and universally approved
(a) according to the weight of the child and the seat position in the vehicle.
Weight of the child/indicative age
Under 13 kg
From 9 to 18 kg From 15 to 25 kg From 22 to 36 kg
(groups 0 (b) and
Seat position Front passenger (group 1) (group 2) (group 3)
0+)
airbag From about 1 to From about 3 to From about 6 to
Up to about 1 year
3 years old 6 years old 10 years old
old
Deactivated "OFF" U (1) U (1) U (1) U (1)

Row 1 (c) Passenger seat
Activated "ON" X UF (1) UF (1) UF (1)
Row 2 (d) (e) U U U U
U Seat position suitable for the installation (a) Universal child seat: child seat that can be (d) To install a child seat at the rear, "rearward
of a child seat secured using the seat installed in all vehicles using the seat belt. facing" or "forward facing", move the front
belt and universally approved "rearward (b) Group 0: from birth to 10 kg. Carrycots seat forward, then adjust the backrest to
facing" and/or "forward facing". and "car" infant carriers cannot be an upright position to allow enough room
UF Seat position suitable for the installation installed on the front passenger seat. for the child seat and the child's legs.
of a child seat secured using the seat belt (c) Refer to the current legislation in your (e) A child seat with a support leg must never
and universally approved "forward facing". country before installing your child on this be installed on the centre rear passenger
X Seat position not suitable for installation of seat. seat.
a child seat for the weight class indicated. (1) Adjust the height to the maximum height.
110
Safety
"ISOFIX" mountings ISOFIX child seats are fitted with two latches
which are secured on the two rings A.
The seats, shown below, are fitted with ISOFIX Some seats also have an upper strap which is
compliant mountings: attached to ring B.
To secure the child seat to the TOP TETHER:

F remove and stow the head restraint before
installing the child seat on the seat (refit it
once the child seat has been removed),
Front seat
F pass the strap of the child seat behind
the seat backrest, centring it between the
apertures for the head restraint rods,
F secure the upper strap hook to ring B,
F tighten the upper strap.
The mountings comprise three rings for each

seat:
5
When fitting an ISOFIX child seat to the
left-hand rear seat of the bench seat,
Rear seats
before fitting the seat, first move the
- one ring B, located behind the seat and
centre rear seat belt towards the middle
indicated by a marking, referred to as the
of the vehicle, so as to avoid the seat
TOP TETHER for fixing the upper strap.
interfering with the operation of the seat
This system prevents the child seat from tipping belt.
forward in the event of a front impact.
This ISOFIX mounting system ensures fast,
- two rings A, located between the vehicle reliable and safe fitting of the child seat in your
seat backrest and cushion, indicated by vehicle.
a marking,
111
Safety
An incorrectly installed child seat "RÖMER Baby-Safe Plus and its ISOFIX "RÖMER Duo Plus ISOFIX"
compromises the child's safety in the base" (size category: B1)
event of an accident. (size category: E)
Strictly observe the fitting instructions
provided in the user guide supplied with Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg
Group 0+: from birth to 13 kg
the child seat.
For information about the installation

possibilities for ISOFIX child seats in your
vehicle, refer to the summary table.
Installed only in the "forward facing" position.

Installed "rearward facing" using an ISOFIX
Recommended ISOFIX base which is attached to rings A.
Is attached to rings A and ring B, referred to
as TOP TETHER, using an upper strap.
child seats Is only installed on the front passenger seat Is only installed on the front passenger seat
or on the outer rear seats. or on the outer rear seats. The head restraint
The base has a support leg, height- on the outer rear seat must be fully raised.
Also consult the user guide from the child
adjustable, which rests on the vehicle's floor. Three shell angles: sitting, reclining,
seat's manufacturer to find out how to
This child seat can also be secured with lying down.
install and remove the seat.
a seat belt. In this case, only the shell is used This child seat can also be used on seats
and attached to the vehicle seat using the not equipped with ISOFIX mountings. In this
three-point seat belt. case, it must be secured to the vehicle seat
using the three-point seat belt. Adjust the
front seat of the vehicle so that the child's feet
do not touch the backrest.
112
Safety
Summary table of locations for ISOFIX child seats

In line with European regulations, this table indicates the options for installing ISOFIX child seats on the vehicle seats fitted with ISOFIX mountings.
In the case of universal and semi-universal ISOFIX child seats, the ISOFIX size category, determined by a letter from A to G, is indicated on the child
seat next to the i-Size logo.
Weight of the child/indicative age
Under 10 kg
Under 10 kg
(group 0) From 9 to 18 kg
(group 0)
Under 13 kg (group 1)
Up to about
(group 0+) From about 1 to 3 years old
6 months old
Up to about 1 year old
Type of ISOFIX child seat
ISOFIX size category

Front passenger
Carrycot
F G
"Rearward facing"
C D E
"Rearward facing"
C D A
"Forward facing"
B B1 5
Seat position
airbag
Deactivated "OFF" X IL IL IUF/IL

Passenger
Row 1 (a)
seat (b)
Activated "ON" X X X IUF/IL
Outer rear
X X IL X IL IUF/IL
seats (c)
Row 2
Centre rear
Not ISOFIX
seat
113
Safety
IUF Seat suitable for installing an Isofix

Universal seat, "Forward facing", secured
Locations for i-Size child seats
using the upper strap. i-Size child seats have two latches that engage on the two rings A.
IL Seat suitable for installing an Isofix Semi- i-Size child seats also have:
Universal seat which is either: - either an upper strap that is attached to ring B,
- "rearward facing" fitted with an upper - or a support leg that rests on the vehicle floor, compatible with the approved i-Size seat position,
strap or a support leg, the role of which is to prevent the child seat from tipping forward in the event of a collision.
- "forward facing" fitted with a support For more information on ISOFIX mountings, refer to the corresponding section.
leg,
- a carrycot fitted with an upper strap or In accordance with the new European regulations, this table indicates the options for installing
a support leg. i-Size child seats on seats in the vehicle fitted with ISOFIX mountings approved for i-Size.
For securing the upper strap using the ISOFIX

mountings, refer to the corresponding section.
X Seat not suitable for installing an ISOFIX

seat or carrycot of the weight group Front passenger i-Size restraint
Seat position
indicated. airbag system
(a) Refer to the current legislation in your
country before installing a child at this Deactivated "OFF" i-U
seat position. Passenger seat
Row 1 (a)
(b) Tilt the seat backrest to 45°, then install (b)
Activated "ON" i-UF
the child seat.
Straighten the backrest until it contacts
Outer rear seats i-U
(c) To install a child seat on a rear seat,
"rearward facing" or "forward facing", Row 2 (c)
adjust the rear seat to the fully back
position with the backrest tilted. Centre rear seat Not i-Size
i-U Suitable for i-Size restraint systems in the i-UF Only suitable for i-Size restraint systems
"Universal" category, "forward facing" and in the "Universal" category which are
"rearward facing". "forward facing".
114
Safety
(a) Refer to the current legislation in your

country before installing a child at this
F Using the ignition key or the integral key,
depending on version, turn the red control
Electric child lock
seat position. as far as it will go:
(b) Tilt the seat backrest to 45°, then install - to the right on the left-hand rear door,
Remote control system to prevent
the child seat. - to the left on the right-hand rear door.
opening of the rear doors using their
Straighten the backrest until it contacts
interior controls.
Unlocking
(c) To install a child seat on a rear seat,
"rearward facing" or "forward facing", F Using the ignition key or the integral key,
adjust the rear seat to the fully back depending on version, turn the red control
Activation/Deactivation
position with the backrest tilted. as far as it will go:
- to the left on the left-hand rear door,
- to the right on the right-hand rear door.
Manual child lock

Manual system to prevent opening of a rear
door using its interior control.
5
The control, red in colour, is located on the
edge of each rear door. With the ignition on:
It is identified by a symbol marked on the F Press this button; its indicator lamp remains
bodywork. on for as long as the child lock is activated.
A message confirms the activation.
Do not confuse the child lock control, It is still possible to open the doors from the
Locking which is red, with the back-up locking outside.
control, which is black. F Press this button again; its indicator lamp
remains off for as long as the child lock
is deactivated. A message confirms the
deactivation.
115
Driving
Driving recommendations In severe wintry conditions (temperature Never leave children inside the vehicle
below -23°C), let the engine run for unsupervised.
F Observe the driving regulations and remain
4 minutes before moving off, to ensure
vigilant whatever the traffic conditions.
the correct operation and durability of the
F Monitor your environment and keep your
mechanical components of your vehicle
hands on the wheel to be able to react to
(engine and gearbox).
On flooded roads
anything that may happen any time.
F Drive smoothly, anticipate the need for We strongly advise against driving on flooded
braking and maintain a longer safety roads, as this could cause serious damage
distance, especially in bad weather. to the engine or gearbox, as well as to the
F Stop the vehicle to carry out operations Never drive with the parking brake electrical systems of your vehicle.
that require close attention (such as applied. Risk of overheating and damage
adjustments). to the braking system!
F During long trips, take a break every two
hours.
Never park the vehicle or leave the

engine running on a flammable surface
Important! (dry grass, dead leaves, etc.). The
exhaust system of your vehicle is very
hot, even several minutes after the engine If you are obliged to drive on a flooded road:
Never leave the engine running in
stops. Risk of fire! F check that the depth of water does not
a closed space without sufficient
exceed 15 cm, taking account of waves that
ventilation. Internal combustion engines
might be generated by other users,
emit toxic exhaust gases such as carbon
F deactivate the Stop & Start function,
monoxide. Danger of poisoning and death!
Never leave a vehicle unattended with F drive as slowly as possible without stalling.
the engine running. If you have to leave In all cases, do not exceed 6 mph (10 km/h),
your vehicle with the engine running, apply F do not stop and do not switch off the engine.
the parking brake and put the gearbox into
neutral or position N or P (depending on
the type of gearbox).
116
Driving
On leaving the flooded road, as soon as safety

If the outside temperature is high, let the
When driving
conditions allow, make several light brake
engine idle for 1 to 2 minutes after the Cooling
applications to dry the brake discs and pads.
vehicle comes to a stop, to help it to cool.
If in doubt about the state of your vehicle,
Towing a trailer uphill increases the
temperature of the coolant. The maximum
workshop.
towable load depends on the gradient and the
Before setting off exterior temperature. The cooling capacity of
the fan does not increase with engine speed.
In case of towing Nose weight F Reduce speed and lower the engine speed,
F Distribute the load in the trailer so that the so as to limit the heating-up.
Driving with a trailer places greater heaviest items are as close as possible to In all cases, pay attention to the coolant
demands on the towing vehicle and the axle and the nose weight (at the point temperature.
requires extra care from the driver. where it joins your vehicle) approaches the
maximum permitted without exceeding it.
If this warning lamp and the STOP
Tyres warning lamp come on, stop the
Respect the maximum towable weights.
vehicle and switch off the engine as
6
At altitude: reduce the maximum load F Check the tyre pressures of the towing
soon as possible.
by 10% per 1,000 metres of altitude; the vehicle and of the trailer, observing the
decreased air density at altitude reduces recommended pressures.
engine performance. Brakes
Lighting Braking distances are increased when towing
a trailer. To avoid overheating of the brakes, the
F Check the electrical signalling on the trailer
use of engine braking is recommended.
and the headlamp beam height of your
New vehicle: do not pull a trailer vehicle.
before having driven at least 620 miles Side wind
(1,000 kilometres). Bear in mind the increased susceptibility to the
If a genuine CITROËN towing device is wind that the vehicle will have.
used, the rear parking sensors will be
deactivated automatically to avoid the
audible signal.
117
Driving
Anti-theft protection Avoid attaching heavy objects to the key

F Insert the key into the ignition switch; the
system recognises the code.
or the remote control, which would weigh
F Unlock the steering column by
Electronic immobiliser down on its blade in the ignition switch
simultaneously turning the steering wheel
and could cause a malfunction.
The keys include an electronic engine and the key.
immobiliser system, whose secret code must
In certain cases, you may have to apply
be recognised in order for starting to be
significant force to move the steering
possible. Ignition on position
wheel (wheels on full lock, for example).
If the system malfunctions, indicated by the It allows the use of the vehicle's electric
display of a message, the engine will not start. equipment or portable devices to be charged.
Contact the CITROËN dealer. Once the state of charge of the battery drops
to the reserve level, the system switches to F With a petrol engine, operate the starter
energy economy mode: the power supply is motor by turning the key to position
Starting/Switching off the cut off automatically to preserve the remaining

battery charge.
3 without pressing the accelerator pedal,
until the engine starts. Once the engine
engine with the key starts, release the key.
Key ignition switch

Switching off the engine leads to a loss of With petrol engines, after a cold start,
braking assistance. preheating the catalytic converter can
cause noticeable engine vibrations for
anything up to 2 minutes while stationary
with the engine running (accelerated idle
Starting the engine speed).
Parking brake applied:

F With a manual gearbox, place the gear
lever in neutral then depress the clutch F With a Diesel engine, turn the key to
It has 3 positions:
pedal fully. position 2, ignition on, to operate the engine
- position 1 (Stop): inserting and removing
F With an automatic gearbox, place the gear pre-heating system.
the key, steering column locked.
- position 2 (Ignition on): steering column selector in mode N or P then depress the
unlocked, ignition on, Diesel preheating, brake pedal fully.
engine running,
- position 3 (Starting).
118
Driving
Wait until this warning lamp goes off Switching off the engine Energy economy mode
in the instrument panel, then operate
the starter motor by turning the key F Stop the vehicle. After switching off the engine (position 1
to position 3 without pressing the F With the engine running at idle, turn the key - Stop), for a maximum of 30 minutes you
accelerator pedal, until the engine to position 1. can still use functions such as the audio and
starts. Once the engine starts, F Remove the key from the ignition switch. telematic system, the wipers, dipped beam
release the key. F To lock the steering column, turn the headlamps, courtesy lamps, etc.
steering wheel until it locks.
In wintry conditions, the warning lamp
may stay on for a longer period. When the
engine is hot, the warning lamp does not To facilitate unlocking of the steering For more information on Energy
come on. column, it is recommended that the economy mode, refer to the
wheels be returned to the straight ahead corresponding section.
position before switching off the engine.
If the engine does not start straight away,
switch off the ignition. Wait a few seconds F Check that the parking brake is correctly Key left in
before operating the starter motor again. applied, particularly on sloping ground. If the key has been left in the ignition
6
If the engine does not start after several switch at position 2 (Ignition on), the
attempts, do not keep trying: you risk ignition will be switched off automatically
damaging the starter motor and the after one hour.
engine. Contact a CITROËN dealer or Never switch off the ignition before the To switch the ignition back on, turn the key
a qualified workshop. vehicle is at a complete stop. With the to position 1 (Stop), then back to position
engine off, the braking and steering 2 (Ignition on).
assistance systems are also cut off: risk of
In mild conditions, do not leave the engine loss of control of the vehicle.
at idle to warm up but move off straight
away and drive at moderate speed.
When you leave the vehicle, keep the key

with you and lock the vehicle.
119
Driving
Starting/Switching off the F Press the "START/STOP" button while

maintaining pressure on the pedal until the
Switching off the engine
engine with Keyless Entry engine starts. F Immobilise the vehicle, engine at idle.
and Starting For Diesel engines, when the temperature is
F With a manual gearbox, ideally put the
gear lever into neutral.
below zero and/or the engine is cold, starting
F With an automatic gearbox, ideally select
The electronic key must be present in the will only occur once the preheater warning
mode P or N.
passenger compartment. lamp is off.
If it is not detected, a message is F Press the "START/STOP" button.
displayed. If this warning lamp comes on after In some circumstances, it is necessary to turn
Move the electronic key so that the engine pressing the "START/STOP" button: the steering wheel to lock the steering column.
can be started or stopped. On certain versions with the EAT8 automatic
F You should keep the pedal fully depressed
If there is still a problem, refer to the "Key gearbox, the steering column does not lock, but
and not press the "START/STOP" button
not detected – Back-up starting or Back- the gearbox locks in mode P.
again until the engine is running.
up switch-off " section.
If one of the starting conditions is not met, a
message is displayed.
Starting the engine In some circumstances, you are alerted by
a message that it is necessary to turn the
steering wheel while pressing the "START/
STOP" button, to help unlock the steering If the vehicle is not immobilised, the
column. engine will not stop.
Never leave your vehicle with the

With petrol engines, after a cold start,
electronic key still inside.
preheating the catalytic converter can
cause noticeable engine vibrations for
anything up to 2 minutes while stationary
F With a manual gearbox, place the gear with the engine running (accelerated idle Switching off the engine leads to a loss of
lever in neutral and depress the clutch pedal speed). braking assistance.
fully.
or
F With an automatic gearbox, select mode P
or N and press the brake pedal.
120
Driving
Switching the ignition on In the event of a fault with the electronic key,
without starting workshop.
Emergency switch-off
In the event of an emergency only, the engine
can be switched off without conditions (even
when driving).
Press the "START/STOP" button for about
5 seconds.
F Place and hold the remote control against
In this case, the steering column locks as soon
the reader.
as the vehicle stops.
With the electronic key inside the vehicle, F With a manual gearbox, place the gear On certain versions with the EAT8 automatic
pressing the "START/STOP" button, without lever in neutral, then fully depress the clutch gearbox, the steering column does not lock.
pressing any of the pedals, allows the pedal.
ignition to be switched on without starting the F With an automatic gearbox, select mode
6
engine (turning on the instrument panel and P, then fully depress the brake pedal.
accessories such as the audio system and the
lighting).
F Press the "START/STOP" button. Electric parking brake
The engine starts.
F Press this button again to switch off the In automatic mode, this system applies the
parking brake when the engine is switched off
ignition and allow the vehicle to be locked. Back-up switch-off
and releases it when the vehicle moves off.
Key not detected When the electronic key is not detected or is
no longer in the recognition zone, a message
Back-up starting appears in the instrument panel when closing
a door or trying to switch off the engine.
A back-up reader is fitted to the steering F To confirm the instruction to switch off the
column to allow the engine to be started if engine, press the "START/STOP" button for
the system does not detect the key in the about five seconds.
recognition zone, or when the battery in the
electronic key is discharged.
121
Driving
Any time that the engine is running, the driver

In the event of a battery failure, the Never leave a child alone inside the
can take over to apply or release the parking
electric parking brake no longer works. vehicle as they could release the parking
brake by operating the control lever:
As a safety measure with a manual brake.
F by briefly pulling the control lever to apply
gearbox, if the parking brake is not
the brake,
applied, immobilise the vehicle by
F by briefly pushing the control lever, while When towing, parking on a steep slope
engaging a gear.
pressing the brake pedal, to release it. or if your vehicle is heavily laden, turn
As a safety measure with an automatic
Automatic mode is activated by default. the wheels towards the kerb and with
gearbox, if the parking brake is not
applied, immobilise the vehicle by placing a manual gearbox, engage a gear.
the chocks supplied against one of the When towing, parking on a steep slope,
wheels. or if your vehicle is heavily laden, turn the
Indicator lamp Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified wheels towards the kerb and select mode
P with an automatic gearbox.
workshop.
This indicator lamp comes on in the For towing, your vehicle is approved for
instrument panel and on the control parking on slopes of up to 12%.
lever to confirm the application of
the parking brake, accompanied by
display of the message "Parking
brake applied".
It goes off to confirm the release of the parking

brake. Manual operation
This indicator lamp flashes on the control lever
when manual parking brake application or Manual release
release is performed.
Before leaving the vehicle, check that the With the ignition on or engine running:
parking brake is applied: the indicator F press the brake pedal,
lamps in the instrument panel and the F while maintaining pressure on the brake
control lever must be on fixed. pedal, briefly push the control lever.
If the parking brake is not applied, there
The complete release of the parking brake is
is an audible signal and a message is
confirmed by the brake indicator lamp and the
displayed on opening the driver's door.
P indicator lamp in the control lever going off,
accompanied by the display of the message
"Parking brake released".
122
Driving
If you push the control lever without When stationary with the engine running, do not
pressing the brake pedal, the parking depress the accelerator pedal unnecessarily,
brake will not be released and a message you risk releasing the parking brake.
is displayed.
Automatic application
Manual application With the vehicle stationary, the parking brake
With the vehicle stationary: With a manual gearbox is automatically applied when the engine is
F pull briefly on the control lever. F Fully depress the clutch pedal, engage 1st switched off.
gear or reverse.
Confirmation of the instruction is signalled by F Press the accelerator pedal and release the Application of the parking brake
flashing of the indicator lamp in the control clutch pedal. is confirmed by illumination of the
lever. brake indicator lamp and the P
With an automatic gearbox indicator lamp in the control lever,
Application of the parking brake F Press the brake pedal. accompanied by the display of the
is confirmed by illumination of the F Select mode D, M or R. message "Parking brake applied".
brake indicator lamp and the P F Release the brake pedal and press the
6
indicator lamp in the control lever, accelerator pedal.
accompanied by the display of the Automatic application does not take place
message "Parking brake applied". With an automatic gearbox, if the brake if the engine stalls or goes into STOP
does not release automatically, check that mode of Stop & Start.
Automatic operation the front doors are correctly closed.
With automatic operation, you can also

Automatic release manually apply or release the parking
Ensure first that the engine is running and the The complete release of the parking brake is brake using the control lever.
driver's door is properly closed. confirmed by the brake indicator lamp and the
The electric parking brake releases P indicator lamp in the control lever going off,
automatically and progressively when the accompanied by the display of the message
vehicle moves off. "Parking brake released".
123
Driving
Special cases With an automatic gearbox, mode P is

F Push and hold the control lever in the
release direction for at least 10 seconds and
automatically selected when the ignition is
Parking the vehicle with the switched off. The wheels are blocked.
no more than 15 seconds.
brake released For further information on the Automatic
F Release the control lever.
F Press and hold the brake pedal.
gearbox, particularly in relation to leaving
In very cold conditions (ice), it is F Pull the control lever in the application
the vehicle in free-wheeling mode, refer to
recommended that the parking brake not direction for 2 seconds.
be applied.
To immobilise your vehicle, engage a gear
Deactivation of the automatic
or place the chocks against one of the
functions is confirmed by
wheels.
illumination of this indicator lamp in
With an automatic gearbox, when mode N the instrument panel.
Immobilisation of the vehicle with the is engaged, an audible signal will sound
parking brake released if the driver's door is opened. It will stop F Release the control lever and the brake
F Switch off the engine. when you close the driver's door again. pedal.
Illumination of the indicator lamps in the From now on, the parking brake can only
instrument panel and the control lever be applied and released manually using the
confirm the application of the parking brake. control lever.
F Switch on the ignition again, without starting
the engine.
Deactivating automatic Repeat this procedure to reactivate automatic
F Release the parking brake manually by operation operation (confirmed by the indicator lamp in
the instrument panel going off).
pushing the control lever while keeping your In some situations, for example when it is
foot on the brake pedal. extremely cold or during towing (caravan,
breakdown), it may be necessary to deactivate
Emergency braking
The complete release of the parking brake
is confirmed by the indicator lamp in the automatic operation of the system. In the event of a fault with the brake pedal or
instrument panel and the P indicator lamp in in an exceptional situation (e.g. driver taken
F Start the engine.
the control lever going off, accompanied by ill, driver under instruction, etc.), a continuous
F Apply the parking brake with the control
the display of the message "Parking brake pull on the control lever will brake the vehicle.
lever, if it is released.
released". Braking takes place while the control lever is
F Take your foot off the brake pedal.
F Switch off the ignition. being pulled. It is interrupted if the control lever
is released.
124
Driving
The ABS and DSC systems ensure stability of

Only engage reverse gear when the Gearbox selector positions
the vehicle during emergency braking.
vehicle is stationary with the engine at
If the emergency braking malfunctions, the
idle.
message "Parking brake control faulty" will be
displayed in the instrument panel.
As a safety precaution and to facilitate
starting of the engine, always select
neutral and depress the clutch pedal.
If the ABS and DSC systems malfunction,

signalled by the illumination of one or both
warning lamps in the instrument panel, then
stability of the vehicle is no longer guaranteed. Engaging 5th or 6th gear
In this event, stability must be assured by the
driver by repeating alternate "pull-release" F Move the lever fully to the right to engage 5th
actions on the control lever until the vehicle is or 6th gear.
immobilised.
6
P. Park.
6-speed manual gearbox Failure to follow this advice may cause For parking the vehicle: the front wheels
permanent damage to the gearbox are blocked.
Engaging reverse gear (engagement of 3rd or 4th gear by mistake). R. Reverse.
N. Neutral.
For moving the vehicle with the ignition
off: in certain car washing machines,
Automatic gearbox (EAT6/ when towing the vehicle, etc.
EAT8) D. Automatic mode.
The gearbox manages gear changes
Automatic 6 or 8-speed gearbox with a push
according to the style of driving, the road
selector. It also offers a manual mode with gear
profile and the vehicle load.
changes via control paddles situated behind
M. Manual mode.
F Raise the trigger under the knob and move the steering wheel.
The driver changes gear using the
the gear lever to the left, then forwards.
steering mounted controls.
125
Driving
Push selector Move the selector by pressing it forward (N F Pull the "+" or "-" paddle towards you and
or R) or rearward (N or D) once or twice, release to change up or down a gear.
if necessary going beyond the point of
resistance.
The push selector returns to its initial position Displays in the instrument panel
when released.
With the ignition on, the state of the gearbox is
For example, to change from P to R, you can displayed in the instrument panel:
either push forward twice without going beyond P: park.
the point of resistance or push just once going R: reverse.
beyond the point of resistance: N: neutral.
- In the first case, the gearbox goes from P to D1...D8: automatic mode.
N, then from N to R. S: Sport programme
- In the second case, the gearbox goes M1...M8: manual mode.
directly from P to R. -: instruction not accepted in manual mode.
If the driver's door is opened with the ignition

on, a message is displayed asking you to put
A. Button P. Steering mounted controls the gearbox into mode P.
To put the gearbox into Park mode. The state of the gearbox is displayed in the
In mode M or D, the steering mounted control
B. Unlock button. instrument panel for a few moments after
paddles allow the driver to change gear
To unlock the gearbox and come out of switching off the ignition.
manually.
P or to change to R, with the foot on the
They cannot be used to engage neutral or to
brake pedal.
select or come out of reverse. Operation
Press and hold this button before pushing
the selector. With the engine running, if it is necessary to
C. Button M. press the brake pedal and/or the Unlock button
To change from automatic mode D to in order to change mode, an alert message is
permanent manual mode. displayed in the instrument panel.
D. Gearbox state indicators (P, R, N, D). Only appropriate attempted changes of mode
are accepted.
126
Driving
Manual mode
With the engine running and the brakes If you open the driver's door while mode N
released, if R, D or M is selected, the Switching to the mode: is engaged, an audible signal will sound. It
vehicle moves off, even without pressing F with mode D selected in advance, will stop when you close the driver's door
the accelerator pedal. F press button M; the green indicator lamp in again.
the button comes on.
Exiting the mode:
Never press the accelerator and brake Special aspects of automatic
F push forwards once to return to D.
pedals at the same time – risk of damage mode
or
to the gearbox!
F press button M; the indicator lamp in the The gearbox selects the gear that offers
In the event of a battery failure, you
button goes off. optimum performance, taking account of the
must place the chocks supplied with the
exterior temperature, the profile of the road, the
vehicle tools against one of the wheels to
Switching off the ignition load on the vehicle and the style of driving.
immobilise the vehicle.
For maximum acceleration without touching the
To switch off the ignition, the vehicle must be selector, push the accelerator to the floor (kick-
Unlocking the gearbox stationary. down). The gearbox shifts down automatically
or holds the gear selected until the maximum
- From mode P: Changing to free-wheeling
engine speed is reached.
6
F fully depress the brake pedal,
To put the vehicle in free-wheeling mode, with The steering mounted controls allow the driver
F press the Unlock button,
the engine switched off: to temporarily select a gear, if the road and
F while continuing to press the brake pedal
F with the vehicle stationary and the engine engine speed permit.
and the Unlock button, select another
mode. running, select N,
- From neutral N, at a speed below 3 mph F switch off the engine, Special aspects of manual mode
(5 km/h): F within 5 seconds, switch the ignition on
again, The change from one gear to another takes
F fully depress the brake pedal,
F with your foot on the brake pedal, push the place only if the road speed and engine speed
F while continuing to press the brake pedal,
selector forward or back once to confirm N permit.
select another mode.
and manually release the electric parking
Engaging reverse gear brake,
F switch off the ignition.
F Slow down until you come to a stop.
After this time limit, the gearbox engages mode
F With your foot on the brake pedal, press the
P; it is then necessary to restart the procedure.
Unlock button.
F While maintaining the presses, select
mode R.
127
Driving
Moving off If your vehicle has an automatic gearbox,

Go to a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
From mode P: never try to start the engine by pushing
Do not drive faster than 62 mph (100 km/h),
F Fully depress the brake pedal. the vehicle.
keeping to the speed limit.
F Start the engine. The gearbox switches to back-up mode: mode
F Maintaining pressure on the brake pedal, D is locked in third gear, the steering-mounted
press the Unlock button.
Stopping the vehicle
control paddles are inoperative, mode M is no
F Push once or twice rearward to select the Whatever the state of the gearbox when the longer available. You may feel a pronounced
automatic mode D, or forward to engage ignition is switched off, mode P is engaged jolt when engaging reverse. This does not
reverse R. automatically and immediately. present any risk for the gearbox.
From neutral N: However, in mode N, mode P will be engaged
F Fully depress the brake pedal. after a duration of 5 seconds (allowing for the
F Start the engine. process of putting the vehicle to free-wheeling).
F Maintaining pressure on the brake pedal, Check that mode P has been engaged and
push rearward to select the automatic mode that the electric parking brake was applied Selector operating fault
D, or while pressing the Unlock button push automatically; if not, apply it manually.
forward to engage reverse R.
Minor malfunction
Then, from D or R:
F Release the brake pedal. The corresponding indicator lamps
You are alerted by this warning lamp
F Accelerate progressively to automatically in the selector and the electric
lighting up, accompanied by the display
release the electric parking brake. parking brake control lever must
of a message and an audible signal.
The vehicle moves off immediately. be on, as well as those in the
instrument panel.
Drive cautiously and go to a CITROËN dealer
or a qualified workshop.
In certain cases, the selector lamps may not
come on, but the state of the gearbox is still
Operating faults displayed in the instrument panel.
In severe wintry conditions (temperature
below -23°C), it is recommended that the Gearbox operating fault Major malfunction
engine be allowed to run for a few minutes
before moving off, to ensure the correct This is signalled by the illumination of You are alerted by the illumination of
operation and durability of the engine and this warning lamp, accompanied by the this warning lamp.
gearbox. display of a message and an audible
signal, when the ignition is switched on.
128
Driving
Stop as soon as it is safe to do so, away

"SPORT" mode (depending on version)
With the engine running, when SPORT mode is
Hill start assist
from the traffic, and call a CITROËN
activated, the gearbox delays changing up for System which keeps your vehicle immobilised
a more dynamic driving style. temporarily (approximately 2 seconds) when
When the ignition is switched off, the
starting on a gradient, the time it takes to
gearbox goes into mode P automatically. Activating SPORT mode is not recommended
move your foot from the brake pedal to the
in the following situations:
accelerator pedal.
- ASR/DSC deactivated,
It is only active when:
- low fuel level reached,
Driving mode - low AdBlue level reached.
- the vehicle is completely stationary, with
your foot on the brake pedal,
In mode D, pressing this button activates the - certain slope conditions are met,
SPORT programme. - the driver's door is closed.
"S" appears in the instrument panel.
Pressing this button again deactivates the
function.
Do not leave the vehicle while it is being
held in the hill start assist phase.
If you need to leave the vehicle with the
6
Pressing this button has no effect when
engine running, apply the parking brake
1. ECO. towing a connected trailer.
manually. Then check that the parking
Press this button to activate/deactivate
brake warning lamp is on fixed on the
"ECO" mode (confirmed by the "ECO" mode instrument panel.
illumination/extinction of the indicator This allows fuel consumption to be reduced.
lamp). With the EAT8 gearbox, "free-wheeling" mode
2. SPORT. may activate to save fuel. Take your foot fully
Press this button to activate/deactivate off the accelerator pedal to anticipate slowing The hill start assist function cannot be
"SPORT" mode (confirmed by the down. deactivated. However, use of the parking
illumination/extinction of the indicator lamp).
brake to immobilise the vehicle interrupts
When the message disappears, the selected its operation.
mode is activated.
Each mode is independent and they cannot SPORT or ECO mode is automatically
be activated simultaneously. Activation of deactivated when the ignition is switched
one mode deactivates the other. off.
129
Driving
Malfunction With an automatic gearbox, the system is

only active in manual operation.
The information appears in the

instrument panel in the form of an
If a fault in the system occurs, these warning arrow and the recommended gear.
lamps come on.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
Uphill, with the vehicle stationary, the vehicle workshop to have the system checked. The system adapts its gear shift
is held for a short time when you release the recommendation according to the driving
brake pedal. conditions (slope, load, etc.) and the
With a manual gearbox, if you are in first gear Gear efficiency indicator driver's requirements (power, acceleration,
or in neutral. (Depending on engine.) braking, etc.).
With an automatic gearbox, if you are in The system never suggests:
This system reduces fuel consumption by
position D or M. - engaging first gear,
recommending the most appropriate gear.
- engaging reverse.
Operation
Stop & Start
Depending on the driving situation and your
vehicle's equipment, the system may advise The Stop & Start function puts the engine
you to skip one or more gears. temporarily into standby – STOP mode – during
Gear engagement recommendations are phases when the vehicle is stopped (red lights,
only optional. In fact, the configuration of the queues, etc.). The engine restarts automatically
road, the traffic density and safety remain – START mode – as soon as the driver wishes
Downhill, with the vehicle stationary and determining factors when choosing the best to move off again.
reverse gear engaged, the vehicle is held for gear. Therefore, the driver remains responsible Primarily designed for urban use, the function
a short time when you release the brake pedal. for deciding whether or not to follow the is intended to reduce fuel consumption and
system's advice. exhaust emissions as well as the noise level
This function cannot be deactivated. when stationary.
The function does not affect the functionalities
of the vehicle, in particular the braking.
130
Driving
F Press the button. Putting the engine into standby

A message in the instrument panel confirms (STOP mode)
the change of state.
When the function is deactivated, the orange The engine automatically goes into standby
indicator lamp is lit; if the engine was in as soon as the driver indicates the intention of
Opening the bonnet
standby, it restarts immediately. stopping.
Before doing anything under the bonnet,
- With a manual gearbox: at a speed below
deactivate the Stop & Start system to
Associated indicator lamps 2 mph (3 km/h), with the gear lever in
avoid any risk of injury caused by the
neutral and the clutch pedal released.
engine restarting automatically.
Function activated. - With an automatic gearbox:
• With the gear selector in mode D or M,
Driving on flooded roads Function deactivated or malfunction. at a speed below 12 mph (20 km/h) for
Before entering into a flooded area, it is BlueHDi 180 S&S versions, or below
strongly recommended that you deactivate 2 mph (3 km/h) for PureTech 130/175 S&S
the Stop & Start system. and BlueHDi 130 S&S versions, with the
For more information on Driving brake pedal depressed.
recommendations, particularly on Operation • With the gear selector in mode N, at
flooded roads, refer to the corresponding a speed of 0 mph (0 km/h).
6
Main conditions for operation • With the gear selector in mode P and
section.
- The driver's door must be closed. the brake pedal released, at a speed of
- The driver's seat belt must be fastened. 0 mph (0 km/h).
- The state of charge of the battery must be
Deactivation/Reactivation sufficient.
- The temperature of the engine must be
The function is activated by default when the Time counter
within its nominal operating range.
ignition is switched on.
- The outside temperature must be between A time counter adds up the time spent in
To deactivate/reactivate the function: 0°C and 35°C. standby during the journey. It is reset to zero
every time the ignition is switched on.
131
Driving
Special cases: F With a manual gearbox: with the clutch Malfunctions

pedal fully depressed.
The engine does not go into standby in the F With an automatic gearbox:
following cases. • With the selector in position D or M: with In the event of a malfunction,
- Steep slope (rising or falling). the brake pedal released. this warning lamp flashes for
- Vehicle has not exceeded 6 mph (10 km/h) • With the selector in position N and the a few moments, then remains on,
since the last engine start (with the key or brake pedal released: with the selector at accompanied by the display of
the "START/STOP" button). D or M. a message.
- Needed to maintain a comfortable • With the selector in position P and the
temperature in the passenger compartment. brake pedal depressed: with the selector F Have the vehicle checked by a CITROËN
- Demisting active. at R, N, D or M. dealer or a qualified workshop.
In these cases, this indicator lamp • Reverse gear engaged.
flashes for a few seconds, then The vehicle stalls in STOP mode
goes off.
Special cases All of the instrument panel warning lamps come
on if this fault occurs.
After the engine has restarted, STOP The engine restarts automatically in the
mode is not available until the vehicle has following cases.
The Stop & Start system requires a 12 V
reached a speed of 5 mph (8 km/h).
- With a manual gearbox: vehicle speed battery of specific technology and
exceeds 2.5 mph (4 km/h), specification.
During parking manoeuvres, STOP mode - With an automatic gearbox: All work concerning the battery must be
is not available for a few seconds after • With the gear selector in position N and carried out only by a CITROËN dealer or
coming out of reverse gear or turning the the brake pedal released, vehicle speed a qualified workshop.
steering wheel. exceeds 0.6 mph (1 km/h).
• Adaptive Cruise Control function
deactivated.
Tyre under-inflation
Restarting the engine (START
In these cases, this indicator lamp detection
flashes for a few seconds, then
mode) goes off. This system automatically checks the
The engine automatically restarts as soon as pressures of the tyres while driving.
the driver indicates the intention of moving off It compares the information given by the wheel
again. speed sensors with reference values, which
132
Driving
must be reinitialised every time the tyre F If it is not possible to make this check
Checking tyre pressures
pressures are adjusted or a wheel changed. immediately, drive carefully at reduced
This check should be done when the tyres
The system triggers an alert as soon as it speed.
are "cold" (vehicle stopped for 1 hour or
detects a drop in the inflation pressure of one F In the event of a puncture, use the
after a journey of less than 6 miles (10 km)
or more tyres. temporary puncture repair kit or the spare
at moderate speeds).
wheel (depending on equipment).
Otherwise, add 0.3 bar to the pressures
shown on the label.
Under-inflation detection does not replace The alert is kept active until the system is
the need for vigilance on the part of the reinitialised.
driver.
This system does not avoid the need Under-inflation alert
to regularly check the tyre pressures Reinitialisation
(including the spare wheel) as well as This is signalled by continuous
illumination of this warning lamp, The system must be reinitialised after any
before a long journey.
an audible signal and the display of adjustment to the pressure of one or more
Driving with under-inflated tyres,
a message. tyres, and after changing one or more wheels.
particularly in adverse conditions (heavy
load, high speed, long journey): F Reduce speed immediately, avoid excessive
6
- worsens road-holding, steering movements and avoid sudden
- lengthens braking distances, braking.
- causes premature wear of the tyres, F Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to
- increases fuel consumption. do so.
Before reinitialising the system, make
The loss of pressure detected does not sure that the pressures of the four tyres
always cause visible bulging of the tyre. are correct for the conditions of use of the
Do not rely on just a visual check. vehicle and conform to the values written
The inflation pressures defined for your on the tyre pressure label.
vehicle can be found on the tyre pressure Check the pressures of the four tyres
label. before performing the reinitialisation.
For more information on the The system does not advise if a pressure
Identification markings, refer to the F Using a compressor, such as the one in the is incorrect at the time of reinitialisation.
corresponding section. temporary puncture repair kit, check the
pressures of the four tyres when cold.
133
Driving
With the vehicle stationary, the

system is reinitialised via the
CITROËN ConnectedCAM® Without exception, any action which the
driver takes concerning the camera must
Driving/Vehicle menu of the touch (Depending on country of sale.)
be with the vehicle stopped.
screen.
F In this menu, select the "Driving functions"
tab. Operation
F In the page, select the "Under-inflation
To use all camera functions, you must perform
initialisation" function.
the following operations:
F Select "Yes" to confirm.
F download the "CITROËN ConnectedCAM ®"
The reinitialisation is confirmed by the display
application onto a smartphone,
of a message and an audible signal.
F pair the smartphone with the camera
following the instructions given by the
Malfunction application.
Pairing is necessary at the first connection.
After this it will be automatic.
The default pairing code is: ConnectedCAM.
The illumination of these warning lamps

indicates a fault with the system.
A message appears, accompanied by an
audible signal.
Switching on
In this case, under-inflation monitoring of the F Press and hold this button to
tyres is no longer assured. switch the camera on.
Have the system checked by a CITROËN This camera, installed at the top of the The indicator lamp in the button
dealer or a qualified workshop. windscreen and connected wirelessly, allows comes on.
you to: When the camera is switched on, video
- take photos and videos on demand and recording is automatic and permanent.
share them,
- send the vehicle's GPS coordinates to
a smartphone,
- record videos automatically in the event of
a vehicle impact.
134
Driving
Switching off Resetting the system Driving and manoeuvring

F Press and hold this button to aids – General
switch the camera off.
The indicator lamp in the button
recommendations
goes off. Pressing and holding these two buttons
If you switch the camera off manually, it will simultaneously resets the system.
This action erases all data recorded in the Driving and manoeuvring aids cannot, in
remain off even after the vehicle is restarted
camera and reinitialises the camera's default any circumstances, replace the need for
and will have to be switched on manually.
pairing code. vigilance on the part of the driver.
The driver must comply with the Highway
Managing photos and videos For safety reasons, the driver must not Code, must remain in control of the
use the CITROËN ConnectedCAM ® vehicle in all circumstances and must be
F Press this button briefly to take
application from a smartphone while able to retake control of it at all times. The
a photo.
driving. He or she must perform any action driver must adapt the speed to climactic
requiring sustained attention when the conditions, traffic and the state of the
An audible signal confirms that the request has
vehicle is stationary. road.
been acknowledged.
It is the driver's responsibility to constantly
6
check the traffic, to assess the relative
F Press and hold this button to
distances and speeds of other vehicles
record a video.
and to anticipate their movements before
Operating fault indicating and changing lane.
A micro USB port also allows the data from the The systems cannot exceed the limits of
camera to be saved onto other media such as When a system fault occurs, the the laws of physics.
computers, tablets, etc. indicator lamp in the button flashes.
Thanks to the "CITROËN ConnectedCAM ®"
application, you can then automatically and Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or by
Driving aids
immediately share your photos and videos on a qualified workshop. You should hold the steering wheel with
social networks or by email. both hands, always use the interior and
An audible signal confirms that the request has exterior rear view mirrors, always keep
been acknowledged. your feet close to the pedals and take
a break every two hours.
135
Driving
Manoeuvring aids Other cameras

The driver must always check the The images from the camera(s) displayed
surroundings of the vehicle before and on the touch screen or on the instrument
during the whole manoeuvre, in particular panel may be distorted by the relief.
using the mirrors. In the presence of areas in shade, or in
conditions of bright sunlight or inadequate
lighting, the image may be darkened and
Driving aids camera
Radar with lower contrast.
This camera and its associated functions
The operation of the radar as well as the Obstacles may appear further away than
may be impaired if the windscreen area in
associated functions may be impaired they actually are.
front of the camera is dirty, misty, frosty,
through the accumulation of dirt (mud,
covered with snow, damaged or masked
frost, etc.), in certain difficult weather
by a sticker.
conditions (very heavy rain, snow) or if the
On versions with camera alone, this
bumper is damaged.
message indicates to you that the camera
If the front bumper is to be repainted,
is obstructed: "Driving aids camera:
Visibility limited, see user guide".
workshop; certain types of paint could
In humid and cold weather, demist the
interfere with the operation of the radar.
windscreen regularly.
Poor visibility (inadequate street lighting,
heavy rain, thick fog, snowfall), dazzle
(headlamps of an oncoming vehicle, low
sun, reflections on a damp road, leaving
a tunnel, alternating shade and light) can
also impair detection performance.
136
Driving
Sensors Maintenance Speed Limit recognition

Clean the bumpers and door mirrors and
the field of vision of the cameras regularly.
and recommendation
When washing your vehicle at high Refer to the General recommendations on
pressure, direct the spray from at least the use of driving and manoeuvring aids.
30 cm away from the radar, sensors and
cameras.
The operation of the sensors as well as

the associated functions may be disturbed Mats
by sound interference such as those The use of mats not approved by
emitted by noisy vehicles and machinery CITROËN may interfere with the operation
(e.g. lorries, pneumatic drills), by the of the speed limiter or cruise control.
accumulation of snow or dead leaves To avoid any risk of jamming the pedals:
on the road or in the event of damaged F ensure that the mat is secured
bumpers and mirrors. This system displays the maximum authorised
correctly, speed in the instrument panel, according to
A front or rear impact to the vehicle can F never fit one mat on top of another.
6
upset the sensors' settings, which is not the speed limits in the country in which you are
always detected by the system: distance driving, using:
measurements may be distorted. - Speed limit signs detected by the camera.
The sensors do not detect obstacles that - Speed limit details from the navigation
are too low (pavements, studs) or too thin system mapping.
(trees, posts, wire fences). Units of speed
Certain obstacles located in the sensors' Ensure that the units of speed displayed
blind spots may not be detected or may no on the instrument panel (mph or km/h) are
longer be detected during the manoeuvre. those for the country you are driving in.
If this is not the case, when the vehicle is You should update your navigation
Certain materials (fabrics) absorb sound
stationary, set the display to the required mapping regularly in order to receive
waves: pedestrians may not be detected.
units of speed so that it complies with accurate speed limit information from the
what is authorised locally. system.
In case of doubt, contact a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop. - Signs detected by the camera indicating the
area of a junction:
137
Driving
Sign detected Suggested speed (calculated)
Entry into a junction area Without CITROËN Connect Nav

Example: 10 mph or 20 km/h (depending on the units of the instrument panel)
With CITROËN Connect Nav
Display of the speed in force in the country in which you are driving.
- Certain qualifier plates detected by the camera:
Qualifier plate detected Display of the speed associated with the qualifier plate
Speed limit in rain If the wiper control stalk is in the "intermittent wipe" or "automatic wipe" position (in order to
Examples: activate the rain sensor):
68 mph (110 km/h) (for example)
Speed limit if towing If an approved towing device is fixed to the vehicle:

56 mph (90 km/h) (for example)
Speed limit applicable over a certain distance 43 mph (70 km/h) (for example)
Example:
138
Driving
Speed limit for vehicles whose gross vehicle 56 mph (90 km/h) (for example)
weight or gross train weight is less than
3.5 tonnes
Speed limit in snow If the exterior temperature is below 3°C:

Example: 19 mph (30 km/h) (for example)
with a "snowflake" symbol
Speed limit at certain times 19 mph (30 km/h) (for example)

Example: with a "clock" symbol
The units for the speed limits (mph or

km/h) depend on the country you are
driving in.
The automatic reading of road signs is
a driving aid system and does not always
display speed limits correctly.
Specific speed limits, such as those for
heavy goods vehicles, are not displayed.
The display of the speed limit in the
6
It should be taken into account so that you The speed limit signs present on the road instrument panel is updated as you pass
observe the speed limit. always take priority in comparison with the a speed limit sign intended for cars (light
For the system to operate correctly when display by the system. vehicles).
you change country, the units for speed in The system is designed to detect signs
the instrument panel must be those for the that conform to the Vienna Convention on
country you are driving in. road signs.
139
Driving
Activation/Deactivation The following situations may interfere with

the operation of the system or prevent it from
By default, the system is automatically working:
activated at every engine start. - poor visibility (inadequate street lighting,
falling snow, rain, fog),
On detection of speed limit information, the
The function is activated and - windscreen area located in front of the
system displays the value.
deactivated in the Driving/Vehicle camera dirty, misted, frost-covered, snow-
menu of the touch screen. covered, damaged or covered by a sticker,
- fault with the camera,
- obsolete or incorrect mapping,
- obstructed road signs (by other vehicles,
Displays in the instrument panel vegetation, snow),
For a suggested maximum speed, the first - speed limit signs that do not conform to the
time that the vehicle's speed exceeds it by standard, are damaged or distorted.
more than 3 mph (5 km/h) (example: 59 mph
(95 km/h)), the speed flashes for 10 seconds.
Recommendation
Operating limits
1. Detected speed limit indication.
or The legislation on speed limits is specific to
2. Indication of the end of the speed limit. each country.
The system does not take account of reduced
speed limits in the following cases: In addition to Speed Limit recognition and
- poor weather (rain, snow), recommendation, the driver can select the
- atmospheric pollution, speed displayed as a speed setting for the
- when towing, speed limiter or cruise control using the speed
- driving with a space-saver type spare wheel limiter or cruise control storage button.
or snow chains fitted,
The system is active but is not detecting speed
- puncture repair using the temporary repair
limit information.
kit,
- young drivers, etc.
140
Driving
For more information on the Speed

Memorising the speed F Press button 2 again to confirm and save
the new speed setting.
limiter, Cruise control or Adaptive
After a predetermined period, the screen
cruise control, refer to the corresponding
returns to the current display.
sections.
Extended Traffic Sign

F Switch on the speed limiter/cruise control.
The speed limiter/cruise control information is
Recognition
displayed.
On detection of a sign offering a new speed

limit, the system displays the value and "MEM"
flashes for a few seconds to offer to make it
a new speed setting. This additional system recognises these road
1. Select speed limiter/cruise control mode. signs and displays them in the instrument panel
2. Memorise a speed setting. if the appropriate display mode is selected.
One-way street: if you start driving the wrong
6
If there is a difference of less than 6 mph
Display in the instrument panel way down a one-way street, an alert message,
(9 km/h) between the speed setting and
including the sign's symbol, is displayed in the
the speed displayed by the Speed Limit
instrument panel (request to check the traffic
recognition and recommendation, the
direction).
"MEM" symbol is not displayed.
Other signs: when approaching one of these
signs, the sign's symbol is displayed in the
Depending on the road conditions, several instrument panel.
speeds may be displayed.
3. Speed limit indication. F Press button 2 once to save the suggested

speed value. The real road signs always take priority
4. Offer to memorise the speed.
A message is displayed to confirm the request. over the display from the system.
5. Current speed setting. The signs must comply with the Vienna
Convention on road signs.
141
Driving
Programmable speed 4. Pause/resume speed limiter with the

speed setting previously stored.
Switching on/pausing
limiter 5. Depending on version: F Turn the thumbwheel 1 to the LIMIT position
Refer to the General recommendations on Display of speed thresholds recorded to select the speed limiter; the function is
the use of driving and manoeuvring aids. using Memorising speeds. paused.
or F If the speed setting is suitable (last speed
Use the speed suggested by the Speed setting programmed in the system), press
This system prevents the vehicle Limit recognition and recommendation
from exceeding the speed button 4 to switch the speed limiter on.
(MEM display).
programmed by the driver (speed
setting). For more information on Memorising speeds F Pressing button 4 again temporarily
or on the Speed Limit recognition and interrupts the function (pause).
The speed limiter is switched on manually.
The minimum speed setting is 19 mph recommendation, refer to the corresponding
(30 km/h). sections. Adjusting the Speed
The speed setting remains in the system Limit recognition and
memory when the ignition is switched off. recommendation setting
You do not have to switch the speed limiter on
Displays in the instrument panel in order to set the speed.
Steering mounted control
To modify the limit speed setting from the
current speed of the vehicle:
F in steps of +/- 1 mph (km/h), make
successive short presses on button 2 or 3,
F continuously, in steps of +/- 5 mph (km/h),
press and hold button 2 or 3.
6. Indication of speed limiter on (amber To modify the limit speed setting using
colour)/pause (grey colour). memorised speeds and from the touch screen:
7. Indication of speed limiter mode selection. F press button 5 to display the memorised
1. ON (LIMIT position)/OFF (0 position). speed settings,
8. Programmed speed value.
F press the button for the desired speed
2. Reduce the speed setting. 9. Speed suggested by the Speed Limit
setting.
3. Increase the speed setting. recognition and recommendation system
(depending on version).
142
Driving
The selection screen closes after a few When the limit speed is exceeded but this is not
On sharp acceleration, as when
moments. due to action by the driver (in case of a steep
descending a steep hill, the speed limiter
This setting becomes the new limit speed. slope, for example), an audible signal triggers
will not be able to prevent the vehicle from
immediately.
exceeding the programmed speed.
To modify the speed limiter setting using
Once the speed of the vehicle returns to The speed limiter is deactivated
the speed suggested by the Speed Limit
the programmed setting, the speed limiter temporarily and the displayed
recognition and recommendation system:
functions again: the display of the programmed programmed speed flashes.
F the speed suggested is displayed in the
speed setting becomes fixed again. An audible signal accompanies the
instrument panel,
flashing of the programmed speed when
F make a first press on button 5; a message
exceeding the speed is not due to an
is displayed to confirm the memorisation Switching off action by the driver.
request,
F Turn the thumbwheel 1 to the "0" position: The use of mats not approved by
F press button 5 again to save the suggested
the display of information on the speed CITROËN may interfere with the operation
speed.
limiter disappears. of the speed limiter.
The speed displays immediately in the
To avoid any risk of jamming of the pedals:
instrument panel as the new speed setting.
- ensure that the mat is positioned
correctly,
Temporarily exceeding the Malfunction
6
- never fit one mat on top of another.
programmed speed
Flashing of the dashes indicates a fault with the
F To temporarily exceed the programmed speed limiter.
speed threshold, fully depress the Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or
accelerator pedal. a qualified workshop.
The speed limiter is deactivated temporarily

and the displayed programmed speed flashes.
If it is exceeded for a prolonged period of time,
an audible warning is triggered.
Simply release the accelerator pedal to return
to below the programmed speed.
143
Driving
Cruise control – particular Exceeding the programmed speed Programmable cruise

recommendations setting
The speed setting can be exceeded
control
temporarily by pressing the accelerator Refer to the General recommendations
pedal (the programmed speed flashes). on the use of driving and manoeuvring
For the safety of everyone, only use the To return to the speed setting, release aids and to Cruise control – particular
cruise control where the driving conditions the accelerator pedal (when this speed is recommendations.
allow running at a constant speed and reached again, the display of the speed This system automatically keeps
keeping an adequate safety distance. stops flashing). the vehicle's speed at the cruise
Remain vigilant when the cruise control value programmed by the driver
is activated. If you hold one of the speed (speed setting), without using the
setting modification buttons, a very rapid accelerator pedal.
change in the speed of your vehicle may
occur. Operating limits The cruise control is switched on manually.
When descending a steep hill, the cruise Never use the system in the following It requires a minimum vehicle speed of 25 mph
control system cannot prevent the vehicle situations: (40 km/h).
from exceeding the set speed. Brake if - in an urban area with the risk of
With a manual gearbox, it requires the
necessary to control the speed of your pedestrians crossing the road,
engagement of third gear or higher.
vehicle. - in heavy traffic (except versions with
With an automatic gearbox, it requires the
On steep climbs or when towing, the set the Stop & Go function),
engagement of mode D or of second gear or
speed may not be reached or maintained. - on winding or steep roads,
higher in mode M.
- on slippery or flooded roads,
- in unfavourable climatic conditions,
- driving on a speed circuit,
- driving on a rolling road,
- use of snow chains, non-slip covers or
studded tyres. The cruise control remains active after
changing gear regardless of the gearbox
type on engines fitted with Stop & Start.
144
Driving
For more information on Memorising speeds F To start the cruise control and set a cruise
Switching off the ignition cancels any
or on the Speed Limit recognition and speed, once the vehicle has reached the
speed setting.
recommendation, refer to the corresponding desired speed, press button 2 or 3; the
sections. current speed of your vehicle becomes the
cruise speed setting.
Steering mounted control Displays in the instrument panel You can release the accelerator pedal.
F Pressing button 4 temporarily interrupts
operation of the system (pause).
F Pressing button 4 again restores operation
of the cruise control (ON).
Modifying the cruise speed

6. Indication of speed limiter on (amber
setting
colour)/pause (grey colour). The cruise control must be active.
1. ON (CRUISE position)/OFF (0 position).
7. Indication of cruise control mode
2. Activation of cruise control at the current To modify the cruise speed setting from the
6
selection.
speed/decrease speed setting. current speed of the vehicle:
8. Value of the speed setting.
3. Activation of cruise control at the current F in steps of +/- 1 mph (km/h), make
speed/increase speed setting. 9. Speed suggested by the Speed Limit successive short presses on button 2 or 3,
recognition and recommendation system F continuously, in steps of +/- 5 mph (km/h),
4. Pausing/resumption of cruise control with
(depending on version). press and hold button 2 or 3.
the speed setting previously stored.
5. Depending on version:
Display of speed thresholds recorded Switching on/pausing
using Memorising speeds.
F Turn the thumbwheel 1 to the "CRUISE" Take care: pressing and holding button
or
position to select cruise control mode; the 2 or 3 results in a rapid change in the
Use the speed suggested by the Speed
function is paused. speed of your vehicle.
Limit recognition and recommendation
(MEM display).
145
Driving
As a precaution, it is recommended Switching off As a safety measure, the driver must

that the cruise speed chosen be close only modify the speed settings when
F Turn the thumbwheel 1 to the "0" position:
to the current speed of your vehicle, so stationary.
the cruise control information disappears
as to avoid any sudden acceleration or
from the screen.
deceleration of the vehicle.
To modify the cruise speed setting using Malfunction Memorising speeds

memorised speed settings and from the touch
screen:
F press button 5 to display the memorised
speed settings,
F press the button for the desired speed
Flashing dashes indicate a fault with the cruise
setting.
control system.
The selection screen closes after a few
Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or
moments.
This setting becomes the new cruise speed. From the Driving/Vehicle menu of
the touch screen, select "Driving
To modify the cruise speed setting from the
speed suggested by the vehicle Speed Limit Memorising speeds functions", then "Memorised
speed settings".
recognition and recommendation:
Linked to the speed limiter and programmable
F the speed suggested is displayed in the
cruise control, this function allows speed limits
instrument panel,
to be registered which will then be suggested
F make an initial press on button 5; a
as settings for these two systems. "MEM" button
message is displayed to confirm the
You can memorise several speed settings for
memorisation request.
each for system.
F press button 5 again to save the suggested
By default, some speed settings are already
speed.
memorised.
The speed displays immediately in the
instrument panel as the new speed setting.
146
Driving
With this button, you can select a memorised With the Stop function, the system manages
The system assists the driver in managing
speed setting to use with the speed limiter or the braking until the vehicle stops completely.
the steering, acceleration and braking
the programmable cruise control. With the Stop & Go function, the system
within the limits of the laws of physics
manages the braking until the vehicle stops
For more information on the Speed limiter or and the capabilities of the vehicle. Some
completely, and also manages its restarting.
Cruise control, refer to the associated section. road infrastructure elements or vehicles
present on the road may not be properly
seen or may be poorly interpreted by the
Highway Driver Assist camera and radar, which may lead to an
unexpected change in direction, a lack of
This system provides active assistance in steering correction and/or inappropriate
keeping the vehicle in position in its lane. management of the acceleration or To do so, it has a camera located at the top of
It associates the Adaptive Cruise Control with braking. the windscreen and, depending on version, a
Stop & Go function and Active Lane Keeping radar located in the front bumper.
Assist.
These two functions must be activated and in Primarily designed for driving on main
operation.
These functions are especially suitable for Adaptive Cruise Control roads and motorways, this system only
works with moving vehicles driving in the
6
driving on motorways and main roads. same direction as your vehicle.
Refer to the General recommendations
For more information on Adaptive Cruise on the use of driving and manoeuvring
Control and Active Lane Keeping Assist, aids and to Cruise control – particular
refer to the corresponding sections. recommendations.
This system automatically maintains the If the driver operates a direction indicator
speed of your vehicle at a value which you set to overtake a slower vehicle, the cruise
(speed setting), while keeping a safe distance control allows your vehicle to temporarily
from the vehicle in front (target vehicle), and approach the vehicle in front to assist
which has been set beforehand by the driver. the overtaking manoeuvre, without ever
The system automatically manages the exceeding the speed setting.
acceleration and deceleration of the vehicle.
147
Driving
5 Use the speed suggested by the Speed

Some vehicles present on the road may Pressing and holding button 2 or 3 results
Limit recognition and recommendation
not be properly seen or may be poorly in a rapid change in the speed of your
(MEM display).
interpreted by the camera and/or radar vehicle.
6 Display and adjustment of the distance
(e.g. a lorry), which may lead to a poor
setting to the vehicle in front.
assessment of the distances and lead to
the vehicle inappropriately accelerating or Pause/resume cruise control
braking. Use F Press 4 or press the brake pedal. To pause
cruise control, you may also:
Activate the system (when paused) - shift from mode D to N,
Steering mounted control F With the engine running, turn the - press the clutch pedal for more than
thumbwheel 1 downwards to the CRUISE 10 seconds,
position. Cruise control is ready to operate - press the electric parking brake control.
(grey display). F Press 4 to restart cruise control.
Cruise control may have been paused
Start cruise control and select automatically:
a speed - when the speed of the vehicle goes below
19 mph (30 km/h) with a manual gearbox,
With a manual gearbox, your speed must be
- when the speed of the engine goes below
between between 19 and 112 mph (30 and
1,100 rpm with a manual gearbox,
180 km/h).
- by triggering of the ESC system.
With an automatic EAT6 gearbox, your speed
1 ON (CRUISE position)/OFF (0 position). With an EAT6 gearbox, following braking of
must be between between 1.2 and 112 mph
2 Activation of cruise control at the current the vehicle bringing it to a complete stop, the
(2 and 180 km/h).
speed/decrease speed setting. system holds the vehicle stationary; the cruise
With an automatic EAT8 gearbox, your speed
control is paused. The driver should press
3 Activation of cruise control at the current must be between between 0 and 112 mph
the accelerator pedal to move off, then above
speed/increase speed setting. (0 and 180 km/h).
1.2 mph (2 km/h), reactivate the system by
4 Pausing/resumption of cruise control with F Press button 2 or 3: the current speed
pressing one of the buttons 2, 3 or 4.
the speed setting previously stored. becomes the speed setting (minimum
Confirmation of the restarting of the 19 mph (30 km/h)) and cruise control is
vehicle after automatic stop (versions with immediately in operation (green displayed).
Stop & Go function). F Press 3 to increase or 2 to decrease the
speed setting (steps of 5 mph (km/h) if held
pressed).
148
Driving
With an EAT8 gearbox, following braking of

To prevent any sudden acceleration or
the vehicle bringing it to a complete stop,
deceleration of the vehicle, select a speed
if the traffic conditions do not allow the
setting fairly close to the current speed of
vehicle to be restarted within the 3 seconds
your vehicle.
following immobilisation, press button 4 or the
accelerator pedal to start off again.
If the driver takes no action following this
immobilisation, the electric parking brake is Changing the inter-vehicle distance
applied automatically after about 5 minutes. 7. Vehicle detected by the system (symbol
F Press 6 to display the distance setting
thresholds ("Distant", "Normal", "Close"), full).
then press again to select an option. 8. Cruise control active (colour not grey).
After a few seconds, the option is accepted and 9. Value of the speed setting.
Cruise control remains active after
will be memorised when the ignition is switched 10. Speed suggested by the Speed Limit
changing gear regardless of the gearbox
off. recognition and recommendation.
type.
11. Vehicle held stopped (versions with
automatic gearbox).
Temporarily exceeding the speed
setting
6
When the cruise control is paused,
the message "Activation not possible, F Press the accelerator pedal. Distance
conditions unsuitable" is displayed as monitoring and cruise control are
long as reactivation is not possible (safety deactivated as long as you continue to
conditions not met). accelerate. "Cruise control suspended" is
displayed.
12. Inter-vehicle distance setting.
Using the Speed Limit recognition Deactivating the system 13. Position of vehicle detected by the system.
and recommendation function
F Turn the thumbwheel 1 upwards to the OFF
F Press 5 to accept the speed suggested by position.
the function, then press again to confirm.
Messages and alerts
Displays in the instrument panel
The "Driving" display mode of the digital
The following information can be seen in the instrument panel must have been selected first.
instrument panel in "DRIVING" display mode.
149
Driving
"Activation not possible, conditions

The display of these messages or alerts is During the vehicle immobilisation phase, it
unsuitable". The system refuses to
not sequential. is recommended:
activate the cruise control (speed
- Not to open the doors.
outside the operating range, winding
"Cruise control paused" or "Cruise - Not to drop off or pick up passengers.
road).
control suspended" following a brief - Not to engage reverse gear.
acceleration by the driver.
Stop function
"Cruise control paused" (for a few
"Cruise control active", no vehicle When the vehicle restarts, watch out for
seconds).
detected. cyclists, pedestrians or animals which may
not be detected properly.
"Cruise control paused", vehicle
detected.
The system has brought the vehicle to
"Cruise control active", vehicle a complete stop and is holding it immobilised: Operating limits
detected. the cruise control pauses.
The driver must accelerate to move off again, The cruise control operates by day and night, in
then reactivate cruise control. fog or moderate rainfall.
"Take back control of the vehicle" Certain situations cannot be managed by the
(orange) Stop & Go function system and require driver intervention.
"To move off again: accelerate or Cases of non-detection by the system:

press button 4" - Pedestrians, some cyclists, animals.
- Stationary vehicles (traffic jam, breakdown,
F Brake or accelerate, depending on the context. etc.).
"Take back control of the vehicle"

(red) The system has brought the vehicle to
a complete stop.
Within 3 seconds, the vehicle starts off again
automatically and gradually.
After 3 seconds, the driver must accelerate or
F Take immediate control of the vehicle: press button 4 to move off again. - Vehicles crossing your lane.
the system cannot manage the current - Vehicles driving in the opposite direction.
driving situation.
150
Driving
When the driver must suspend the cruise

Pay particular attention: Malfunction
control system:
- When motorcycles are present and
when there are vehicles staggered
If the cruise control
onto the traffic lane.
malfunctions, dashes are
- When entering a tunnel or crossing
displayed instead of the
a bridge.
cruise control speed setting.
If this warning lamp comes
If one of these malfunctions occurs, do not on, accompanied by an
- Vehicles in a tight bend. use the system: alert message and an
- When approaching a roundabout. - Following an impact on the windscreen audible signal, this confirms
close to the camera or on the front a malfunction.
bumper (versions with radar).
- Brake lamps not working. Have the system checked by a CITROËN
If the vehicle has been subject to one of Active Lane Keeping

Assist
6
- When following a narrow vehicle. the following modifications, do not use the
Reactivate cruise control when conditions system:
permit. - Carrying long objects on roof bars.
- Towing.
Cases where the driver is urged to take - Use of the "space-saver" type spare
back control immediately: wheel (depending on version).
- Excessively sharp deceleration of the - Front end of the vehicle modified
vehicle in front of you. (addition of long-range headlamps,
painting of the front bumper). Refer to the General recommendations on
the use of driving and manoeuvring aids.
Using a camera located at the top of the
windscreen, the system identifies lane
markings and steers the vehicle inside this lane
to keep it in the lateral position chosen by the
- When a vehicle cuts in sharply between driver.
your vehicle and the one in front.
151
Driving
This function is primarily suitable for driving on Activation/Deactivation (orange colour)

motorways and main roads. The system has a fault.
Conditions for operation The state of the system stays in the

memory when the ignition is switched off. If the driver no longer wishes to benefit from
- The adaptive cruise control must be active. the system for a while, they can deactivate it by
- The vehicle must be travelling in a traffic pressing the button again.
lane clearly delimited by lines on both sides. The indicator lamp in the button goes off and
- The ESC system must be operating. the symbol disappears from the instrument
- The ASR/DSC systems must not be panel.
deactivated.
- No trailer detected.
- A spare wheel of the "space-saver" type
Cruise control
must not be in use. The driver must hold the steering wheel
- The vehicle must not be subject to strong properly.
F With the adaptive cruise control activated, press this
lateral accelerations. When cruise control is activated, the symbol is
button.
- The direction indicators must not be displayed in green: by small steering actions,
The action is confirmed by:
activated. the system directs the vehicle and keeps it in
- Illumination of the indicator lamp in the button in green.
- Display of the following symbol in the instrument panel. the position chosen by the driver, in the traffic
lane.
The colour of the symbol depends on the The driver can feel movements in the steering
operating state of the system: wheel.
This position is not necessarily the centre of
(grey colour) the lane.
At least one of the operating The driver can change the position of the
conditions is not met, the system is vehicle at any time, by turning the steering
paused. wheel. When the driver feels that the vehicle's
position is appropriate, whilst keeping hands
(green colour) on the steering wheel, they must release the
All operating conditions are met, the pressure to let the system resume control of the
system is active. steering, but the vehicle is not centred within
the lane automatically.
152
Driving
Pausing/Suspension of the Automatic pausing: Driving situations and

- Triggering of the ESC.
system - Prolonged failure to detect one of the lane
associated alerts
limit markings. In this case, the active lane The tables below describe the displays
The driver must intervene as soon as departure warning function can take over, associated with the main driving situations. The
they believe that the traffic conditions or and the system will reactivate itself once the display of these alerts is not sequential.
the state of the road surface make this operating conditions are again met.
necessary, by moving the steering wheel
to suspend the system temporarily. Any On action by the driver: suspension
action at the brake pedal which results in - Activation of the direction indicators.
the cruise control being paused will also - Travelling outside the lane limits.
cause the system to be paused. - Too tight a grip on the steering wheel or
dynamic action on the steering wheel.
- Action on the brake pedal (pausing until the
cruise control is reactivated) or accelerator
If the system detects that the driver is pedal (suspension for as long as the pedal
not holding the wheel firmly enough, it is pressed).
triggers a series of gradual alerts and then - Pausing the cruise control.
6
deactivates itself if there is no reaction - Deactivation of the DSC/ASR systems.
from the driver.
After suspension due to the prolonged

release of the force holding the steering
wheel, you must reactivate the function by
pressing the button again.
153
Driving
Indicator lamp in Associated

Symbol Cruise control wheel Display Comments
the button message
Off - "OFF" - - None of the functions are activated.
Off - "CRUISE" "Cruise control The Active Lane Keeping Assist

paused" function is not activated, the cruise
(grey colour) control is paused.
Off - "CRUISE" "Cruise control on" The Active Lane Keeping Assist
function is not activated, the cruise
(green colour) control is active.
Green "CRUISE" "Cruise control The Highway Driver Assist operates

and Lane Keeping normally.
Assist function
(green colour) or active"
(green colour)
Green "CRUISE" "Cruise control The system has been paused
70 and Lane Keeping

Assist function
automatically or by driver action.
(grey colour) or paused"
70
(grey colour)
154
Driving
Indicator lamp in Associated

Symbol Cruise control wheel Display Comments
the button message
Green "OFF" - "Activate the cruise All operating conditions are met except
control to use the activation of the adaptive cruise control.
Lane Keeping
(grey colour) Assist function"
Green "CRUISE" "Unsuitable All conditions required for lateral

conditions – control have not been met.
Activation on
(grey colour) or stand-by"
(green colour)
6
Off - "CRUISE" "Hold the wheel" The driver is not holding the steering
wheel correctly and has not taken
notice of the warnings (messages
or and audible alarm): the Active Lane
Keeping Assist function is switched off.
(green colour)
Green "CRUISE" "Retake control" The cruise control can no longer
70 ensure lateral and longitudinal control:

the driver must retake control of the
(grey colour) or vehicle (acceleration or braking). The
alert is accompanied by an audible
70 signal.
(grey colour)
155
Driving
Operating limits The system must not be activated in the Malfunctions

following situations:
The Active Lane Keeping Assist system - Driving with a "space-saver" type A system malfunction is indicated
may issue an alert when the vehicle spare wheel. by the Service warning lamp
is travelling in a long straight lane on - When towing, especially with an coming on and this (orange) symbol,
a smooth road surface even if the driver is unconnected or unapproved trailer. accompanied by an alert message
holding the steering wheel properly. - Poor weather conditions. and an audible signal.
- Driving on slippery road surfaces (risk
of aquaplaning, snow, ice). (orange
- Driving on racing circuits. colour)
The system may fail to operate or may produce
unsuitable corrections to the steering in the - Driving on a rolling road.
- Poor visibility (insufficient road lighting, Active Safety Brake with
snowfall, rain, fog). Collision Risk Alert and
- Dazzle (headlamps of an oncoming vehicle,
low sun, reflections on a wet road surface,
Intelligent emergency
leaving a tunnel, alternating light and Recommendations on care braking assistance
shade).
- Regularly check that the front bumper and Refer to the General recommendations on
- Windscreen area in front of the camera
the area of the windscreen located in front the use of driving and manoeuvring aids.
being dirty, misted up, frost-covered, snow-
of the camera are clean.
covered, damaged or masked by a sticker.
- Regularly check that the windscreen wipers
- Lane markings eroded, partially hidden
are in good condition.
(snow, mud) or multiple (roadworks, surface
- In bad weather, or during the winter, ensure
joints).
that the front bumper and windscreen are
- Travelling in a tight bend.
not covered with mud, ice or snow. This system allows:
- Winding roads.
- Presence of a tarmac joint on the road. - the driver to be warned that their vehicle is
at risk of collision with the vehicle in front,
a pedestrian or, depending on version, a
cyclist,
- a collision to be prevented, or its severity to
be limited, by reducing the vehicle's speed.
156
Driving
In the following cases, deactivating the system

The system also takes motorcyclists and As soon as the system detects a potential
via the vehicle's configuration menu is advised:
animals into account; however, animals obstacle, it prepares the braking circuit in
- towing a trailer,
below 0.5 m tall and objects on the road case automatic braking is needed. This
- carrying long objects on roof bars or roof
are not necessarily detected. may cause a slight noise and a slight
rack,
sensation of deceleration.
- with snow chains fitted,
- before using an automatic car wash, with
This system is comprised of three functions: Deactivation/Activation the engine running,
- Collision Risk Alert, - before placing the vehicle on a rolling road
- Intelligent emergency braking assistance, By default, the system is automatically in a workshop,
- Active Safety Brake (automatic emergency activated at every engine start. - towed vehicle, engine running,
braking). - damaged front bumper (version with radar),
This system can be deactivated or
- following an impact to the windscreen close
activated via the Driving/Vehicle
to the detection camera.
menu of the touch screen.
Deactivation of the system is

signalled by the illumination of this The system is automatically deactivated
6
indicator lamp, accompanied by the after the use of certain "space-saver"
display of a message. type spare wheels is detected (smaller
diameter).
Operating conditions and The system is automatically deactivated
limits after detection of a fault with the brake
pedal switch or with at least two brake
The ESC system must not be faulty. lamps.
The DSC/ASR systems must not be
The vehicle has a multifunctional camera
deactivated.
located at the top of the windscreen, and,
All passenger seat belts must be fastened. It is possible that warnings are not given,
depending on version, a radar located in the
Driving at a steady speed on roads with few are given too late or seem unjustified.
front bumper.
bends is required. Consequently, always stay in control of
your vehicle and be prepared to react at
any time to avoid an accident.
157
Driving
After an impact, the function automatically

Operation Where the speed of your vehicle is too
stops operating. Contact a CITROËN Depending on the degree of risk of collision high when approaching another vehicle,
dealer or a qualified workshop to have the detected by the system and the alert threshold the level 2 alert may be displayed
system checked. chosen by the driver, several different levels immediately.
of alert may be triggered and displayed in the Important: the level 1 alert is never
instrument panel. displayed for a stationary obstacle or
They take account of the vehicle dynamics, the when the "Close" trigger threshold has
Collision Risk Alert speed of your vehicle and the one in front, the been selected.
It warns the driver if their vehicle is at risk of environmental conditions and the operation of
collision with the vehicle in front or a pedestrian the vehicle (cornering, actions on the pedals,
etc.) to trigger the alert at the best moment.
Intelligent emergency
present in their traffic lane.
braking assistance
Level 1 (orange): visual alert only, If the driver brakes, but not sufficiently to avoid
Modifying the alert trigger signalling to you that the vehicle in a collision, this system will supplement the
threshold front is very close. braking, within the limits of the laws of physics.
The "Vehicle close" message is This assistance will only be provided if you
This threshold determines how you wish displayed. press the brake pedal.
to be alerted of the presence of a moving
or stationary vehicle in front of you, or Level 2 (red): visual and audible
a pedestrian or cyclist present in your traffic alert, warning you that a collision is
lane. imminent.
The message "Brake!" is displayed.
The current threshold can be
modified via the Driving/Vehicle
Level 3: finally, in some cases, a
haptic alert in the form of micro-
braking can be given, confirming the
You can select one of three predefined
risk of collision.
thresholds:
- "Distant",
- "Normal",
- "Close".
The last threshold selected is memorised when
the ignition is switched off.
158
Driving
Active Safety Brake - The vehicle's speed does not exceed

Operation of the function may be felt by
50 mph (80 km/h) when a stationary vehicle
slight vibration in the brake pedal.
or a cyclist is detected.
If the vehicle comes to a complete stop,
- The vehicle's speed is above 6 mph
the automatic braking is maintained for
(10 km/h) (versions with camera and radar)
1 to 2 seconds.
or between 6 mph and 53 mph (10 km/h and
85 km/h) (versions with camera alone) when
a moving vehicle is detected.
If the camera and/or radar have

confirmed the presence of a vehicle, Malfunction
a pedestrian or a cyclist, this
warning lamp flashes (for about In the event of a fault with the
10 seconds) when the function is system, you are alerted by the
acting on the vehicle's brakes. continuous illumination of this
warning lamp, accompanied by the
With an automatic gearbox, in the event of display of a message and an audible
signal.
6
automatic emergency braking until the vehicle
This function, also called automatic emergency comes to a complete stop, keep the brake Contact a CITROËN dealer or
braking, intervenes following the alert if the pedal pressed down to prevent the vehicle from a qualified workshop to have the
driver does not react quickly enough and does starting off again. system checked.
not operate the vehicle's brakes. With a manual gearbox, in the event of
It aims to reduce the speed of impact or avoid
a frontal collision by your vehicle where the
automatic emergency braking until the vehicle Fatigue detection system
comes to a complete stop, the engine may stall.
driver fails to react. Refer to the General recommendations on
The driver can control the vehicle at any
Operation time by making a deliberate movement Take a break as soon as you feel tired or at
of the steering wheel and/or pressing the least every two hours.
The system operates under the following
accelerator pedal. The function comprises the "Coffee Break
conditions:
Alert" system combined with the "Driver
- The vehicle's speed does not exceed
Attention Alert" system.
37 mph (60 km/h) when a pedestrian is
detected.
159
Driving
Activation/Deactivation As soon as the speed of the vehicle drops

When the system interprets the behaviour of
the vehicle as indicating a certain fatigue or
below 40 mph (65 km/h), the system goes
These functions are activated and inattention threshold on the part of the driver, it
into standby.
deactivated in the Driving/Vehicle triggers the first level of alert.
The driving time is counted again once the
menu of the touch screen. The driver is then alerted by the message
speed is above 40 mph (65 km/h).
"Take care!", accompanied by an audible
signal.
when the ignition is switched off.
After three first level alerts, the system triggers
a new alert with the message "Driving at
Driver Attention Alert risk: take a break", accompanied by a more
Coffee Break Alert pronounced audible signal.
The system triggers an alert once it
detects that the driver has not taken
a break after two hours of driving at In certain driving conditions (poor road
a speed above 40 mph (65 km/h). surface or strong winds), the system may
give alerts independent of the driver's
This alert is issued via the display of
level of vigilance.
a message encouraging you to take a break,
accompanied by an audible signal.
If the driver does not follow this advice, the
alert is repeated hourly until the vehicle is
stopped.
The system resets itself if one of the following Using a camera placed at the top
conditions is met: of the windscreen, the system
- engine running, the vehicle has been assesses the driver's level of
stationary for more than 15 minutes, vigilance by identifying variations
- the ignition has been switched off for a few in trajectory compared to the lane
minutes, markings.
- the driver's seat belt is unfastened and their
This system is particularly suited to main roads
door is open.
(speed higher than 40 mph (65 km/h)).
160
Driving
The following situations may interfere with

Using a camera located at the top of the Operation
windscreen to identify lane markings on the
the operation of the system or prevent it
road and at the edges of the road (depending Once the system identifies a risk of the vehicle
from working:
on version), the system corrects the trajectory involuntarily crossing one of the lane markings
- poor visibility (inadequate lighting of
of the vehicle while alerting the driver if it detected, it makes the correction to the
the road, falling snow, heavy rain,
detects a risk of unintentionally crossing a line trajectory required to return the vehicle to its
dense fog, etc.),
or hard shoulder (depending on version). initial path.
- dazzle (headlamps of an oncoming
This system is particularly useful on motorways The driver will notice a turning movement of the
vehicle, low sun, reflections on a damp
and main roads. steering wheel.
road, leaving a tunnel, alternating
shade and light, etc.), This warning lamp flashes during
- windscreen area located in front of the trajectory correction.
camera: dirty, misted up, frost-covered,
snow-covered, damaged or covered by
a sticker, The driver can prevent the correction by
- lane markings absent, worn, hidden keeping a firm grip on the wheel (during
(snow, mud) or multiple (roadworks, an avoiding manoeuvre, for example).
etc.),
Conditions for operation The correction is interrupted if the
6
- close to the vehicle ahead (lane The speed of the vehicle must be between direction indicators are operated.
markings not detected), 40 and 112 mph (65 and 180 km/h).
- roads that are narrow, winding, etc. The driver must hold the wheel with both
hands.
The change of trajectory must not be
accompanied by operation of the direction
If the system detects that the driver is not
indicators.
holding the wheel firmly enough during
The ESC system must not be faulty.
Active Lane Departure The ASR/DSC systems must be activated.
an automatic correction of trajectory,
it interrupts the correction. An alert is
Warning System triggered to encourage the driver to take
The system helps the driver only when back control of the vehicle.
Refer to the General recommendations on
there is a risk of the vehicle involuntarily
wandering from the lane it is being driven
in. It does not manage the safe driving
distance, the speed of the vehicle or the
brakes.
161
Driving
Display and/
Status of the Indicator
or associated Comments
function lamp
message
OFF System deactivated.
(grey)
While the direction indicators are on and for
a few seconds after switching them off, the ON System active, conditions not met:
system considers that any change of trajectory - speed below 40 mph (65 km/h),
is voluntary and no correction is triggered - no lane marking recognised,
during this period. - ASR/DSC systems deactivated
However, with the Blind Spot Monitoring system (grey) or regulation by ESC system in
activated, if the driver starts changing lanes progress,
and another vehicle is detected in the vehicle's - "sporty" driving.
blind spot, the system will correct the trajectory
of the vehicle even though the direction
indicators are on. ON Automatic deactivation/standby of the
For more information on the Blind Spot system (e.g. detection of a trailer, use of
Monitoring system, refer to the corresponding the "space-saver" spare wheel provided
section. with the vehicle).
(grey)
Driving situations and
associated alerts
The table below describes the alerts and
messages displayed depending on the driving
situations.
The display of these alerts is not sequential.
162
Driving
Status of the Indicator

Display and/ Operating limits
or associated Comments
function lamp
message The system goes into standby automatically in
ON Detection of lane markings. the following cases:
Speed above 40 mph (65 km/h). - ASR/DSC systems deactivated or regulation
by ESC system in progress,
- speed below 40 mph (65 km/h) or greater
(green) than 112 mph (180 km/h),
- connected electrically to a trailer,
- use of a "space-saver" spare
ON The system corrects the trajectory on
wheel detected (as detection is not
the side where the risk of involuntary
immediate, deactivation of the system is
crossing is detected (orange line).
recommended),
- dynamic driving style detected, pressure on
(orange)/(green)
the brake or accelerator pedal,
- driving where there are no lane markings,
ON - If, during correction, the system - activation of the direction indicators,
6
detects that the driver has not held - crossing the inside line on a bend,
the steering wheel for a few seconds, - driving in a tight corner,
it interrupts the correction and returns - inactivity by the driver detected during
(orange)/(green) control to the driver. correction.
"Take back control - During correction of the trajectory,
of the vehicle." if the system determines that the
correction will not be enough and
that a solid line is crossed (orange
line): the driver is warned that they
must complete the correction of the
trajectory.
163
Driving
The following situations may interfere with

The system is not intended for driving in the Malfunction
the operation of the system or prevent it
- driving on a speed circuit,
from working:
- driving with a trailer,
- conditions of poor visibility (inadequate
- driving on a rolling stand,
street lighting, snowfall, rain, fog),
- driving on unstable surfaces.
- dazzle (headlamps of an oncoming
vehicle, low sun, reflections on a damp In the event of a fault with the system, you are
road, leaving a tunnel, alternating Deactivation/Activation alerted by the illumination of these warning
shade and light), lamps in the instrument panel, accompanied by
The system is activated every time the ignition
- windscreen area located in front of the the display of a message and an audible signal.
is switched on.
camera: dirty, misted, frost-covered, Have the system checked by a CITROËN
snow-covered, damaged or covered by dealer or a qualified workshop.
a sticker,
- lane markings worn, hidden (snow,
mud) or multiple (roadworks, etc.),
- running close to the vehicle in front Active Blind Spot
(the lane markings may not be Monitoring System
detected),
- roads that are narrow, winding, Refer to the General recommendations on
- insufficient contrast (shade, for F To deactivate the system, press this button. the use of driving and manoeuvring aids.
example) between the road and the
edges of the road. Deactivation is signalled by the
lighting of the indicator lamp in
the button and this warning lamp on
Risk of undesirable operation the instrument panel.
Deactivation of the system is recommended in Reactivation is by another press, the indicator

the following situations: lamp in the button and the warning lamp switch
- driving on a road surface in poor condition, off.
- unfavourable climatic conditions,
- driving on slippery surfaces (ice).
164
Driving
This system warns the driver of the presence The alert is given by an orange warning lamp
This driving aid system is designed to
of another vehicle in the blind spots of their coming on in the relevant door mirror, as soon
improve safety when driving and is in no
vehicle (areas hidden from the driver's field as a vehicle – car, lorry, bicycle – is detected.
circumstances a substitute for the use
of vision), as soon as this presents a potential A correction of trajectory will be felt if you
of the interior rear view mirror and door
danger. attempt to cross a lane marking with the
mirrors. It is the driver's responsibility to
direction indicator flashing.
constantly check the traffic, to assess the
The following conditions must be met for this:
relative distances and speeds of other
- all vehicles are moving in the same direction
vehicles and to anticipate their movements
and in adjacent lanes,
before deciding whether to change lane.
- the speed of the vehicle must be between
7 and 87 mph (12 and 140 km/h) for the
alert and between 40 and 87 mph (65 and
Activation/Deactivation 140 km/h) for a correction of trajectory,
- the system must be activated to trigger
A fixed warning lamp appears in the door mirror The function is activated and a change of trajectory,
on the side in question: deactivated in the Driving/Vehicle - you overtake a vehicle with a speed
- immediately, when being overtaken, menu of the touch screen. difference of less than 6 mph (10 km/h),
- after a delay of about one second, when - a vehicle overtakes you with a speed
6
overtaking a vehicle slowly. The state of the system stays in the memory difference of less than 16 mph (25 km/h),
when switching off the ignition. - the traffic is flowing normally,
In addition to the fixed warning lamp in the door
mirror on the side in question, a correction of - overtaking a vehicle over a certain period
trajectory will be felt if you attempt to cross of time and the vehicle being overtaken
a lane marking with the direction indicator The system is automatically deactivated remains in the blind spot,
activated, to help you avoid a collision. when towing with a towing device - you are driving on a straight or slightly
approved by CITROËN. curved road,
- your vehicle is not towing a trailer, a
caravan, etc.
Operation
Sensors fitted in the front and rear bumpers
monitor the blind spots.
165
Driving
- in the presence of non-moving objects

The system may suffer temporary
(parked vehicles, barriers, street lamps,
interference in certain weather conditions
road signs, etc.),
(rain, hail, etc.).
- with vehicles moving in the opposite
In particular, driving on a wet surface
direction,
or moving from a dry area to a wet area
- driving on a winding road or a sharp corner,
can cause false alerts (for example,
- when overtaking or being overtaken by
the presence of a fog of water droplets
a very long vehicle (lorry, bus, etc.) which is
in the blind spot angle is interpreted as
both in the rear blind spot and present in the
a vehicle).
driver's front field of vision,
In bad or wintry weather, ensure that the
- when overtaking quickly,
sensors are not covered by mud, ice or
- in very heavy traffic: vehicles detected in
snow.
front and behind are confused with a lorry or
Take care not to cover the warning zone in
a stationary object,
the door mirrors or the detection zones on
- if the Park Assist function is activated.
the front and rear bumpers with adhesive
labels or other objects; they may hamper
the correct operation of the system.
Malfunction
The system is automatically deactivated
when towing with a towing device
approved by CITROËN.
If a fault occurs, this warning lamp comes on
in the instrument panel, accompanied by the
No alert will be given and no correction will be display of a message.
made in the following situations: Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop to have the system checked.
166
Driving
Parking sensors Audible assistance Visual assistance

The function signals the presence of obstacles

present within the vehicle sensors' detection It supplements the audible signal by displaying
zone. bars on the screen that move progressively
nearer to the vehicle (white: more distant
The proximity information is given by an
obstacles; orange: close obstacles; red: very
intermittent audible signal, the frequency of which
close obstacles).
increases as the vehicle approaches the obstacle.
When the obstacle is very close, the "Danger"
When the distance between the vehicle and
symbol is displayed on the screen.
the obstacle becomes less than about thirty
Using sensors located in the bumper, this
centimetres, the audible signal becomes
6
function warns of the proximity of obstacles
(e.g. pedestrian, vehicle, tree, barrier) entering
continuous. Front parking sensors
The sound emitted by the speaker (right or left)
their field of detection. In addition to the rear parking sensors, the
allows you to identify the side on which the
obstacle is located. front parking sensors are triggered when an
Rear parking sensors obstacle is detected in front and the speed of
the vehicle is still below 6 mph (10 km/h).
Adjusting the audible signal
The system is switched on by engaging reverse The front parking sensors are interrupted if
gear. On versions equipped with the vehicle stops for more than three seconds
This is confirmed by an audible signal. CITROËN Connect Radio, pressing in forward gear, if an obstacle is no longer
The system is switched off when you come out this button opens the audible signal detected or when the speed of the vehicle
of reverse gear. volume adjustment window. exceeds 6 mph (10 km/h).
167
Driving
The sound emitted by the speaker (front or

The parking sensors are deactivated while the
Park Assist system is measuring a space.
Top Rear Vision – Top
rear) locates the obstacle in relation to the
vehicle, in front or behind.
For more information on the Park Assist, refer 360 Vision
Deactivation/Activation Operating limits

The function is deactivated and The tilting of the vehicle if the boot is very
activated in the Driving/Vehicle loaded can affect the distance measurements.

when the ignition is switched off. Malfunction
If a malfunction occurs, when
shifting to reverse, one of these
warning lamps comes on in the
instrument panel, accompanied by
With the engine running, these systems allow
the display of a message and an
views of your vehicle's close surroundings to
audible signal (short beep).
be displayed on the touch screen using one
If the malfunction occurs while the
camera for Top Rear Vision and two cameras
parking sensors are being used, it
for Top 360 Vision.
causes the function to deactivate.
The rear parking sensors system will
be deactivated automatically if a trailer Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
or bicycle carrier is connected to workshop to have the system checked.
a towing device installed in line with the
manufacturer's recommendations.
In this case, the outline of a trailer is
displayed at the rear of the image of the
vehicle.
168
Driving
F Press the button in the bottom left-hand This image is automatically deleted if the
corner of the touch screen. vehicle remains stationary for too long.
F Select the type of view:
With Top 360 Vision, the image is created using
• "Standard view".
both cameras, when going forward and when
• "180° view",
reversing.
• "Zoom view",
When the function is activated, it is possible
• "AUTO view".
that the view from above is not displayed. If
The display is immediately updated with the
the system is activated when the vehicle has
type of view selected.
already moved, the view from above can be
The state of the function is not saved when the fully displayed.
ignition is switched off.
Principle of operation Top Rear Vision

The screen is divided into two parts: on the
left, a contextual view; on the right, a view from Rear vision
above the vehicle in its close surroundings.
The parking sensors supplement the
6
information on the view from above the vehicle.
Different contextual views can be displayed in

the left-hand part:
- standard view,
- 180° view,
- zoom view. Using one or two cameras, the close
AUTO mode is activated by default. surroundings of the vehicle are recorded whilst
In this mode, the system chooses the best view manoeuvring at low speed.
to display (standard or zoom) according to the An image from above your vehicle in its close To activate the camera, located near the
information from the parking sensors. surroundings is reconstructed (represented number plate lamps, engage reverse and keep
You can change the type of view at any time between the blue brackets) in real time and as the speed of the vehicle below 6 mph (10 km/h).
during a manoeuvre. the manoeuvre progresses. The system is deactivated:
This representation facilitates the alignment of - automatically above about 6 mph (10 km/h),
your vehicle when parking and allows obstacles - automatically on opening the tailgate,
close to the vehicle to be seen.
169
Driving
- when shifting out of reverse (the image Zoom view AUTO mode
remains displayed for 7 seconds),
- by pressing the white arrow in the top left-
hand corner of the touch screen.
Standard view
This mode is activated by default.

The camera records the vehicle's surroundings
Using sensors in the rear bumper, the
during the manoeuvre in order to create
automatic view changes from a rear view
a view from above the rear of the vehicle in its
(standard) to a view from above (zoom), as an
near surroundings, allowing the vehicle to be
obstacle is approached at the level of the red
manoeuvred around obstacles nearby.
line (less than 30 cm) during a manoeuvre.
This view is available with AUTO mode or in the
The area behind the vehicle is displayed on the
view selection menu.
screen.
The blue lines 1 represent the width of your
vehicle, with the mirrors unfolded; their
direction changes depending on the position of Obstacles may appear further away than
the steering wheel. they actually are.
The red line 2 represents a distance of 30 cm It is important to check the sides of the
from the bumper; the two blue lines 3 and vehicle during the manoeuvre, using the
4 represent 1 m and 2 m, respectively. mirrors.
This view is available with AUTO mode or in the The rear parking sensors also supplement
view selection menu. the information on the vehicle's
surroundings.
170
Driving
180° view Top 360 Vision - when shifting out of reverse (the rear view
image is replaced by the front view image
The vehicle has a camera at the front, fitted after 7 seconds),
in the grille, and a camera at the rear, located - by pressing the white arrow in the top left-
close to the number plate lamps. hand corner of the touch screen.
Using these cameras, the system displays
the vehicle's near surroundings on the touch
If a trailer or a bicycle carrier is fitted to
screen, offering views from the rear of the
the towball, the area behind the vehicle on
vehicle (rear vision), when reverse gear is
the view from above goes dark.
engaged and views from the front of the vehicle
The surroundings are reconstructed by the
(front vision), when the gearbox is in neutral or
front camera only.
a gear is engaged.
The rear vision views are similar to those for

Rear vision the Top Rear Vision.
For more information on the Top Rear Vision,
6
The 180° view facilitates reversing out of
a parking bay, making it possible to see the
approach of vehicles, pedestrians and cyclists.
This view is not recommended for carrying out Front and rear vision
a complete manoeuvre.
It consists of 3 areas: left A, centre B and
right C.
This view is available only from the view
selection menu.
The system activates automatically when

reverse gear is engaged.
The system is deactivated:
- automatically above about 6 mph (10 km/h),
171
Driving
With the engine running and the The blue lines 1 represent the width of your
Obstacles may appear further away than
speed below 12 mph (20 km/h), the vehicle, with the mirrors unfolded; their
they actually are.
system is activated via the Driving/ direction changes depending on the position of
It is important to check the sides of the
Vehicle menu of the touch screen: the steering wheel.
vehicle during the manoeuvre, using the
The red line 2 represents a distance of 30 cm
F Select "Panoramic visual aid". mirrors.
from the front bumper; the two blue lines 3 and
AUTO mode is displayed by default, with front The front and rear parking sensors also
4 represent 1 m and 2 m, respectively.
vision, if the gearbox is in neutral or with a gear provide information on the vehicle's
engaged, or with rear vision, if reverse is surroundings.
engaged.
The system is deactivated:

- automatically above about 19 mph (30 km/h)
Zoom view AUTO mode
(the image disappears temporarily from
12 mph (20 km/h)),
- by pressing the white arrow in the top left-
hand corner of the touch screen.
Standard view This mode is activated by default.

Using sensors in the front bumper, the
automatic view changes from the front view
(standard) to the view from above (zoom) as an
obstacle is approached during a manoeuvre.
The camera records the vehicle's surroundings
during the manoeuvre in order to create
a view from above the front of the vehicle in its
near surroundings, allowing the vehicle to be
manoeuvred around obstacles nearby.
The area in front of your vehicle is displayed in

the screen.
172
Driving
180° view Park Assist

This system provides active assistance with

parking: it detects a parking space then
operates the steering system to park in this
space.
The Park Assist system provides assistance for
With manual and automatic gearboxes, the
the following manoeuvres:
driver manages the accelerator, brakes and
forward and reverse gear engagement. A. Entry into a parallel parking space.
During phases of entry into and exit from B. Exit from a parallel parking space.
a parking space, the system provides visual C. Entry into a bay parking space.
and audible information to the driver in order
to make the manoeuvres safe. Several forward
and reverse manoeuvres may be required. During manoeuvring phases, the steering
wheel performs rapid turns: do not hold
6
At any time, the driver can take back control by
The 180° view assists with exiting from the steering wheel, do not put your hands
holding the steering wheel.
a parking bay in forward gear, making it between the spokes of the steering wheel.
possible to see the approach of vehicles, Watch out for any object that could
pedestrians and cyclists. interfere with the manoeuvre (loose
This view is not recommended for carrying out clothing, scarves, ties, etc.) – risk of injury!
a complete manoeuvre. In some circumstances, the sensors may
It consists of 3 areas: left A, centre B and not detect small obstacles located in their
right C. blind spots.
This view is available only from the view When Park Assist is activated, it prevents
selection menu. entry into STOP mode of Stop & Start.
The Park Assist system cannot work with In STOP mode, activation of Park Assist
the engine off. restarts the engine.
173
Driving
The Park Assist system takes control The parking sensors function is Operation
of the power steering for a maximum of not available during parking space
4 manoeuvring cycles. The function is measurement. It intervenes later when
Assistance with parallel parking
deactivated after these 4 cycles. If you manoeuvring to warn you that your vehicle
manoeuvres
think that your vehicle is not positioned is approaching an obstacle: the audible F When you wish to park, select
correctly, you should then take over the signal becomes continuous when the "Park Assist" in the Vehicle/
steering to finish the manoeuvre. obstacle is less than thirty centimetres Driving menu of the touch
away. screen to activate the function.
If you have deactivated the parking
The sequence of manoeuvres and the sensors, they are automatically
driving instructions are displayed on the reactivated during assisted parking With a digital instrument panel,
touch screen. manoeuvres. this indicator lamp comes on in the
instrument panel to confirm the
The assistance is activated: activation of the function.
the display of this symbol and
a speed limit indicate that
the steering manoeuvres are Activation of Park Assist deactivates the
controlled by the system: do not Blind Spot Monitoring system.
touch the steering wheel.
During parking and exit from parking

The assistance is deactivated:
manoeuvres, the Top Rear Vision – Top
the display of this symbol
360 Vision functions may come into
indicates that the steering
operation. They allow better monitoring
manoeuvres are no longer
of the surroundings of the vehicle, by
controlled by the system: you F Limit the speed of the vehicle to a maximum
displaying additional information in the
must take over the steering. of 12 mph (20 km/h) and select "Enter
touch screen.
parallel parking space" on the screen.
For more information on the Top Rear
Vision – Top 360 Vision functions, refer
to the corresponding section. To enter a parking space, the system does
You should always check the surroundings
not identify spaces that are clearly smaller
of your vehicle before starting
or larger than the vehicle.
a manoeuvre.
174
Driving
F Operate the direction indicator on the F Move forwards slowly until a message is F The assisted parking manoeuvre is in
parking side chosen to activate the displayed, accompanied by an audible progress.
measurement function. You should drive at signal, asking you to engage reverse gear. Without exceeding 4 mph (7 km/h), move
a distance of between 0.5 m and 1.5 m from forwards and backwards, aided by the
the row of parked vehicles. warnings from the "Parking sensors"
system, until the end of the manoeuvre is
indicated.
6
F Select reverse, release the steering wheel
F Drive slowly following the instructions until and start moving without exceeding 4 mph
the system finds a free space. (7 km/h).
F At the end of the manoeuvre, the indicator
lamp in the instrument panel goes off,
accompanied by a message and an audible
signal.
The assistance is deactivated: you can take
over control again.
175
Driving
Assistance in exiting from in the instrument panel goes off, accompanied

a parallel parking space by a message and an audible signal.
The assistance is deactivated: you can take
F When you want to leave a parallel parking over control again.
space, start the engine.
Assistance with bay parking
F With the vehicle stationary,
manoeuvres
select "Park Assist" in the F When you wish to park, select
Vehicle/Driving menu of the "Park Assist" in the Vehicle/
touch screen to activate the Driving menu of the touch
function. F The assisted parking manoeuvre is in
screen to activate the function.
progress. Without exceeding 3 mph
(5 km/h), move forwards and backwards,
With a digital instrument panel,
aided by the warnings from the "Parking
this indicator lamp comes on in the With a digital instrument panel,
sensors" system, until the end of the
instrument panel to confirm the this indicator lamp comes on in the
manoeuvre is indicated.
activation of the function. instrument panel to confirm the
activation of the function.
F Press "Exit parking space" on the screen.
F Limit the speed of the vehicle to a maximum
of 12 mph (20 km/h) and select "Enter bay
parking space" on the screen.
The manoeuvre is complete when the vehicle's

F Operate the direction indicator for the exit front wheels are clear of the parking space.
side chosen. At the end of the manoeuvre, the indicator lamp
F Engage reverse or forward gear and release
the steering wheel.
176
Driving
F Operate the direction indicator on the

parking side chosen to activate the
measurement function. You should drive at
a distance of between 0.5 m and 1.5 m from
the row of parked vehicles.
F Move forwards slowly until a message is F The assisted parking manoeuvre is in

displayed, accompanied by an audible progress.
signal, asking you to engage reverse gear. Without exceeding 4 mph (7 km/h), follow
the instructions displayed in the instrument
panel, aided by the warnings from the
"Parking sensors" system, until the end of
F Drive slowly following the instructions until the manoeuvre is indicated.
6
the system finds a free space.
At the end of the manoeuvre, the indicator lamp
in the instrument panel goes off, accompanied
by a message and an audible signal.
When several successive bays are found, The assistance is deactivated: you can take
the vehicle will be directed towards the over control again.
last one.
During a bay parking manoeuvre, the Park

F Select reverse, release the steering wheel
Assist system is automatically deactivated
and start moving without exceeding 4 mph
once the rear of the vehicle is within 50 cm
(7 km/h).
of an obstacle.
177
Driving
Deactivation Deactivation You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.

The system is deactivated by pressing the The system is switched off automatically: workshop.
control. - when towing a trailer, connected electrically,
The system is deactivated automatically: - if the driver's door is opened,
- on switching off the ignition, - if the speed of the vehicle is above 43 mph
- if the engine stalls, (70 km/h).
- If the driver's seat belt is not fastened, To switch the system off for a prolonged period,
- if no manoeuvre is performed within contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
5 minutes of selecting the type of workshop.
manoeuvre,
- after a prolonged stop of the vehicle during
a manoeuvre,
- if the wheel anti-slip regulation (ASR) is Malfunctions
triggered,
- if the speed of the vehicle exceeds the When the function is not activated,
stated limit, this warning lamp temporarily
- when the driver interrupts movement of the flashing (vehicle with digital
steering wheel, instrument panel) and/or an audible
- after 4 manoeuvre cycles, signal indicate a system malfunction.
- on opening the driver's door,
- if one of the front wheels encounters an If the fault occurs during the use of the system,
obstacle. the warning lamp goes off.
The indicator lamp in the instrument panel goes
off and a message is displayed, accompanied In the event of a fault, have the system checked
by an audible signal. by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
The driver should then take back the vehicle's
steering.
In the event of a fault with the
power steering, this warning lamp
If the system is deactivated during is displayed in the instrument
a manoeuvre, the driver should reactivate panel, accompanied by a warning
it to repeat the measurement. message.
178
FILL UP WITH
CONFIDENCE
WITH TOTAL QUARTZ
LUBRICANTS For more than 45 years, TOTAL
and CITROËN have shared common
values: excellence, creativity and
technological innovation.
It is in this same spirit that TOTAL
has developed a range of TOTAL
QUARTZ lubricants adapted to
CITROËN engines, making them even
more fuel efficient and protective of
the environment.
TOTAL and CITROËN test the
reliability and the performance of their
products during motorsport races in
extreme conditions.
Choose TOTAL QUARTZ lubricants
to maintain your vehicle, this is your
assurance of optimum durability
and performance from your engine.
Practical information
Fuel tank entirely normal and results from the sealing of

the fuel system.
Your vehicle is fitted with a catalytic converter,
a device which helps to reduce the level of
Capacity of the tank: Approximately To refuel in complete safety: harmful emissions in the exhaust gases.
53 litres. F You must switch off the engine. For petrol engines, you must use unleaded
fuel.
Low fuel level The filler neck is narrower, admitting unleaded
When the level in the tank becomes petrol nozzles only.
low, this warning lamp comes on in
the instrument panel, accompanied
1 by the display of a message and an
If your vehicle is fitted with Stop & Start,
1 /2
audible signal. When it first comes
never refuel with the engine in STOP
on, there remains about 6 litres of
mode; you must switch off the ignition.
fuel in the tank.
Until sufficient fuel is added, this warning lamp
reappears every time the ignition is switched F With the vehicle unlocked, press the rear-
on, accompanied by the message and the central part of the filler flap to open it.
audible signal. When driving, this message F Take care to select the pump that delivers Misfuel prevention (Diesel)
and audible signal are repeated with increasing the correct fuel type for your vehicle's
engine (see a reminder label on the inside (Depending on country of sale.)
frequency as the fuel level drops towards 0. Mechanical device which prevents filling the
You must refuel as soon as possible to avoid of the filler flap).
F Turn the filler cap to the left. tank of a Diesel vehicle with petrol.
running out of fuel.
For more information on Running out of fuel F Remove the filler cap and hang it on its
(Diesel), refer to the corresponding section. carrier (on the filler flap).
F Introduce the filler nozzle and push it in as
far as possible before starting to refuel (risk Operation
Refuelling of blowback).
F Fill the tank. Do not continue past the
Fuel top-ups must be of at least 5 litres in order
third cut-off of the nozzle, as this may
to be registered by the fuel gauge.
cause malfunctions.
Opening the filler cap may create a noise
F Refit the filler cap.
caused by an inrush of air. This vacuum is
F Turn it to the right.
F Push the filler flap to close it.
180
When a petrol filler nozzle is introduced into

the fuel filler neck of a Diesel vehicle, it comes
Compatibility of fuels The only fuel additives authorised for use
are those that meet the B715001 (petrol)
into contact with the flap. The system remains
or B715000 (Diesel) standards.
closed and prevents filling.
Do not persist but introduce a Diesel type
filler nozzle.
Petrol fuels conforming to the EN228 standard
Diesel at low temperature
containing up to 5% and 10% ethanol At temperatures below 0°C (+32 °F), the
It remains possible to use a fuel can to fill
respectively. formation of paraffins in summer-type Diesel
the tank.
fuels could prevent the engine from operating
correctly. In these temperature conditions, use
winter-type Diesel fuel and keep the fuel tank
more than 50% full.
Travelling abroad
Diesel fuels conforming to the EN590, At temperatures below -15°C (+5 °F) to avoid
As Diesel fuel pump nozzles may be
EN16734 and EN16709 standards respectively problems starting, it is best to park the vehicle
different in other countries, the presence
and containing up to 7%, 10%, 20% and 30% under shelter (heated garage).
of the misfuel prevention device may make
fatty acid methyl ester respectively. The use of
refuelling impossible.
B20 or B30 fuels, even occasionally, imposes
Not all Diesel vehicles are fitted with
misfuel protection, so before travelling
special maintenance conditions referred to as Travelling abroad
"Arduous conditions".
abroad, we recommend that you check Certain fuels could damage your vehicle's
with a CITROËN dealer whether your engine.
7
vehicle is suitable for the fuel pumps in the In certain countries, the use of a particular
country in which you intend to travel. fuel may be required (specific octane
rating, specific trade name, etc.) to ensure
Paraffinic Diesel fuel conforming to the
correct operation of the engine.
EN15940 standard.
For all additional information, consult a dealer.
The use of any other type of (bio) fuel

(vegetable or animal oils, pure or diluted,
domestic fuel, etc.) is strictly prohibited
(risk of damage to the engine and fuel
system).
181
Towing device Use towing devices and their genuine Observe the maximum authorised towable
harnesses approved by CITROËN. It weight, indicated on your vehicle's
Load distribution
is recommended that the installation registration certificate, the manufacturer's
F Distribute the load in the trailer so that the
be performed by a CITROËN dealer or label as well as in the Technical data
heaviest items are as close as possible to
a qualified workshop. section of this guide.
the axle and the nose weight approaches the
If the towing device is not fitted by Complying with the maximum
maximum permitted without exceeding it.
a CITROËN dealer, it must still be authorised nose weight (towball)
Air density decreases with altitude, thus
fitted in accordance with the vehicle also includes the use of accessories
reducing engine performance. The maximum
manufacturer's instructions. (bicycle carriers, tow boxes, etc.).
towed load must be reduced by 10% for every
Important: for versions equipped with
1,000 metres of altitude.
the motorised tailgate with Hands-Free
Tailgate Access function, if a towing
device other than a genuine CITROËN
one is installed, it is essential to visit Observe the legislation in force in the
a CITROËN dealer or a qualified country in which you are driving.
workshop to recalibrate the detection
system: risk of "Hands-Free Tailgate
Access" function failure. Vehicle equipped with motorised tailgate
Certain driving or manoeuvring aid with "Hands-Free Tailgate Access"
functions are automatically disabled if an function
approved towing system is used. To avoid unwanted opening of the tailgate
when using the towing device:
- deactivate the "Hands-Free Tailgate
Access" function in advance in your
vehicle's configuration menu,
- or remove the electronic key from the
recognition zone, with the tailgate closed.
182
Towing device with Before each use

quickly detachable towball Check that the towball is correctly fitted,
verifying the follow points:
Presentation - the green mark on the wheel is in line
with the green mark on the towball,
- the wheel is in contact with the towball
(position A),
- the security key lock is closed and the
key removed; the wheel can no longer
be operated,
- the towball must not be able to move in
A. Locked position (the green marks are
its carrier; test by shaking it with your
opposite each other); the wheel is in
hand.
contact with the towball (no gap).
If the towball is not locked, the trailer can
B. Unlocked position (red mark opposite detach – accident risk!
the green mark); the wheel is no longer
in contact with the towball (gap of around
1. Carrier.
5 mm).
2. Protective plug.
3. Connection socket.
4. Safety eye.
7
5. Detachable towball. Trailers with LED lamps are not
compatible with the wiring harness of this
6. Locking/unlocking wheel.
device.
7. Security key lock.
8. Key reference label.
To know the Technical data, and in
particular the towable weights for your
vehicle, refer to the corresponding section.
To ensure complete safety while driving
with a Towing device, refer to the
183
During use Fitting the towball F The wheel 6 turns a quarter of a turn anti-
clockwise; take care to keep your hands
Never release the locking system with
clear!
a trailer or load carrier on the towball.
Never exceed the maximum authorised
weight for the vehicle – the Gross Train
Weight or GTW.
It is essential that the maximum
authorised load be complied with on the
towing device: if it is exceeded, this device
may detach from the vehicle, which is
a serious accident risk.
Check that the trailer lamps work
correctly.
Before setting off, check the adjustment of F Below the rear bumper, remove the
the headlamp beam height. protective plug 2 from the carrier 1.
For more information on Headlamp
adjustment, refer to the corresponding F Insert the end of the towball 5 into the F Check that the mechanism has correctly
section. carrier 1 and push it upwards; the locking locked into place (position A).
will take place automatically. F Close the lock 7 using the key.
F Always remove the key. The key cannot be
removed when the lock is open.
After use F Clip the cap onto the lock.
When travelling without a trailer or load
carrier, the towball must be removed and
the protective plug inserted in the carrier
for good visibility of the number plate and
its lighting.
184
F Remove the protective cover from the

towball.
F Attach the trailer to the towball.
F Attach the cable on the trailer to the safety
eye 4 on the carrier.
F Lower the connection socket 3 to put it in
position.
F Insert the trailer plug and give it a quarter
turn to connect it to the connection socket
3 of the carrier.
F Insert the key into the lock 7. F Refit the protective plug 2 to the carrier 1.
Removing the towball F Open the lock using the key. F Carefully stow the towball in its bag away
from knocks and dirt.
F Give a quarter turn to and pull the trailer
plug to disconnect it from the connection
socket 3 of the carrier.
F Raise the connection socket 3 to the right Maintenance
again to stow it away.
Correct operation is only possible if the towball
F Detach the cable on the trailer from the
and its carrier are kept clean.
safety eye 4 on the carrier.
Before cleaning the vehicle with a high-
F Detach the trailer from the towball.
7
pressure jet wash, the towball must be removed
F Refit the protective cover to the towball.
and the protective plug fitted to the carrier.
F Remove the cap from the lock and press it
onto the head of the key.
Apply the label provided to a clearly visible
F Hold the towball 5 firmly in one hand; using
area, close to the carrier or in the boot.
the other hand, pull and turn the wheel
Go to a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
6 fully in a clockwise direction; do not
workshop for any work on the towbar
release the wheel.
system.
F Extract the towball from the bottom of its
carrier 1.
F Release the wheel; this automatically stops
in the unlocked position (position B).
185
Energy economy mode - for more than 10 minutes, to use the

equipment for approximately 30 minutes.
Snow chains
System which manages the duration of use of Let the engine run for the duration specified to In wintry conditions, snow chains
certain functions to conserve a sufficient level of ensure that the battery charge is sufficient. improve traction as well as the
charge in the battery. Do not repeatedly and continuously restart the behaviour of the vehicle when
After switching off the engine and for a maximum engine in order to charge the battery. braking.
cumulative period of around 40 minutes, you can
continue to use functions such as the audio and
telematics system, the wipers, the dipped beam Snow chains must be fitted only to the
headlamps, the courtesy lamps, etc. front wheels. They must never be fitted to
A flat battery prevents the engine from
"space-saver" type spare wheels.
Switching to this mode starting.
For more information on the 12 V battery,
A message appears in the instrument panel refer to the corresponding section.
screen indicating that the vehicle has switched Take account of the legislation in force in
to economy mode and the active functions are your country on the use of snow chains
put on standby. and the maximum authorised speed.
Load reduction mode
If a telephone call is being made at this
System which manages the use of certain
time, it will be maintained for around
10 minutes with the Bluetooth hands-free
functions according to the level of charge Installation tips
remaining in the battery.
system of your audio system. F If you have to fit the chains during a journey,
When the vehicle is being driven, the load
reduction function temporarily deactivates stop the vehicle on a flat surface on the side
certain functions, such as air conditioning, of the road.
Exiting the mode heated rear screen, etc. F Apply the parking brake and position any
The deactivated functions are reactivated wheel chocks under the wheels to prevent
These functions will be automatically
automatically as soon as conditions permit. movement of your vehicle.
reactivated the next time the vehicle is used.
F Fit the chains following the instructions
In order to restore the use of these functions
provided by the manufacturer.
immediately, start the engine and let it run:
F Move off gently and drive for a few
- for less than 10 minutes, to use the
moments, without exceeding 31 mph
equipment for approximately 5 minutes,
(50 km/h).
F Stop your vehicle and check that the snow
chains are correctly tightened.
186
It is strongly recommended that before Fitting roof bars Maximum load distributed over the
you leave, you practise fitting the snow transverse roof bars, for a loading height
chains on a level and dry surface. As a safety measure and to avoid not exceeding 40 cm (except bicycle
damaging the roof, it is essential to use carrier): 75 kg.
the transverse bars approved for your As this value may change, please verify
Avoid driving with snow chains on roads vehicle. the maximum load quoted on the guide
that have been cleared of snow to avoid Observe the instructions on fitting and use supplied with the roof bars.
damaging your vehicle's tyres and the contained in the guide supplied with the If the height exceeds 40 cm, adapt the
road surface. If your vehicle is fitted with roof bars. speed of the vehicle to the profile of the
alloy wheels, check that no part of the road to avoid damaging the roof bars and
chain or its fixings is in contact with the the fixings on the vehicle.
wheel rim. Be sure to refer to national legislation in
Sunroof
order to comply with the regulations for
Check that the load does not pass below
transporting objects which are longer than
the roof bars so that it does not impede
the vehicle.
the movements of the sunroof.
Use only the chains designed to be fitted to the
type of wheel fitted to your vehicle:
Recommendations
F Distribute the load uniformly, taking
care to avoid overloading one of the Sunroof
7
Original tyre size Maximum link size sides.
F Arrange the heaviest part of the load
as close as possible to the roof.
215/65 R17 9 mm F Secure the load firmly and fit a warning
flag if the load overhangs the vehicle.
235/55 R18 cannot be fitted with chains F Drive gently: the vehicle will be more
susceptible to the effects of side winds
205/55 R19 9 mm
(stability may be affected).
F Remove the roof bars once they are no
For more information on snow chains, contact Do not operate the sunroof when using
longer needed.
a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop. roof bars – risk of major damage!
187
Version without longitudinal Version with longitudinal When the engine is hot, handle the
bars bars exterior safety catch and the bonnet
stay with care (risk of burns), using the
protected area.
When the bonnet is open, take care not to
damage the safety catch.
Do not open the bonnet under very windy
conditions.
The cooling fan may start after

You must fit the transverse bars to the switching off the engine: take care
longitudinal bars at the engraved markings on with articles and clothing that might be
To install the roof bars, you must secure them
the longitudinal bars. caught by the fan blades.
only to the four fixing points on the roof frame.
These points are concealed by the vehicle's
doors when they are closed.
Bonnet Opening
F Open the left-hand front door.
Before doing anything under the bonnet,

deactivate the Stop & Start system to
avoid the risk of injury related to an
automatic change to START mode.
The location of the interior bonnet release

The roof bar fixings include a lug to be fitted lever prevents opening the bonnet when
into the hole at each fixing point. F Pull the release lever, located at the bottom
the left-hand front door is shut.
of the door aperture, towards you.
188
Engine compartment 5.
6.
Remote earth point (-).
Fusebox.
These engines are examples provided as 7. Air filter.
a guide. 8. Engine oil filler cap.
The locations of the following elements may vary:
9. Engine oil dipstick.
- Air filter.
10. Priming pump*
- Engine oil dipstick.
- Engine oil filler cap. 11. Degassing screw*.
- Priming pump.
- Degassing screw. * Depending on engine.
F Lift the safety catch and raise the bonnet. The Diesel fuel system operates under
Petrol engine
F Unclip the stay from its housing and place it very high pressure.
in the support slot to hold the bonnet open. All work on this circuit must be carried out
only by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Closing
F Take the stay out of the support slot.
F Clip the stay in its housing.
Checking levels
F Lower the bonnet and release it near the Check all of the following levels regularly in
Diesel engine
end of its travel. accordance with the manufacturer's service
7
F Pull on the bonnet to check that it is locked schedule. Top them up if required, unless
correctly. otherwise indicated.
If a level drops significantly, have the
corresponding system checked by a CITROËN
Because of the presence of electrical
equipment under the bonnet, it is
recommended that exposure to water
(rain, washing, etc.) be limited. The fluids must comply with the
1. Screenwash fluid reservoir. manufacturer's requirements and with the
2. Engine coolant reservoir. vehicle's engine.
3. Brake fluid reservoir.
4. Battery/Fuses.
189
The vehicle must be parked on a level surface,

Take care when working under the bonnet,
with the engine stopped for more than 30 minutes.
as certain areas of the engine may be
extremely hot (risk of burns) and the It is normal to top up the oil level between two
cooling fan could start at any time (even services (or oil changes). It is recommended
with the ignition off). that you check the level, and top up if A = MAX
necessary, every 3,000 miles (5,000 km). B = MIN
In order to maintain the reliability of the

Used products engine and emissions control system,
never use additives in the engine oil.
Avoid prolonged contact of used oil or Do not start the engine if the level is:
fluids with the skin. Check using the dipstick - Above mark A, then contact a CITROËN
Most of these fluids are harmful to health, The location of the dipstick is shown in the dealer or a qualified workshop.
and may be very corrosive. corresponding underbonnet layout view. - Below mark B, then top up the engine oil
F Take the dipstick by its coloured grip and immediately.
pull it out completely.
Do not discard used oil or fluids into
F Wipe the end of the dipstick using a clean,
sewers or onto the ground.
non-fluffy cloth. Oil grade
Empty used oil into the containers
F Refit the dipstick and push fully down, then Before topping up the oil or changing
reserved for this purpose at a CITROËN
pull it out again to make the visual check: the oil, check that the oil is the correct
the correct level is between marks A and B. grade for your engine and conforms to the
manufacturer's recommendations.
Engine oil
Topping up the engine oil level
The level is checked either using the
oil level indicator in the instrument The location of the oil filler cap is shown in the
panel when the ignition is switched corresponding underbonnet layout view.
on, for vehicles equipped with an F Add oil in small quantities, avoiding any
electric gauge, or using the dipstick. spills on engine components (risk of fire).
190
F Wait a few minutes before checking the The check and top-up must only be done with Fluid specification
level again using the dipstick. the engine cold.
F Add more oil if necessary. A low level presents a risk of serious damage The screenwash fluid must be topped up with
F After checking the level, carefully refit the oil to the engine. a ready for use mix.
filler cap and the dipstick in its tube. The level of this fluid should be close to the In winter (temperatures below zero), a liquid
"MAX" mark but should never exceed it. containing an anti-freeze agent must be
If the level is close to or below the "MIN" mark, used which is appropriate for the prevailing
it is essential to top up. conditions, in order to preserve the elements of
the system (pump, tank, ducts, etc.).
During the 30 minutes after topping up the
When the engine is hot, the temperature of this
oil, the check performed with the oil level
fluid is regulated by the fan. Filling with pure water is prohibited
indicator in the instrument panel when the
In addition, as the cooling system is under all circumstances (risk of freezing,
ignition is switched on is not valid.
pressurised, wait at least one hour after limestone deposits, jets, etc.).
switching off the engine before carrying out any
Brake fluid work.
The level of this fluid should be close To avoid the risk of scalding if you need to top Diesel fuel additive (Diesel
to the "MAX" mark. If not, check the up in an emergency, wrap a cloth around the with particle filter)
brake pad wear. cap and unscrew the cap by two turns to allow
the pressure to drop. The minimum level in the particle
To know how often the brake fluid should be Once the pressure has dropped, remove the filter additive tank is indicated by fixed
replaced, refer to the manufacturer's servicing cap and top up to the required level. illumination of this warning lamp,
schedule. accompanied by an audible warning
7
or
Cooling of the engine when stopped and a message warning that the level
of additive is too low.
If topping up, clean the cap before The engine cooling fan may start after
replacing it. Use only DOT4 brake fluid the engine has been switched off.
from a sealed canister. Take care with objects or clothing that
could be caught in the blades of the Topping up
fan! This additive must be topped up without delay
Engine coolant by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
Screenwash fluid
Check the engine coolant level
regularly. Top up to the required level when
It is normal to top up this fluid necessary.
between two services.
191
AdBlue (BlueHDi) 12 V battery A clogged cabin filter may have an

adverse effect on the performance of
An alert is triggered once the reserve level is The battery does not require any maintenance.
the air conditioning system and generate
reached. However, check regularly that the terminals
undesirable odours.
For more information on the AdBlue range are correctly tightened (versions without quick
indicators, refer to the corresponding section. release terminals) and that the connections
To avoid the vehicle being immobilised as per are clean. Air filter
regulations, you must top up the AdBlue tank.
For more information on the Supply of For more information on the precautions to Depending on the environment and
AdBlue, refer to the corresponding section. take before any work on the 12 V battery, the use of the vehicle (e.g. dusty
refer to the corresponding section. atmosphere, city driving), change it
twice as often if necessary.
Checks
Unless otherwise indicated, check these Versions equipped with Stop & Start are Oil filter
components in accordance with the fitted with a 12 V lead-acid battery of
manufacturer's service schedule and according specific technology and specification. Change the oil filter each time the
to your engine. Its replacement should be carried out engine oil is changed.
Otherwise, have them checked by a CITROËN only by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
dealer or a qualified workshop. workshop.
Particle filter (Diesel)
The start of saturation of the particle
Only use products recommended by Cabin filter filter is signalled by the temporary
CITROËN or products of equivalent quality illumination of this warning lamp,
and specification. Depending on the environment and or accompanied by a message warning
In order to optimise the operation of the use of the vehicle (e.g. dusty of the risk of the filter clogging up.
components as important as those in the atmosphere, city driving), change it
braking system, CITROËN selects and twice as often if necessary.
offers very specific products.
As soon as the traffic conditions permit,
regenerate the filter by driving at a speed of at
least 37 mph (60 km/h) until the warning lamp
goes off.
192
If the warning lamp stays on, this indicates Brake pads Electric parking brake
a low Diesel additive level.
Brake wear depends on the style
of driving, particularly in the case This system does not require any
of vehicles used in town, over short routine servicing. However, in case
distances. It may be necessary to of an issue, do not hesitate to have
have the condition of the brakes the system checked by a CITROËN
Following prolonged operation of the checked, even between vehicle dealer or a qualified workshop.
vehicle at very low speed or at idle, services.
you may, in exceptional circumstances, Unless there is a leak in the circuit, a drop in
notice the emission of water vapour at the For more information on the Electric
the brake fluid level indicates that the brake
exhaust on acceleration. This does not parking brake, refer to the corresponding
pads are worn.
affect the behaviour of the vehicle or the section.
environment.
After washing the vehicle, dampness, or
in wintry conditions, ice can form on the
Wheels and tyres
New vehicle brake discs and pads: braking efficiency The pressure must be checked on
The first particle filter regeneration may be reduced. Make light brake all tyres, including the spare wheel,
operations may be accompanied by a applications to dry and defrost the brakes. when the tyres are "cold", at least
"burning" smell, which is perfectly normal. once a month and before a long
journey.
Manual gearbox
The gearbox does not require any Brake disc wear
The pressures indicated on the tyre pressure
label are valid for "cold" tyres. If you have
driven for more than 10 minutes or more
7
than 6 miles (10 kilometres) at over 31 mph
maintenance (no oil change).
For information on checking brake (50 km/h), add 0.3 bar (30 kPa) to the values
disc wear, contact a CITROËN indicated on the label.
Automatic gearbox
The gearbox does not require any
maintenance (no oil change).
193
Driving with under-inflated tyres increases Headlamps and lamps AdBlue® (BlueHDi)
fuel consumption. Non-compliant tyre
To respect the environment and ensure
pressure causes premature wear on tyres The headlamps have polycarbonate
compliance with the Euro 6 standard, without
and has an adverse effect on the vehicle's lenses with a protective coating.
adversely affecting the performance or fuel
road holding – risk of an accident! Do not clean them with a dry or abrasive
consumption of Diesel engines, CITROËN
cloth, nor with detergent or solvent
has taken the decision to equip its vehicles
products.
with a system that associates SCR (Selective
Use a sponge and soapy water.
Driving with worn or damaged tyres reduces Catalytic Reduction) with a Diesel particle filter
The use of a high pressure jet wash for
the braking and road holding performance of (DPF) for the treatment of exhaust gases.
cleaning the headlamps, lamps and their
the vehicle. It is recommended to regularly
surrounds may damage the lacquer and
check the condition of the tyres (tread and
seals.
sidewalls) and wheel rims as well as the
Observe the recommendations on
SCR system
presence of the valves.
pressure and distance for jet washing. Using a liquid called AdBlue ® that contains
Using different size wheels and tyres from
First clean persistent stains with a sponge urea, a catalytic converter turns up to 85% of
those specified can affect the lifetime of
and warm soapy water. the nitrogen oxides (NOx) into nitrogen and
tyres, wheel rotation, ground clearance, the
speedometer reading and have an adverse water, which are harmless to health and the
effect on road holding. environment.
Fitting different tyres on the front and rear axles
The AdBlue ® is contained in
can cause the ESC to mistime.
a special tank holding about
Leather 17 litres.
Advice on care and maintenance
Leather is a natural product. Appropriate
Recommendations on the care and regular care and cleaning is essential for its Its capacity allows a driving range of
maintenance of your vehicle are given in the durability. approximately 5,600 miles (9,000 km), highly
Maintenance and Warranty Guide. dependent on your driving style.
An alert system is triggered automatically once
Refer to your vehicle's Maintenance and the reserve level is reached: you can then drive
Warranty guide for information on all the for a further 1,500 miles (2,400 km) before the
special precautions to observe. tank is empty.
194
For more information on the Warning Supply of AdBlue® If the fluid has frozen, it can be used once it has
completely thawed out at room temperature.
and indicator lamps and the associated
It is recommended that the AdBlue ® be topped
alerts, or the Indicators, refer to the
up as soon as the first alert is issued indicating
corresponding sections. Never keep bottles or containers of
that the reserve level has been reached.
AdBlue ® in your vehicle.
Once the AdBlue ® tank is empty, a system

In order to ensure that the SCR system
required by regulations prevents starting
operates correctly: Precautions for use
of the engine.
- Use only AdBlue ® fluid that meets the
If the SCR system is faulty, the level of AdBlue ® is a urea-based solution. This liquid
ISO 22241 standard.
emissions from your vehicle will no longer is non-flammable, colourless and odourless
- Never transfer AdBlue ® to another
meet the Euro 6 standard: your vehicle (when kept in a cool place).
container: it would lose its purity.
becomes polluting. In the event of contact with the skin, wash the
- Never dilute AdBlue ® with water.
In the event of a confirmed fault with the affected area with soap and water. In the event
SCR system, you must go to a CITROËN of contact with the eyes, wash (irrigate) the
dealer or a qualified workshop as soon eyes with large amounts of water or with an eye
as possible: after travelling a distance wash solution for at least 15 minutes. If you feel
of 685 miles (1,100 km), a system will be You can obtain AdBlue ® from a CITROËN a persistent burning sensation or irritation, get
triggered automatically to prevent engine dealer or a qualified workshop. medical attention.
starting. If swallowed, immediately wash out the mouth
You can also visit a service station equipped
In either case, a range indicator gives you with clean water and then drink plenty of water.
7
with AdBlue ® pumps specially designed for
the distance you can travel before the In certain conditions (at high temperature,
passenger vehicles.
vehicle is immobilised. for example), the risk of release of ammonia
cannot be excluded: do not inhale the vapour.
Recommendations on Ammonia has an irritant effect on mucous
Freezing of the AdBlue ®

storage membranes (eyes, nose and throat).
AdBlue ® freezes at temperatures below AdBlue ® freezes below about -11°C and
around -11°C. deteriorates above 25°C. It should be stored in
The SCR system includes a heater for the a cool place and protected from direct sunlight.
AdBlue ® tank, allowing you to continue Under these conditions, the fluid can be kept
driving in very cold conditions. for at least a year.
195
Keep AdBlue ® out of the reach of children, Access to the AdBlue® tank Important:
in its original container or bottle. A blue cap under the fuel filler flap indicates To avoid overflowing the AdBlue ® tank, it
access to the AdBlue ® tank. is recommended:
F To top up between 10 and 13 litres
using AdBlue ® containers.
Procedure Or
F When filling at a service station, to stop
Before starting the top-up procedure, ensure after the third automatic cut-off of the
that the vehicle is parked on a flat and level nozzle.
surface.
Do not pour AdBlue ® if the temperature of the
vehicle is less than -11°C. Park your vehicle in
a warmer area for a few hours to allow the top-
up to be carried out. Important: in the event of a top-up after
a breakdown because of a lack of
F Switch off the ignition and remove the key.
AdBlue, you must wait around 5 minutes
In the event of an AdBlue ® breakdown, Or
before switching on the ignition, without
confirmed by the message "Add AdBlue: F With Keyless Entry and Starting, press the
opening the driver's door, unlocking
Starting impossible", you must top up with "START/STOP" button to switch off the
the vehicle, introducing the key into
at least 5 litres. engine.
the ignition switch, or introducing
F Turn the AdBlue ® blue filler cap anti-
the key of the Keyless Entry and
clockwise.
Starting system into the passenger
F Obtain an AdBlue ® container (check the compartment.
Never pour AdBlue ® into the Diesel fuel use-by date) and pour the contents of the Switch on the ignition, then wait for
tank. container into your vehicle's AdBlue ® tank. 10 seconds before starting the engine.
Or
F Insert the AdBlue ® pump nozzle and refill
If any AdBlue ® is splashed, or if there the tank until the nozzle stops automatically.
are any spillages on the bodywork, rinse
immediately with cold water or wipe with
a damp cloth.
If the fluid has crystallised, clean it off
using a sponge and hot water.
196
In the event of a breakdown
Warning triangle Assembling and placing the For more information on Misfuel
As a safety precaution, before leaving your
triangle prevention (Diesel), refer to the
vehicle to set up and install the triangle, switch
on the hazard warning lamps and put on your
high visibility vest.
BlueHDi 130 engines
F Fill the fuel tank with at least 5 litres of
Storage compartment Diesel.
F Switch on the ignition (without starting the
engine).
F Wait around 1 minute and switch off the
ignition.
For versions supplied with a triangle as original F Operate the starter to start the engine.
equipment, refer to the illustration above. If the engine does not start, repeat the
For other versions, refer to the assembly procedure.
instructions provided with the triangle.
There is a compartment in the interior trim of F Put the triangle in place behind the vehicle, BlueHDi 180 engines
the tailgate to store a triangle. as required by local legislation.
F Open the tailgate. F Fill the fuel tank with at least 5 litres of
Diesel.
F Release the cover by turning the screw
a quarter turn anti-clockwise.
Running out of fuel (Diesel) F Switch on the ignition (without starting the
engine).
On vehicles fitted with Diesel engines, the fuel
8
F Wait around 6 seconds and switch off the
system must be primed if you run out of fuel.
ignition.
If the engine does not start first time, do not
F Repeat the last two operations 10 times.
keep trying, but start the procedure again from
F Operate the starter to start the engine.
the beginning.
197
HDi engines Access to the tool kit Versions with a spare wheel
F Fill the fuel tank with at least 5 litres of
Diesel.
F Open the bonnet.
F If necessary, unclip the cover to access the
priming pump.
F Loosen the degassing bolt.
F Operate the priming pump until fuel appears
in the transparent tube.
F Retighten the degassing bolt.
F Operate the starter until the engine starts (if
the engine does not start at the first attempt,
wait around 15 seconds before trying The main tools are stowed in the boot, under F unclip the storage box by pulling it up,
again). the floor. F unclip the two fixings to open its cover.
F If the engine does not start after a few For access to them:
attempts, operate the priming pump again F Open the boot.
then start the engine. F Place the adjustable boot floor in the high
F Put the cover back in place, clip it and position.
ensure it is clipped in. All of these tools are specific to your
vehicle and may vary depending on
F Close the bonnet. Versions with a temporary equipment.
puncture repair kit Do not use them for any other purposes.
Tool kit
This is a set of tools provided with the vehicle.
Its content depends on your vehicle's
equipment:
- temporary puncture repair kit,
- spare wheel.
F Unclip the two fixings to open its cover.
198
The jack must only be used to change

For more information on Towing the vehicle With spare wheel
and using the removable towing eye, refer to
a wheel with a damaged or punctured tyre.
Do not use any jack other than the one
supplied with this vehicle.
If the vehicle does not have its original
jack, contact a CITROËN dealer or With temporary puncture repair
a qualified workshop to obtain the correct kit
jack for it.
The jack meets European standards,
as defined in the Machinery Directive
2006/42/CE.
The jack does not require any 5. Wheelbrace.
maintenance. For removing the wheel trim and removing
the wheel fixing bolts.
6. Jack with integrated handle.
List of tools Used to raise the vehicle.
7. Wheel bolt cover remover (depending on
equipment).
4. 12 V compressor with a cartridge of
For removing the wheel bolt head finishers
sealant and a speed limit sticker.
on alloy wheels.
For temporary repair of a tyre and to
adjust the tyre pressure. For more information on the Spare wheel, refer
For further information about the Temporary
puncture repair kit, refer to the corresponding
8
1. Chocks to immobilise the vehicle
(depending on equipment). section.
2. Socket for the security bolts (located in Temporary puncture
the glove box) (depending on equipment).
For adapting the wheelbrace to the special repair kit
"security" bolts.
3. Towing eye and tool to open the protective Scan the QR Code on page 3 to view
covers of the front and rear screw threads. explanatory videos.
199
Made up of a compressor and a sealant Repair procedure

cartridge, it allows the temporary repair of
a tyre so that you can drive to the nearest F Park the vehicle without obstructing any
garage. traffic and apply the parking brake.
It is designed to repair most punctures which F Follow the safety instructions (hazard
could affect the tyre, located on the tyre tread. warning lamps, warning triangle, wearing
high visibility vest, etc.) according to the
legislation in force in the country where you
are driving.
F Switch off the ignition.
The vehicle's electric system allows the
F Uncoil the pipe stowed under the
connection of the compressor for long
compressor.
enough to inflate a tyre after a puncture
F Turn the bottle of sealant over and secure it
repair.
in the notch provided on the compressor.
F Remove the valve cap from the tyre to be
Composition of the kit repaired, and place it in a clean area.
F Connect the pipe from the compressor to

the bottle of sealant.
Do not remove any foreign bodies (e.g.

1. 12 V compressor, with integral pressure nail, screw, etc.) which have penetrated
gauge. into the tyre.
F Connect the hose from the bottle of sealant
2. Sealant cartridge, with integral hose.
to the valve of the tyre to be repaired and
3. Speed limit sticker.
tighten firmly.
200
F Check that the compressor switch is in F Switch on the ignition. F Remove the kit.
position "O". F Remove and then store the bottle of sealant.
F Fully uncoil the electric cable, stowed under
the compressor.
F Connect the compressor's electric plug to Take care, the sealant product is harmful
one of the vehicle's 12 V sockets. if swallowed and causes irritation to the
eyes.
F Affix the speed limit sticker. Keep this product out of the reach of
children.
The use-by date of the fluid is marked on
the bottle.
After use, do not discard the bottle in
standard waste, take it to a CITROËN
The speed limit sticker must be secured to F Start the compressor by turning the switch
dealer or an authorised waste disposal
the interior of the vehicle in the area close to position "I" until the pressure of the tyre
site.
to the driver, to remind the driver that reaches 2 bars. The sealant product is
Do not forget to obtain a new bottle of
a wheel is in temporary use. injected under pressure into the tyre; do not
sealant, available from a CITROËN dealer
disconnect the pipe from the valve during
or a qualified workshop.
this operation (risk of blowback).
If a pressure of 2 bars is not reached after

The tyre inflation pressures are given on about 7 minutes, this indicates that the
this label. tyre is not repairable; contact a CITROËN
8
dealer or a qualified workshop for
assistance.
F Turn the switch to position "O".

F Drive immediately for approximately 3 miles
F Disconnect the compressor's electric plug
(5 kilometres), at reduced speed (between
from the vehicle's 12 V socket.
12 and 37 mph (20 and 60 km/h)), to plug
F Replace the cap on the valve.
the puncture.
201
F Stop to check the repair and measure the F Screw the pipe onto the valve and tighten label. To deflate: press the black button
tyre pressure using the kit. firmly. located on the compressor pipe, near the
F Check that the compressor switch is in valve connection.
position "O".
Do not exceed the speed of 50 mph
F Fully uncoil the electric cable, stowed under
(80 km/h) when driving with a tyre repaired
the compressor. If a pressure of 2 bars is not reached after
using this type of kit.
F Connect the compressor's electric plug to 7 minutes, this indicates that the tyre is
one of the vehicle's 12 V sockets. not repairable; contact a CITROËN dealer
F Switch on the ignition.
Checking/adjusting tyre or a qualified workshop for assistance.
pressures
You can also use the compressor, F Once the correct pressure is reached, put
without injecting sealant, to check and, if the switch in position "O".
necessary, adjust the tyre pressures. F Remove the kit then stow it.
The tyre inflation pressures are given on
this label.
F Remove the valve cap from the tyre and Do not drive more than 125 miles (200 km)
keep it in a clean place. with a repaired tyre; see a CITROËN
F Uncoil the pipe stowed under the dealer or a qualified workshop to change
compressor. the tyre.
Should the pressure of one or more tyres

be adjusted, it is necessary to reinitialise
the under-inflation detection system.
For more information on Tyre under-
inflation detection, refer to the
F Start the compressor by placing the switch
at position "I" and adjust the pressure to the
value shown on the vehicle's tyre pressure
202
Spare wheel Taking out the wheel F Position the fastening device (nut and bolt)
in the middle of the wheel.
F Tighten the central nut to retain the wheel
Scan the QR code on page 3 to view correctly.
explanatory videos. F Store the tool box in the middle of the wheel
and clip it in place.
Procedure for changing a damaged wheel with
the spare wheel using the tools provided with If there is no wheel in the well, the
the vehicle. fastening device (nut and bolt) cannot be
refitted.
Access to the spare wheel F Slacken the central nut.
F Remove the fastening device (nut and bolt).
F Lift the spare wheel towards you from the Removing a wheel
rear.
F Take the wheel out of the boot.
Wheel with wheel trim
When removing the wheel, first remove
the wheel trim by pulling at the valve
aperture using the wheelbrace.
Putting the wheel back in place
When refitting the wheel, refit the wheel
F Put the wheel back in place in its housing. trim, starting by placing its aperture in
F Slacken the nut on the bolt by a few turns. line with the valve and then pushing it into
The spare wheel is installed in the boot under
place all round its edge with the palm of
the floor.
your hand.
For access to the spare wheel, first refer to
8
section on the Tool kit.
Depending on version, the spare wheel is

a standard size steel or alloy wheel.
For some countries of sale, it is the "space
saver" type.
203
Parking the vehicle

Immobilise the vehicle where it does not
block traffic: the ground must be level,
stable and non-slippery.
Apply the parking brake, unless it is
programmed to be in automatic mode;
switch off the ignition and with a manual
gearbox, engage first gear so as to lock
the wheels.
Apply the parking brake, unless it is
programmed to be in automatic mode;
switch off the ignition and with an
automatic gearbox, select mode P so as to
lock the wheels.
Check that the parking brake warning F Place the foot of jack 6 on the ground and
lamps in the instrument panel are on fixed. F To remove the wheel bolt cover on each of ensure that it is directly below the front A
The occupants must get out of the vehicle the bolts, use tool 7 (alloy wheels). or rear B jacking point on the underbody,
and wait where they are safe. F Fit security socket 2 on wheelbrace 5 to whichever is closest to the wheel to be
If necessary, place a chock under the slacken the security bolt. changed.
wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be F Slacken the other bolts using wheelbrace
changed. 5 only.
Never go underneath a vehicle raised
using a jack; use an axle stand.
204
F Remove the wheel.
Ensure that the jack is stable. If the

ground is slippery or loose, the jack may
slip or drop – risk of injury!
Position the jack strictly at one of the
jacking points, A or B, under the vehicle,
ensuring that the head of the jack is
centred under the contact area on the
vehicle. Otherwise, there is a risk of
damage to the vehicle and/or the jack
F Extend jack 6 until its head comes into F Put the wheel in place on the hub.
collapsing – risk of injury!
contact with jacking point A or B; contact F Screw in the bolts by hand as far as
area A or B on the vehicle must be properly possible.
inserted into the central part of the head of F Pre-tighten the security bolt using the
the jack.
F Raise the vehicle until there is sufficient
Fitting a wheel wheelbrace 5 fitted with security socket 2.
F Pre-tighten the other bolts using wheelbrace
space between the wheel and the ground 5 only.
to admit the spare (not punctured) wheel
easily.
Fitting a steel or "space-saver" spare
8
wheel
If your vehicle is fitted with alloy wheels,
when tightening the bolts on refitting it is
normal to notice that the washers do not
come into contact with the steel or "space-
saver" spare wheel. The wheel is secured
by the conical contact of each bolt. F Lower the vehicle again fully.
F Fold jack 6 and detach it.
F Remove the bolts and store them in a clean
place.
205
With a 'space-saver' type spare wheel Changing a bulb

The headlamps have polycarbonate
lenses with a protective coating:
F do not clean them using a dry or
abrasive cloth, nor with a detergent
or solvent product,
F use a sponge and soapy water or a pH
The following is recommended: neutral product,
- deactivate certain driving aid functions F when using a high pressure washer
(Active Safety Brake, Adaptive cruise on persistent marks, do not keep the
F Tighten the security bolt using the lance directed towards the lamps or
control, etc.), as indicated on the label
wheelbrace 5 fitted with security socket 2. their edges for too long, so as not to
attached to the wheel,
F Tighten the other bolts using wheelbrace damage their protective coating and
- do not exceed the maximum
5 only. seals.
authorised speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
F Refit the bolt covers to each of the bolts
(depending on equipment).
F Store the tools.
Driving with more than one 'space-saver'
type spare wheel is prohibited. Changing a bulb must only be done with
After changing a wheel the ignition off and after the lamp has
Store the punctured wheel in the boot or, been switched off for several minutes –
depending on version, remove the central cover Visit a CITROËN dealer or a qualified Risk of serious burns!
first to store it beneath the floor in place of the workshop as soon as possible to have the F Do not touch the bulb directly with your
spare wheel. tightness of the bolts and the pressure of fingers, use a lint-free cloth.
the spare wheel checked. It is essential only to use anti-ultraviolet
Have the punctured tyre examined. After (UV) type bulbs, so as not to damage the
inspection, the technician will advise you headlamp.
on whether the tyre can be repaired or if it Always replace a failed bulb with a new
must be replaced. bulb with the same type and specification.
206
In some weather conditions (e.g. low Front lamps Model B

temperature or humidity), the presence
Model A
of misting on the internal surface of the
glass of the headlamps and rear lamps is
normal; it disappears after the lamps have
been on for a few minutes.
Light-emitting diodes (LED)

For the replacement of this type of bulb,
you must contact a CITROËN dealer or
Halogen bulbs 1. Daytime running lamps/sidelamps/

To ensure good quality lighting, check direction indicators (LED).
that the bulb is correctly positioned in its 1. Daytime running lamps/sidelamps/ 2. Dipped beam headlamps (H7-55W).
housing. direction indicators (LED). 3. Main beam headlamps (HB3-65W).
2. Dipped beam headlamps (LED). 4. Front foglamps (P21W).
3. Dipped beam/main beam headlamps
(LED).
4. Front foglamps (P21W).
207
Model C Direction indicators (halogen Main beam headlamps (halogen

headlamps) headlamps)
Rapid flashing of a direction indicator

lamp (left or right) indicates that one of
the bulbs on the corresponding side has
failed.
F Remove the protective cover.

F Disconnect the bulb connector.
F Turn the bulb holder anti-clockwise.
1. Daytime running lamps/sidelamps (LED). F Remove the bulb and replace it.
2. Direction indicators (WY21W). To refit, carry out these operations in reverse
3. Dipped beam headlamps (H7-55W). order. When refitting, close the protective cover
4. Main beam headlamps (HB3-65W). F Turn the bulb holder a quarter turn anti- very carefully to guarantee the sealing of the
5. Front foglamps (P21W). clockwise. lamp.
F Pull the bulb and bulb holder assembly
rearwards.
Opening the bonnet/Access to bulbs F Replace the bulb.
With the engine warm, proceed with To refit, carry out these operations in reverse
caution – Risk of burns! order.
Take care with objects or clothing that
could be caught in the blades of the
engine fan – Risk of strangulation! Amber coloured bulbs, such as the
direction indicators, must be replaced
by bulbs with identical colour and
specifications.
208
Dipped beam headlamps (halogen Changing foglamp bulbs

To replace this type of bulb, you can also
headlamps)
workshop.
Direction indicator side repeaters

(LED)
For the replacement of this type of diode bulb,
F Introduce a flat screwdriver in the hole in workshop.
the trim.
F Pull and lever to unclip the foglamp trim. Door mirror spotlamps (LED)
F Remove the protective cover. F With a Torx screwdriver, remove the two
module fixing screws. For the replacement of this type of diode bulb,
F Disconnect the bulb connector.
F Remove the module from its housing. contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
F Turn the lamp a quarter turn anti-clockwise
workshop.
and replace it.
To refit, carry out these operations in reverse
order. When refitting, close the protective cover
very carefully to guarantee the sealing of the
lamp.
Daytime running lamps/sidelamps

(LEDs)
8
For the replacement of this type of diode bulb,
workshop.
F Disconnect the bulb holder connector.
F Turn the bulb holder a quarter turn and pull
it out.
F Change the assembly.
order.
209
Rear lamps Direction indicators (on the F From the outside, carefully remove the lamp
wings) by pulling it to the rear, then up.
F Disengage the cable duct from the panel.
F Turn the bulb holder a quarter turn using
a universal pair of pliers if necessary and
pull it out.
F Remove the bulb and replace it.

order.
Reversing lamps (on the tailgate)
1. Brake lamps (LED).

F Open the tailgate, then unclip the access
2. Sidelamps (LED).
cover on the side in question.
3. Direction indicators (WY21W).
F Unblock the lamp fixing nut with a 10 mm
4. Reversing lamps (W16W). box spanner.
5. Foglamps (P21W). F To avoid losing the nut in the wing trim if it
drops, first place a cloth below it.
F Manually unscrew and remove the lamp
fixing nut. F Open the tailgate, then insert a flat
F Disengage the retaining clip, while pushing screwdriver into the cut-out to unclip the
the lamp out slightly. access cover on the side in question.
F Unblock the lamp fixing nut with a 10 mm
box spanner.
F Manually unscrew and remove the lamp
fixing nut.
F Disengage the retaining clip, while pushing
the lamp out slightly.
210
F turn the bulb a quarter turn and replace it. Interior lighting
order. Courtesy lamps
Front courtesy lamp
If changing a bulb within a few minutes of
switching off the ignition, take care not to
touch the exhaust – risk of burns!
F From the outside, carefully remove the lamp

by pulling it to the rear.
F Disconnect the lamp connector by pressing
on each side.
Third brake lamp (LED)
F Turn the bulb holder a quarter turn and pull For the replacement of this type of diode bulb,
it out. contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
Rear courtesy lamp
F Remove the bulb and replace it. workshop.

order.
Number plate lamps (W5W)
Foglamps
8
For the replacement of these bulbs, contact
a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
F Insert a thin screwdriver into one of the cut-
outs in the lens.
These bulbs are replaced from outside the rear F Push it outwards to unclip it.
bumper: F Remove the lens.
F pass your hand under the bumper, F Replace the faulty bulb.
F turn the bulb holder a quarter turn and To refit, press the lens to clip it in.
remove it,
211
Boot (W5W) Changing a fuse Replacing a fuse

Before replacing a fuse:
Access to the tools F the cause of the failure must be identified
and rectified,
F all electrical consumers must be switched
off,
F the vehicle must be immobilised with the
ignition off,
F identify the defective fuse using the
allocation tables and the diagrams on the
following pages.
F Unclip the unit using a small flat blade
To replace a fuse, you must:
screwdriver.
F use the special tweezers to extract the fuse
F Remove the bulb and replace it.
from its housing and check the condition of
F Put the unit back in place.
its filament.
F always replace the failed fuse with a fuse
of the same rating (same colour); using
a different rating could cause faults (risk of
fire).
If the fault recurs after replacing a fuse, have
the electrical system checked by a CITROËN
The extraction tweezers are located behind the
dashboard fusebox cover.
F Unclip the cover by pulling at the top.
F Disengage the cover completely.
F Take the tweezers from their housing. Replacement with a fuse not shown in
the allocation tables below may cause
a serious malfunction of your vehicle.
workshop.
212
CITROËN accepts no responsibility for

Access to the fuses
the cost incurred in repairing your vehicle
or for rectifying malfunctions resulting
from the installation of accessories
not supplied and not recommended by
CITROËN and not installed in accordance
with specifications, in particular when the
Good Failed
combined power consumption of all of the
additional equipment connected exceeds
10 milliamperes.
Dashboard fuses
Tweezers The fusebox is placed in the lower dashboard
(left-hand side).
Installing electrical accessories

Your vehicle's electrical system is
designed to operate with standard or
F Unclip the cover by pulling at the top.
optional equipment.
Before installing other electrical
equipment or accessories on your vehicle,
workshop.
213
Lower fusebox F14 5 Alarm (unit). Upper fusebox

F18 5 Trailer power supply.
F28 5 Alarm (siren), additional

heating/ventilation
remote control receiver.
F29 20 Touch screen

(CITROËN Connect Rating
Fuse No. Functions
Radio or CITROËN (A)
Connect Nav). F2 10 Heated door mirrors.
F31 10 Cigarette lighter/front
12 V accessory socket. F3 40 Rear one-touch electric
windows.
F34 5 Wireless smartphone
Rating charger. F5 40 Front one-touch electric
Fuse No. Functions
(A) windows.
F4 15 Horn. F6 15 12 V socket in boot.
F6 20 Front and rear F7 30 Front heated seats.
screenwash pump.
F7 10 12 V rear USB socket F10 30 Panoramic opening

F8 20 Rear wiper. sunroof.
F10 30 Locking/unlocking of
the doors and fuel filler
flap.
214
Engine compartment fuses 12 V battery

The fusebox is placed in the engine Procedure for starting the engine using another
compartment near the battery. battery or charging a discharged battery.
Access to the fuses

Lead-acid starter batteries
Batteries contain harmful substances

such as sulphuric acid and lead.
They must be disposed of in accordance
Rating with regulations and must not, in any
Fuse No. Functions
(A) circumstances, be discarded with
F1 40 Air conditioning household waste.
ventilation motor. Take used remote control batteries and
vehicle batteries to a special collection
F16 20 Heated windscreen point.
F Release the two latches A. F18 10 Right-hand main beam headlamp.

F Remove the cover. Protect your eyes and face before
F19 10 Left-hand main beam headlamp.
F Change the fuse. handling the battery.
F When you have finished, close the cover F24 40 Trailer power supply. All operations on the battery must be
carefully then engage the two latches A, to carried out in a well ventilated area and
ensure correct sealing of the fusebox.
8
away from naked flames and sources of
F26 25 Front foglamps.
sparks, so as to avoid the risk of explosion
or fire.
Wash your hands afterwards.
Access to the battery

The battery is located under the bonnet.
215
F Connect the red cable to the (+) terminal of

Never start the engine by connecting
flat battery A (at the metal elbow), then to
a battery charger.
the (+) terminal of backup battery B or the
Never use a 24 V or higher battery
booster.
booster.
F Connect one end of the green or black
Check beforehand that the backup
cable to the (-) terminal of backup battery
battery has a nominal voltage of 12 V and
B or the booster (or to an earth point on the
a capacity at least equal to that of the
assisting vehicle).
discharged battery.
F Connect the other end of the green or black
The two vehicles must not be in contact
cable to earth point C on the broken down
For access to the (+) terminal: with each other.
vehicle.
F unlock the bonnet by activating the internal Switch off all the electrical consumers
release lever, then the external safety catch. on both vehicles (audio system, wipers, F Start the engine of the assisting vehicle and
F raise the bonnet. lighting, etc.). leave it running for a few minutes.
(+) Positive terminal. Make sure that the jump leads are not F Operate the starter on the broken down
It has a quick-release clamp. close to the moving parts of the engine vehicle and let the engine run.
(fan, belt, etc.). If the engine does not start straight away,
(-) Negative terminal. Do not disconnect the (+) terminal while switch off the ignition and wait a few moments
As the battery's negative terminal is not the engine is running. before trying again.
accessible, a remote earth point is placed near
the battery. F Wait for it to return to idle.
F Disconnect the jump leads in reverse
order.
Starting using another F Refit the plastic cover to the (+) terminal, if
battery your vehicle has one.
When your vehicle's battery is discharged, the F Allow the engine to run for at least
engine can be started using a backup battery 30 minutes, by driving or with the vehicle
(external or from another vehicle) and jump stationary, so that the battery reaches an
leads or using a battery booster. adequate state of charge.
If your vehicle has an automatic gearbox,

F Lift the plastic cover on the (+) terminal, if never try to start the engine by pushing
your vehicle has one. the vehicle.
216
Charging the battery using F Switch off the ignition.

Never try to charge a frozen battery – risk
F Switch off all electrical consumers (audio
a battery charger system, lighting, wipers, etc.).
of explosion!
If the battery has frozen, have it checked
For optimum service life of the battery, it is
by a CITROËN dealer or by a qualified
essential to maintain an adequate state of
workshop who will verify that the internal
charge.
components have not been damaged
In some circumstances, it may be necessary to
and that the case has not cracked, which
charge the battery:
would mean a risk of toxic and corrosive
- using the vehicle mainly for short journeys,
acid leaking.
- if the vehicle is to be taken off the road for
several weeks.
workshop. Some functions, including Stop & Start,
are not available if the battery is not
sufficiently charged.
To charge the vehicle's battery yourself, F Switch off charger B before connecting the
use only a charger compatible with lead- cables to the battery, so as to avoid any
acid batteries with a nominal voltage of dangerous sparks.
12 V. F Ensure that the charger cables are in good
Disconnecting the battery
condition.
F If the vehicle has one, lift the plastic cover In order to maintain an adequate state
Follow the instructions provided by the on the (+) terminal. of charge for starting the engine, it is
manufacturer of the charger. F Connect the cables of charger B as follows: recommended that the battery be disconnected
Never reverse polarities. - the positive (+) red cable to the (+) if the vehicle is taken out of service for a long
terminal of battery A,
8
period.
- the negative (-) black cable to earth point Before disconnecting the battery:
It is not necessary to disconnect the C on the vehicle. F close all openings (doors, tailgate, windows,
battery. F At the end of the charging operation, switch sunroof),
off charger B before disconnecting the F switch off all electrical consumers (audio
cables from battery A. system, wipers, lighting, etc.),
217
F switch off the ignition and wait for four Reconnecting the (+) terminal After reconnecting the battery
minutes.
After reconnecting the battery, turn on the
At the battery, it is only necessary to
ignition and wait 1 minute before starting
disconnect the (+) terminal.
the engine, in order to enable the electronic
systems to initialise.
Quick-release terminal clamp
If minor problems nevertheless persist
Disconnecting the (+) terminal following this operation, contact a CITROËN
Referring to the corresponding section, you
must reinitialise certain systems yourself, such
as:
- the key with remote control or electronic key
(depending on version),
F Raise the lever A fully.
- the sunroof and its electric blind,
F Replace the open clamp B on the (+)
- the electric windows,
terminal.
- the date and time,
F Push the clamp B fully down.
- the preset radio stations.
F Lower the lever A to lock the clamp B.
F Depending on equipment, lower the plastic
F Depending on equipment, lift the plastic cover on the (+) terminal.
cover on the (+) terminal. The Stop & Start system may not be
F Raise the lever A fully to release the clamp B. Do not apply force when pressing the operational during the trip following the
F Remove the clamp B by lifting it off. lever, as if the clamp is not positioned first engine start.
correctly, locking will be impossible; start In this case, the system will only be
the procedure again. available again after a continuous
period of immobilisation of the vehicle,
a period which depends on the exterior
temperature and the state of charge of the
battery (up to about 8 hours).
218
Towing the vehicle Towing your vehicle Automatic gearbox: never tow the vehicle
with the front wheels on the ground with
Procedure for having your vehicle towed or
the engine off.
for towing another vehicle using a removable
mechanical device.
F Unlock the steering and release the parking
brake.
Access to the tools F Switch on the hazard warning lamps on
both vehicles.
F Move off gently, drive slowly and for a short
distance.
Towing another vehicle

F On the front bumper, unclip the cover by
using the tool fixed on the towing eye.
F Release the cover to the right and then
downwards.
F Screw the towing eye in fully.
The towing eye is stored in a toolbox, under the F Install the towbar.
boot floor.
The opening tool for the rear protective cover is
secured to the towing eye.
For more information on the Vehicle tools,
F Put the gearbox into neutral.
8
Failure to observe this instruction could
result in damage to certain components
F On the rear bumper, unclip the cover by
(braking, transmission, etc.) and the
using the tool fixed on the eye.
absence of braking assistance the next
F Pull the cover downwards.
time the engine is started.
F Screw the towing eye in fully.
F Install the towbar.
219
F Switch on the hazard warning lamps on

General recommendations
both vehicles.
Observe the legislation in force in the
F Move off gently, drive slowly and for a short
country where you are driving.
distance.
Ensure that the weight of the towing
vehicle is higher than that of the towed
vehicle.
The driver must remain at the wheel of
the towed vehicle and must have a valid
driving licence.
When towing a vehicle with all four
wheels on the ground, always use an
approved towing arm; rope and straps are
prohibited.
The towing vehicle must move off gently.
When the vehicle is towed with its engine
off, there is no longer braking and steering
assistance.
In the following cases, you must always
call on a professional recovery service:
- vehicle broken down on a motorway or
main road,
- four-wheel drive vehicle,
- when it is not possible to put the
gearbox into neutral, unlock the
steering, or release the parking brake,
- when it is not possible to tow a vehicle
with an automatic gearbox, engine
running,
- towing with only two wheels on the
ground,
- where there is no approved towbar,
etc. available.
220
Technical data
Dimensions (mm) Identification markings

These dimensions have been measured on an unladen vehicle. Various visible markings for the identification
and research of your vehicle.
A. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN),

under the bonnet.
This number is engraved on the bodywork
structure.
B. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), on
the dashboard.
The number is on a label, visible through the
windscreen.
C. Manufacturer's label.
This tamperproof label is affixed to the right-
hand door aperture.
It bears the following information:
- the name of the manufacturer,
- the European Whole Vehicle Type Approval
number,
9
- the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN),
- the gross vehicle weight (GVW),
- the gross train weight (GTW),
- the maximum weight on the front axle,
* Mirrors folded in. - the maximum weight on the rear axle.
** Version with longitudinal bars.
221
Technical data
D. Tyres/paint code label.

This label is affixed to the driver's door
Engine technical data and The GTW (Gross Train Weight) and towed load
values indicated are valid up to a maximum
aperture. towed loads altitude of 1,000 metres. The towed load value
It bears the following information about the must be reduced by 10% for each additional
tyres: Engines 1,000 metres of altitude.
- the tyre pressures, unladen and laden, The engine characteristics are given in the The maximum authorised nose weight
- the tyre specification, made up of the vehicle's registration document, as well as in corresponds to the weight permitted on the
dimensions and type as well as the load and sales brochures. towball.
speed indices,
- the spare tyre pressure.
It also indicates the paint colour code.
The maximum power corresponds to the When exterior temperatures are high,
value type-approved on a test bed, under the vehicle performance may be limited
conditions defined in European legislation in order to protect the engine. When the
(Directive 1999/99/EC). exterior temperature is higher than 37°C,
limit the towed weight.
The vehicle may be originally equipped For more information, contact a CITROËN
with tyres with higher load and speed dealer or a qualified workshop.
indices than those indicated on the label,
Towing using a lightly loaded vehicle can
without affecting inflation pressure.
Weights and towed loads adversely affect roadholding.
Braking distances are increased when
The weights and towed loads relating to your towing a trailer.
vehicle are given in the registration document, When using a vehicle to tow, never exceed
as well as in sales brochures. a speed of 62 mph (100 km/h) (observe
the local legislation in force).
These values are also given on the
manufacturer's plate or label.
For more information, contact a CITROËN If the exterior temperature is high, it is

dealer or a qualified workshop. recommended that the engine be allowed
to idle for 1 to 2 minutes after the vehicle
comes to a stop, to facilitate its cooling.
222
Technical data
Engines and towed loads – Petrol

1.6 THP 165
Engines PureTech 130 S&S PureTech 175 S&S
(Euro 5)
EAT6 EAT6 EAT8

Gearboxes
(Automatic 6-speed) (Automatic 6-speed) (Automatic 8-speed)
EB2ADTS STTd EP6FADTXD STTd

Codes EP6FDTMD – AT6III
MB6E ATN8
Model codes
5GS – 5GY 5GX HNS 5GF
J...
Cubic capacity (cm3) 1,598 1,598 1,598 1,598
Max. power: EC standard (kW) 110 121 96 133
Fuel Unleaded Unleaded Unleaded Unleaded
Braked trailer (within the GTW limit) (kg)

550 550 1,350 1,500
on a 10% or 12% gradient
Unbraked trailer (kg) 550 550 739 750
Maximum authorised nose weight (kg) 64 64 54 64
9
223
Technical data
Engines and towed loads – Diesel

2.0 HDi 180
Engines BlueHDi 130 S&S BlueHDi 180 S&S
(Euro 5)
BVM6 EAT8 EAT8 EAT8

Gearboxes
(Manual 6-speed) (Automatic 8-speed) (Automatic 8-speed) (Automatic 8-speed)
Codes DV5RC STTd ML6C DV5RC STTd ATN8 DW10FC – AMN8 DW10FC STTa AMN8
Model codes
YHZ YHZ EHZ EHZ
J...
Cubic capacity (cm3) 1,499 1,499 1,997 1,997
Max. power: EC standard (kW) 96 96 130 130
Fuel Diesel Diesel Diesel Diesel
Braked trailer (within the GTW limit) (kg)

1,450 1,250 1,650 1,650
on a 10% or 12% gradient
Unbraked trailer (kg) 750 750 750 750
Maximum authorised nose weight (kg) 58 50 66 66
224
CITROËN Connect Radio
CITROËN Connect Radio For safety reasons and because they First steps
require continued attention on the part of
With the engine running, a press
the driver, the following operations must
mutes the sound.
be carried out with the vehicle stationary
With the ignition off, a press turns
and the ignition on:
the system on.
- Using a smartphone.
- Pairing a Bluetooth mobile phone to Increase or decrease the volume using
the hands-free Bluetooth system of the the wheel or the "plus" or "minus" buttons
audio system. (depending on the equipment).
- Smartphone connection operations for
Use the buttons on either side of or below the
CarPlay ®, MirrorLinkTM or Android Auto
touch screen for access to the menus, then
(certain applications interrupt their
Multimedia audio system – display when the vehicle starts to move
press the virtual buttons in the touch screen.
Applications – Bluetooth® again). Depending on the model, use the "Source" or

telephone - The configuration of profiles. "Menu" buttons on the left of the touch screen
for access to the menus, then press the virtual
Contents buttons in the touch screen.
First steps 1
Steering mounted controls 2 The system is protected in such a way that
At all times it is possible to display the rolling
Menus 3 it will only operate in the vehicle.
menus by pressing the screen briefly with three
Applications 5 The display of the message Energy
Radio 5 fingers.
Economy Mode signals that a change to
DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) radio 7 standby is imminent. All of the touch areas of the screen are white.
Media 8 For pages with multiple tabs at the bottom of
Telephone 10 the screen, it is possible to switch between
Settings 14 The link below gives access to the OSS pages either by tapping the tab for the desired
Frequently asked questions 16 (Open Source Software) code for the page, or by using a finger, sliding the pages to
system. the left or to the right.
The various functions and settings https://www.groupe-psa.com/fr/oss/ Press in the grey zone to go back up a level or
described differ according to the version https://www.groupe-psa.com/en/oss/ to confirm.
.
and configuration of the vehicle.
1
Press the back arrow to go back a level or

confirm.
Steering mounted controls –
The touch screen is of the "capacitive" Type 1
type.
To clean the screen, use a soft, non-
abrasive cloth (e.g. spectacles cloth) with
no additional product. Radio:
Do not use sharp objects on the screen. Select the previous/next preset radio
Do not touch the screen with wet hands. station.
Select the previous/next item in
In the "Settings" menu it is possible to a menu or a list.
Certain information is displayed permanently in create a profile for just one person or Media:
the upper bar of the touch screen: a group of people with shared interests, Select the previous/next track.
- Reminder of the air conditioning information with the possibility of entering multiple Select the previous/next item in
(depending on version), and direct access to settings (radio presets, audio settings, a menu or a list.
the corresponding menu. ambiences, etc.); these settings are taken
- Reminder of the Radio Media and into account automatically.
Telephone menu information. Radio:
- Reminder of the privacy information. Short press: display the list of radio
- Access to the Settings of the touch screen stations.
and digital instrument panel. Long press: update the list.
In very hot conditions, the volume may Media:
Selection of the audio source (depending on be limited to protect the system. It may go Short press: display the list of
equipment): into standby (screen and sound off) for at folders.
- FM/DAB/AM radio stations (depending on least 5 minutes. Long press: display the available
equipment). The return to normal takes place when sorting options.
- Telephone connected via Bluetooth and the temperature in the passenger
Bluetooth multimedia broadcast (streaming). Change audio source (radio; USB;
compartment has dropped.
- USB memory stick. AUX if equipment connected; CD;
- Media player connected via the auxiliary streaming).
socket (depending on equipment).
Confirm a selection.
- CD player (depending on equipment).
2
Increase volume. Media (short press): change the

multimedia source.
Menus
Telephone (short press): start Applications
Decrease volume. telephone call. Depending on equipment/Depending on version.
Call in progress (short press):
Access configurable equipment.
access telephone menu.
Mute/restore sound by Telephone (long press): reject an
simultaneously pressing the incoming call, end call; when no call
increase and decrease volume is in progress, access telephone
buttons. menu.
Radio (rotate): automatic search for

Steering mounted controls – the previous/next station.
Type 2 Media (rotate): previous/next track,
move in a list.
Short press: confirm a selection; if
nothing selected, access to presets.
Voice commands:
This control is located on the
steering wheel or at the end of the
Radio Media
lighting control stalk (depending on Depending on equipment/Depending on version.
Radio: display the list of stations.
equipment). Media: display the list of tracks. Select an audio source or radio
Short press, smartphone voice Radio (press and hold): update the station.
commands via the system. list of stations received.
Increase volume.
Decrease volume.
Mute by pressing the volume
increase and decrease buttons
simultaneously (depending on
.
equipment).
Restore the sound by pressing one
of the two volume buttons.
3
Telephone Navigation
Depending on equipment/Depending on version. Depending on equipment/Depending on version.
Connect a telephone by Bluetooth®. Configure the navigation and select
Operate certain applications on your destination via MirrorLinkTM,
a smartphone connected via CarPlay ® or Android Auto.
MirrorLinkTM, CarPlay ® or Android
Auto.
Driving
Depending on equipment/Depending on version.
Activate, deactivate or configure
certain vehicle functions.
Air conditioning
Settings Manage various temperature and air
flow settings.
Configure a personal profile and/
or configure the sound (balance,
ambience, etc.) and the display
(language, units, date, time, etc.).
18,5 21,5
4
Applications Managing messages Press this button to edit and modify

the existing text.
Viewing photos Press Applications to display the
primary page. Press this button to write a new
Insert a USB memory stick in the USB socket. message.
Press "SMS".
To protect the system, do not use a USB Press the basket to delete the
hub. message.
Select the "SMS" tab.
The system can read folders and image files in
the formats: .tiff; .gif; .jpg/jpeg; .bmp;. png. Press this button to select the
display settings for messages. Radio
Press Applications to display the Selecting a station
primary page. Press this button to search for and
Press Radio Media to display the
select a recipient.
Press "Photos". primary page.
Press one of the buttons for an

Select the "Quick messages" tab.
automatic search for radio stations.
Select a folder.
Press this button to select the
display settings for messages. Or
Select an image to view.
Move the slider for a manual search
for frequencies up or down.
Press this button to write a new
Press this button to display the
message.
details of the photo.
Or
Press the basket alongside the
Press the back arrow to go back selected message to delete it. Press the frequency.
a level.
Press this button alongside the
.
selected message to display the Enter the FM and AM waveband
secondary page. values using the virtual keypad.
5
Press "OK" to confirm. Presetting a station RDS, if activated, allows you to continue
listening to the same station by automatically
Select a radio station or frequency.
retuning to alternative frequencies. However,
Radio reception may be affected by the Make a short press on the star in certain conditions, coverage of an RDS
use of electrical equipment not approved outline. If the star is solid, the radio station may not be assured throughout the
by the Brand, such as a USB charger station is already preset. entire country as radio stations do not cover
connected to the 12 V socket. 100% of the territory. This explains the loss
The exterior environment (hills, buildings, Or of reception of the station during a journey.
tunnels, basement car parks, etc.)
may block reception, including in RDS
mode. This behaviour is normal in the Press "Preset". Displaying text information
propagation of radio waves and does not
Make a long press on one of the
indicate any failure of the audio system.
buttons to preset the station.
The "Radio Text" function allows
information transmitted by the radio
Activating/Deactivating RDS station and related to the station or the
song playing to be displayed.
Changing waveband Press Radio Media to display the
primary page.
Press Radio Media to display the Press Radio Media to display the
primary page. primary page.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the secondary page.
secondary page. secondary page.
Activate/deactivate "RDS".
Press "Band" to change waveband. Activate/deactivate "INFO".
Press in the grey zone to confirm.
Press in the grey area to confirm.
6
Playing TA messages Select the "Tone" or "Balance" or

"Sound" or "Voice" or "Ringtones"
DAB (Digital Audio
The TA (Traffic Announcement) function
tab to configure the audio settings. Broadcasting) radio
gives priority to TA alert messages. Terrestrial Digital Radio
To operate, this function needs good Press the back arrow to confirm.
reception of a radio station that transmits
Digital radio provides higher quality sound.
this type of message. While traffic
The different "multiplexes/ensembles"
information is being broadcast, the current
offer a choice of radio stations arranged in
media is automatically interrupted so that
In the "Tone" tab, the Ambience audio alphabetical order.
the TA message can be heard. Normal
settings, as well as Bass, Medium and
play of the media previously playing is
Treble are different and independent for
resumed at the end of the message. Press Radio Media to display the
each audio source.
In the "Balance" tab, the All passengers, primary page.
Driver and Front only settings are
Press Radio Media to display the Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
common to all sources.
primary page. secondary page.
In the "Sound" tab, activate or deactivate
"Volume linked to speed", "Auxiliary Press "Band" to select the "DAB
input" and "Touch tones". band".
secondary page.
Activate/deactivate "TA". Press in the grey zone to confirm.

The balance/distribution (or spatialisation
with the Arkamys© system) is audio
processing that allows the quality of the FM-DAB tracking
Audio settings sound to be adapted according to the
"DAB" does not cover 100% of the
number of passengers in the vehicle.
Press Radio Media to display the territory.
primary page. When the digital radio signal is poor,
On-board audio: the Arkamys Sound the "FM-DAB tracking" allows you to
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the Staging © optimises the distribution of continue listening to the same station,
.
secondary page. sound in the passenger compartment. by automatically switching to the
Press "Audio settings". corresponding "FM" analogue station (if
there is one).
7

primary page.
Media Auxiliary socket (AUX)

USB socket Depending on equipment
secondary page.
Activate/deactivate "FM-DAB
tracking".
This source is only available if "Auxiliary input"

has been checked in the audio settings.
If "FM-DAB tracking" is activated, there Insert the USB memory stick in the USB socket
may be a difference of a few seconds or connect the USB device to the USB socket Connect a portable device (MP3 player, etc.) to
when the system switches to FM analogue using a suitable cable (not supplied). the auxiliary Jack socket using an audio cable
radio with sometimes a variation in (not supplied).
volume. To protect the system, do not use a USB
First adjust the volume on the portable device
Once the digital signal quality is restored, hub.
(to a high level). Then adjust the volume of the
the system automatically changes back
audio system.
to "DAB". The system builds playlists (in temporary
Management of the controls is via the portable
memory), an operation which can take from
device.
a few seconds to several minutes at the first
If the "DAB" station being listened to is
connection.
not available on FM, or if the "FM-DAB
tracking" is not activated, the sound will
Reduce the number of non-music files and the Selecting the source
number of folders to reduce the waiting time.
cut out while the digital signal is too weak. Press Radio Media to display the
The playlists are updated every time the
ignition is switched off or a USB memory stick primary page.
is connected. The lists are memorised: if they Press the "SOURCES" button.
are not modified, the subsequent loading time
will be shorter. Choose the source.
8
Bluetooth® streaming The classifications available are those of Information and advice
the portable device connected (artists/
Streaming allows you to listen to music from
albums/genres/playlists/audio books/ The system supports USB mass storage
your smartphone.
podcasts). It is also possible to use devices, BlackBerry ® devices or Apple ®
The Bluetooth profile must be activated, first
a classification structured in the form of players via the USB sockets. The adapter
adjust the volume on the portable device (to
a library. cable is not supplied.
a high level).
The default classification used is by artist. Device management is via the audio
Then adjust the volume of the system.
To modify the classification used, return system controls.
If play does not start automatically, it may be to the first level of the menu then select Other devices, not recognised on
necessary to start the audio playback from the the desired classification (playlists for connection, must be connected to the
smartphone. example) and confirm to go down through auxiliary socket using a Jack cable (not
Control is from the portable device or by using the menu to the desired track. supplied) or via Bluetooth streaming,
the system's touch buttons. depending on compatibility.
Once connected in Streaming mode, the

smartphone is considered to be a media The version of software in the audio system
source. may not be compatible with the generation of
the Apple ® player. To protect the system, do not use a USB
hub.
Connecting Apple players ®
Connect the Apple ® player to the USB socket The audio system will only play audio files
using a suitable cable (not supplied). with ".wav", ".wma", ".aac", ".ogg" and ".mp3"
Play starts automatically. file extensions and with a bit rate of between
Control is via the audio system. 32 Kbps and 320 Kbps.
It also supports VBR (Variable Bit Rate) mode.
No other file types (".mp4", etc.) can be read.
Files of the ".wma" type should be to the wma
9 standard.
Sampling frequencies supported are 11, 22,
44 and 48 kHz.
.
9
It is recommended that file names are less

The synchronisation of a smartphone
Telephone not connected by
than 20 characters long and do not contain any
allows users to display applications
Bluetooth®
special characters (e.g. " ? . ; ù) so as to avoid
adapted to the CarPlay ®, MirrorLinkTM When connecting a smartphone
any reading or display problems.
or Android Auto technology of the to the system, it is recommended
Use only USB memory sticks in FAT32 format smartphone on the vehicle screen. For that Bluetooth® be started on the
(File Allocation Table). the CarPlay ® technology, the CarPlay ® smartphone.
function must be activated on the
Connect a USB cable. The
It is recommended that the original USB smartphone beforehand.
smartphone charges when
cable for the portable device be used. For the communication process between
connected by the USB cable.
the smartphone and the system to
In order to be able to play a burned CDR or work, it is essential in all cases that the From the system, press
CDRW, select standards ISO 9660 level 1, 2, or smartphone is unlocked. "Telephone" to display the primary
Joliet, if possible, when burning the CD. As the principles and standards are page.
If the disc is burned in another format, it may constantly changing, it is recommended
that you keep the smartphone's Press "MirrorLinkTM" to start the
not be played correctly.
operating system up-to-date, as well application in the system.
It is recommended that the same burning
standard be always used on an individual disc, as the date and time of the smartphone
with the lowest speed possible (4x maximum) and of the system. Depending on the smartphone, it may be
for the best acoustic quality. For the list of eligible smartphones, go to necessary to activate the "MirrorLinkTM" function.
In the particular case of a multi-session CD, the the Brand's national website.
During the procedure, several
Joliet standard is recommended. screen pages relating to certain
functions are displayed.
Accept to start and complete the
Telephone
MirrorLinkTM smartphone connection.
USB sockets connection Telephone connected by
Depending on equipment, for more information
Bluetooth®
on the USB sockets compatible with the The "MirrorLinkTM" function requires Connect a USB cable. The
CarPlay ®, MirrorLinkTM or Android Auto a compatible smartphone and smartphone charges when
applications, refer to the "Ease of use and applications. connected by the USB cable.
comfort" section.
From the system, press
"Telephone" to display the primary
page.
10
Press the "TEL" button to display the If the smartphone is already Android Auto smartphone
secondary page. connected by Bluetooth ®.
connection
Press "MirrorLinkTM" to start the
On the smartphone, download the
application in the system. Connect a USB cable. The Android Auto application.
Once the connection is established, a page
The "Android Auto" function requires the
is displayed with the applications already From the system, press
use of a compatible smartphone and
downloaded to the smartphone and compatible "Telephone" to display the primary
applications.
with the MirrorLinkTM technology. page.
Access to the different audio sources remains Press the "TEL" button to go to the secondary Telephone not connected by
available in the margin of the MirrorLinkTM page. Bluetooth®
display, using the touch buttons located in the
upper bar. Press "CarPlay" to display the Connect a USB cable. The
Access to the menus for the system is possible CarPlay ® interface. smartphone charges when
at any time using the dedicated buttons. connected by the USB cable.

There may be a wait for the availability of On connecting the USB cable, the
"Telephone" to display the primary
applications, depending on the quality of CarPlay ® function deactivates the
page.
the network. system's Bluetooth® mode.
Press "Android Auto" to start the
application in the system.
CarPlay smartphone
®
When the USB cable is disconnected and
connection the ignition is switched off then back on,
Depending on the smartphone, it may be
the system will not automatically switch to
Connect a USB cable. The necessary to activate the "Android Auto" function.
Radio Media mode, a change of source
smartphone charges when will have to be done manually. During the procedure, several
connected by the USB cable. screen pages relating to certain
It is possible to go to the CarPlay ® functions are displayed.
From the system, press Telephone
navigation at any time by pressing Accept to start and complete the
.
to display the CarPlay ® interface.
the system's Navigation button. connection.
Or
11
When connecting a smartphone Pairing a Bluetooth® If the pairing procedure fails, it is recommended
to the system, it is recommended
that Bluetooth® be started on the
telephone that you deactivate and then reactivate the
Bluetooth function on the telephone.
smartphone.
Activate the Bluetooth function on the
Telephone connected by telephone and ensure that it is "visible to
Depending on the type of telephone, the
Bluetooth® all" (telephone configuration).
option is given to accept or not accept the
transfer of contacts and messages.
"Telephone" to display the primary Procedure from the telephone
page. Select the name of the system in the
Automatic reconnection
list of devices detected.
Press the "TEL" button to display the On return to the vehicle, if the last
secondary page. telephone connected is present again, it is
In the system, accept the connection request automatically recognised and within about
Press "Android Auto" to start the
from the telephone. 30 seconds of switching on the ignition,
application in the system.
the pairing is established automatically
To complete the pairing, whichever (Bluetooth activated).
procedure used (from the telephone or
Different audio sources remain accessible in from the system), ensure that the code
the margin of the Android Auto display, using is the same in the system and in the To modify the connection profile:
touch buttons in the upper bar. telephone. Press Telephone to display the
Access to the menus for the system is possible primary page.
at any time using the dedicated buttons.
Procedure from the system Press the "TEL" button to go to the secondary
page.
Press Telephone to display the
primary page. Press "Bluetooth connection" to
There may be a wait for the availability of display the list of paired devices.
applications, depending on the quality of Press "Bluetooth search".
the network. The list of telephones detected is
displayed.
Press the "details" button of a paired
device.
Select the name of the chosen
telephone in the list.
12
The system offers to connect the telephone Managing paired telephones Receiving a call
with 3 profiles:
- "Telephone" (hands-free kit, telephone An incoming call is announced by a ring and
This function allows the connection or
only), a superimposed display in the screen.
disconnection of a device as well as the
- "Audio streaming" (streaming: wireless Make a short press on the steering
deletion of a pairing.
playing of the audio files on the telephone), mounted PHONE button to accept
- "Internet data". an incoming call.
Select one or more profiles. And
primary page.
Make a long press
Press "OK" to confirm. Press the "TEL" button to go to the secondary
page.
Press "Bluetooth connection" to on the steering mounted PHONE

The ability of the system to connect to just
display the list of paired devices. button to reject the call.
one profile depends on the telephone.
All three profiles may connect by default. Or
Press on the name of the telephone Press "End call".
chosen in the list to disconnect it.
The services available depend on Press again to connect it.
the network, the SIM card and the Making a call
compatibility of the Bluetooth devices
used. Check the user guide for the Using the telephone is not recommended
telephone and with the service provider Deleting a telephone while driving.
for the available services. Parking the vehicle.
Press the basket at the top right Make the call using the steering mounted
of the screen to display a basket controls.
The profiles compatible with the system alongside the telephone chosen.
are: HFP, OPP, PBAP, A2DP, AVRCP,
MAP and PAN.
Calling a new number
telephone chosen to delete it. Press Telephone to display the
Go to the Brand's website for more information
.
primary page.
(compatibility, additional help, etc.).
Enter the phone number using the
digital keypad.
13
Press "Call" to start the call. Press this button to enter a name for
It is always possible to make a call directly
the profile using the virtual keypad.
from the telephone; as a safety measure,
first park the vehicle.
Calling a contact
Press "OK" to save.
primary page.
Or make a long press

Setting the ringtone Press the back arrow to confirm.
primary page. Press this button to activate the
on the steering mounted TEL button. profile.
secondary page. Press the back arrow again to
Press "Contacts".
Press "Ring volume" to display the confirm.
Select the desired contact from the list offered. volume bar.
Press this button to reinitialise the
Press "Call". profile selected.
Press the arrows or move the slider
Calling a recently used

to set the ring volume.
Adjusting brightness
number Press Settings to display the
Press Telephone to display the Settings primary page.
primary page. Press Brightness.
Setting the profiles
Or
Make a long press Press Settings to display the Move the slider to adjust the brightness
primary page. of the screen and/or of the instrument
panel (according to version).
Press "Profiles".
on the steering mounted button.
Select "Profile 1" or "Profile 2" or "Profile 3"

Press "Recent calls".
or "Common profile".
Select the desired contact from the list offered.
14
Modifying system settings Activate or deactivate: Press the back arrow to confirm.
- "No sharing (data, vehicle
position)".
- "Data sharing only"
Press Settings to display the
- "Sharing data and the vehicle
Select the language
primary page.
position" Press Settings to display the
Press "Configuration" to go to the
primary page.
secondary page.
Press the back arrow to confirm. Press "Configuration" to go to the
Press "System configuration".
secondary page.

Press the "Units" tab to change the units of Select "Language" to change the
primary page.
distance, fuel consumption and temperature. language.
secondary page. Press the back arrow to confirm.
Press the "Factory settings" tab to return to
the initial settings.
Press "Screen configuration".
Returning the system to factory settings

Setting the time
activates the English language by default Press Settings to display the
(depending on version). Press "Brightness".
primary page.
Move the slider to adjust the brightness
Press the "System info" tab to display the of the screen and/or of the instrument Press "Configuration" to go to the
versions of the different modules installed in panel (according to version). secondary page.
the system. Press the back arrow to confirm.
Press "Date and time".
Press the "Privacy" tab,
or
Press "Animation".
Press Settings to display the Select "Time".
primary page. Activate or deactivate: "Automatic
scrolling". Press this button to adjust the time
.
Press "Privacy" to activate or using the virtual keypad.
Select "Animated transitions".
deactivate the privacy data mode.
15
Press "OK" to save the time. Select "Date".

Frequently asked questions
Press this button to define the date.
The following information groups together the
Press this button to define the time
answers to the most frequently asked questions
zone.
concerning the system.
Press the back arrow to save the
Select the display format for the time date.
(12h/24h).
Activate or deactivate summer time Select the display format of the date.
(+1 hour).
Activate or deactivate Press the back arrow again to
synchronisation with GPS (UTC). confirm.
Press the back arrow to save the

Adjustment of the time and date is only
settings.
available if "GPS Synchronisation" is
deactivated.
The system does not automatically manage
the change between winter and summer
time (depending on the country of sale).
Setting the date

primary page.

secondary page.
Press "Date and time".
16
Radio
QUESTION RESPONSE SOLUTION
The reception quality of the tuned radio station The vehicle is too far from the transmitter of Activate the "RDS" function by means of the
gradually deteriorates or the stored stations are the station or no transmitter is present in the upper band to enable the system to check
not working (no sound, 87,5 MHz is displayed, geographical area. whether there is a more powerful transmitter in
etc.). the geographical area.
The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, This phenomenon is normal and does not
basement car parks, etc.) blocks reception, indicate a failure of the audio equipment.
including in RDS mode.
The aerial is absent or has been damaged (for Have the aerial checked by a dealer.
example when going through a car wash or into
an underground car park).
I cannot find some radio stations in the list of The station is not received or has changed its Press the round arrow on the "List" tab of the
received stations. name in the list. "Radio" page.
The name of the radio station changes.
Some radio stations send other information
in place of their name (the title of the song for
example).
The system interprets these details as the
station name.
.
17
Media
Playback of my USB memory stick starts only Some files supplied with the memory stick Delete the files supplied with the memory stick
after a very long wait (around 2 to 3 minutes). may greatly slow down access to reading and limit the number of sub-folders in the file
the memory stick (multiplication by 10 of the structure on the memory stick.
catalogue time).
Some information characters in the currently The audio system does not display some types Use standard characters to name tracks and
playing media are not displayed correctly. of characters. folders.
Playback of streaming files does not start. The connected device does not automatically Start playback from the device.
launch playback.
Names of tracks and playing time are not The Bluetooth profile does not allow the
displayed on the audio streaming screen. transfer of this information.
18
Telephone
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION
I cannot connect my Bluetooth telephone. The telephone's Bluetooth function may be Check that the telephone has Bluetooth
switched off or the telephone may not be switched on.
visible. Check in the telephone settings that it is
"visible to all".
The Bluetooth telephone is not compatible with It is possible to check the compatibility of the
the system. telephone on the Brand's website (services).
Android Auto and CarPlay do not work. Android Auto and CarPlay may not activate if Use authentic USB cables to ensure
the USB cables are of poor quality. compatibility.
The volume of the telephone connected in The sound depends on both the system and Increase the volume of the audio system, to
Bluetooth mode is inaudible. the telephone. maximum if required, and increase the volume
of the telephone if necessary.
Ambient noise affects the quality of the Reduce the ambient noise level (close
telephone call. windows, reduce ventilation, slow down, etc.).
The contacts are not listed in alphabetical Some telephones offer display options. Change the telephone directory display
order. Depending on the settings chosen, contacts settings.
can be transferred in a specific order.
.
19
Settings
When changing the setting of treble and bass, The selection of an ambience setting imposes Modify the treble and bass or ambience
the ambience is deselected. the settings for treble and bass and vice versa. settings to obtain the desired musical
When changing the ambience setting, the ambience.
treble and bass settings are reset.
When changing the balance setting, The selection of a distribution setting imposes Modify the balance setting or the distribution
distribution is deselected. the balance settings and vice versa. setting to obtain the desired sound quality.
When changing the distribution setting, the
balance setting is deselected.
There is a difference in sound quality between To allow for optimal listening quality, the Check that the audio settings are adapted
the different audio sources. audio settings can be tailored to different to the sources listened to. Adjust the audio
sound sources, which can generate audible functions to the middle position.
differences when changing source.
When the engine is off, the system switches off When the engine is switched off, the system's Start the engine to increase the charge of the
after several minutes of use. operating time depends on the state of charge of battery.
the battery.
The switch-off is normal: the system automatically
goes into energy economy mode and switches off
to maintain an adequate charge in the battery.
20
CITROËN Connect Nav
CITROËN Connect Nav The various functions and settings The link below gives access to the OSS
described differ according to the version (Open Source Software) code for the
and configuration of the vehicle. system.
https://www.groupe-psa.com/fr/oss/
https://www.groupe-psa.com/en/oss/
For safety reasons and because they
require continued attention on the part of
the driver, the following operations must
be carried out with the vehicle stationary
First steps
and the ignition switched off: With the engine running, a press
- Using a smartphone. mutes the sound.
- Pairing a Bluetooth mobile phone to With the ignition off, a press turns
GPS navigation – the hands-free Bluetooth system of the the system on.
Applications – Multimedia audio system.
Increase or decrease the volume using
audio system – Bluetooth® - Smartphone connection operations for
the wheel or the "plus" or "minus" buttons
telephone CarPlay ®, MirrorLinkTM or Android Auto
(certain applications interrupt their (depending on the equipment).
Contents display when the vehicle starts to move Use the menu buttons on either side of or
First steps 1 again). below the touch screen for access to the
Steering mounted controls 2 - Watching a video (the video stops menus, then press the virtual buttons in the
Menus 3 when the vehicle starts to move again). touch screen.
Voice commands 4 - The configuration of profiles.
Navigation 12 Depending on the model, use the "Source" or
Connected navigation 14 "Menu" buttons to access the rolling menus,
Applications 17 then press the virtual buttons in the touch
Radio 20 screen.
The system is protected in such a way that
DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) radio 22
it will only operate in the vehicle. Display the rolling menus at any time by
Media 22
The display of the message Energy pressing the screen briefly with three fingers.
Telephone 24
Settings 28 Economy Mode signals that a change to
standby is imminent. All of the touch areas of the screen are white.
Frequently asked questions 30
.
Press the back arrow to go back a level.
Press "OK" to confirm.
1
The touch screen is of the "capacitive" Using the "Settings" menu, create a profile
type. for just one person or a group of people
To clean the screen, use a soft, non- with common interests, with the possibility
abrasive cloth (e.g. spectacles cloth) with of entering a multitude of settings (radio
no additional product. presets, audio settings, navigation history,
Do not use sharp objects on the screen. contact favourites, etc.); these settings are
Do not touch the screen with wet hands. taken into account automatically.
Certain information is displayed permanently

in the side bars or in the upper bar of the touch In very hot conditions, the volume may
screen (depending on equipment): be limited to protect the system. It may go
- Reminder of the air conditioning information into standby (screen and sound off) for at
(depending on version), and direct access to least 5 minutes.
Selection of the audio source (depending on
the corresponding menu. The return to normal takes place when
equipment):
- Go directly to the selection of the audio the temperature in the passenger
- FM/DAB/AM radio stations (depending on
source, to the list of radio stations (or list of compartment has dropped.
equipment).
titles depending on the source).
- Telephone connected via Bluetooth and
- Go to the "Notifications" of messages,
Bluetooth multimedia broadcast (streaming).
emails, map updates and, depending on the
services, the navigation notifications.
- USB memory stick. Steering mounted controls
- Media player connected via the auxiliary
- Go to the settings for the touch screen and Voice commands:
socket (depending on equipment).
the digital instrument panel. This control is located on the
- CD player (depending on equipment).
- Video (depending on equipment). steering wheel or at the end of the
lighting control stalk (depending on
equipment).
Short press, system voice
commands.
Long press, smartphone voice
commands via the system.
Increase volume.
2
Decrease volume.
Mute by pressing the volume
Menus
increase and decrease buttons Connected navigation
simultaneously (depending on Depending on equipment/Depending on
equipment). version.
Restore the sound by pressing one
Enter navigation settings and
of the two volume buttons.
choose a destination.
Media (short press): change the Use services available in real time,
multimedia source. depending on equipment.
Telephone (short press): start

telephone call.
Radio Media
Call in progress (short press): Depending on equipment/Depending on
access telephone menu. version.
Telephone (long press): reject an Select an audio source, a radio station,
incoming call, end call; when no call display photographs.
is in progress, access telephone
menu.
Radio (rotate): automatic search for

the previous/next station. FM 87.5 MHz
Media (rotate): previous/next track, Applications
move in a list. Depending on equipment/Depending on
Short press: confirm a selection; if version.
nothing selected, access to presets. Operate certain applications on
a smartphone connected via
CarPlay ®, MirrorLinkTM (available
depending on the country) or
Android Auto.
Radio: display the list of stations. Check the state of the Bluetooth ®
Media: display the list of tracks. and Wi-Fi connections.
.
Radio (press and hold): update the
list of stations received.
3
Telephone Vehicle Voice commands

Depending on equipment/Depending on version. Depending on equipment/Depending on version. Steering mounted controls
Connect a telephone via Bluetooth®, Activate, deactivate or configure
read messages and emails and send certain vehicle functions. Voice commands:
quick messages. Voice commands can be made from
any screen page after a short press
on the "Voice commands" button
located on the steering wheel or
at the end of the lighting control
stalk (depending on equipment), as
long as there is no telephone call in
progress.
To ensure that voice commands are

Settings Air conditioning always recognised by the system, please
Depending on equipment/Depending on version. follow these recommendations:
Depending on equipment/Depending on version. - use natural language in a normal
Configure a personal profile and/ Manage various temperature and air tone without breaking up words or
or configure the sound (balance, flow settings. raising your voice.
ambience, etc.) and the display - always wait for the "beep" (audible
(language, units, date, time, etc.). signal) before speaking.
- for best operation, it is recommended
that the windows and sunroof
be closed to avoid extraneous
interference (depending on version).
18,5 21,5 - before making a voice command, ask
other passengers not to speak.
4
First steps Information – Using the system When the voice commands are
activated by briefly pressing the
Example of a "voice command" for button, help is displayed on the
navigation: Press the Push To Talk button touch screen, offering various
"Navigate to address 11 regent and tell me what you'd like menus and allowing interaction with
street, London" after the tone. Remember you the system by voice.
Example of a "voice command" for can interrupt me at any time
the radio and media: by pressing this button. If you
"Play artist Madonna" press it again while I'm waiting
Example of a "voice command" for for you to speak, it'll end the
the telephone: conversation. If you need to
"Call David Miller' " start over, say "cancel". If you
want to undo something, say
"undo". And to get information
The voice commands, with a choice of and tips at any time, just say
17 languages (Arabic, Brazilian, Czech, "help". If you ask to me do
Danish, Dutch, English, Farsi, French, something and there's some
German, Italian, Norwegian, Polish, information missing that I need, After a menu has been selected, some
Portuguese, Russian, Spanish, Swedish, I'll give you some examples commands are proposed.
Turkish), are made using the language or take you through it step by
previously chosen and set in the system. step. There's more information
For some voice commands, there are available in "novice" mode.
alternative synonyms. You can set the dialogue mode
Example: Guide to/Navigate to/Go to/... to "expert" when you feel
The voice commands in Arabic for: comfortable.
"Navigate to address" and "Display POI in
the city", are not available.
.
5
Global voice commands
Voice commands Help messages
There are lots of topics I can help you with. You can say: "help with phone", "help with navigation",
"help with media" or "help with radio". For an overview on how to use voice controls, you can say
"help with voice controls".
Say "yes" if I got that right. Otherwise, say "no" and we'll start that again.
Set dialogue mode as novice – expert
Select user 1/Select profile John
Increase temperature
Decrease temperature
6
"Navigation" voice
commands
Navigate home To plan a route, say "navigate to" followed by the address, the contact name or an intersection. For
example, "navigate to address 11 Regent Street, London", "navigate to contact, John Miller", or
Navigate to work "navigate to intersection of Regent Street, London". You can specify if it's a preferred address, or
a Point of Interest. For example, say "navigate to preferred address, Tennis club", or "navigate to
Navigate to preferred address, Tennis club
POI Heathrow Airport in London". Or, you can just say, "navigate home". To see Points of Interest
on a map, you can say things like "show POI hotels in Banbury". For more information say "help
Navigate to contact, John Miller with points of interest" or "help with route guidance".
To choose a destination, say something like "navigate to line three" or "select line two". If you can't
Navigate to address 11 regent street, find the destination but the street's right, say for example "select the street in line three". To move
London around a displayed list, you can say "next page" or "previous page". You can undo your last action
and start over by saying "undo", or say "cancel" to cancel the current action.
Tell me the remaining distance You can say "stop" or "resume route guidance". To get information about your current route,
you can say "tell me the remaining time", "remaining distance" or "arrival time". To learn more
Tell me the remaining time commands, try saying "help with navigation".
Tell me the arrival time
Stop route guidance
.
7
Show POI hotel at the destination To see points of interest on a map, you can say things like "show hotels in Banbury", "show nearby
parking", "show hotel at the destination" or "show petrol station along the route". If you prefer to
navigate directly to a point of interest, you can say "navigate to nearby petrol station". If you feel
Show nearby POI petrol station
you are not being well understood, try to say the word "POI" in front of the point of interest. For
example say "navigate to POI restaurant at the destination".
Navigate to POI Heathrow Airport in London To choose a POI, say something like "select line 2". If you've searched for a Point of Interest and
don't see the one you're after, you can filter further by saying something like "select POI in line 2",
or "select the city in line 3". You can also scroll through the list by saying "next page" or "previous
Navigate to POI petrol station along the page".
route
Depending on the country, give the destination instructions (address) in the language used by the system.
8
"Radio Media" voice

commands
Turn on source radio – Streaming Bluetooth You can select an audio source by saying "turn on source" followed by the device name. For
-… example, "turn on source, Streaming Bluetooth", or "turn on source, radio". Use the command
"play" to specify the type of music you'd like to hear. You can choose between "song", "artist", or
"album". Just say something like "play artist, Madonna", "play song, Hey Jude", or "play album,
Thriller".
Tune to channel BBC Radio 2 You can pick a radio station by saying "tune to" and the station name or frequency. For example
"tune to channel Talksport" or "tune to 98.5 FM". To listen to a preset radio station, say for example
Tune to 98.5 FM "tune to preset number five".
Tune to preset number five
What's playing? To choose what you'd like to play, start by saying "play" and then the item. For example, say "play
song Hey Jude", "play line 3" or "select line 2". You can undo your last action and start over by
saying "undo", or say "cancel" to cancel the current action.
Play song Hey Jude I'm not sure what you'd like to play. Please say "play" and then a song title, an album title, or an
artist name. For example, say "play song Hey Jude", "play artist Madonna" or "play album Thriller".
Play artist Madonna To select a line number from the display, say "select line two". To move around a displayed list,
you can say "next page" or "previous page". You can undo your last action and start over by saying
Play album Thriller "undo", or say "cancel" to cancel the current action.
Media voice commands are available only for a USB connection.
.
9
"Telephone" voice Voice commands Help messages

commands
If there is no telephone connected via
Call David Miller* To make a phone call, say "call" followed by
Bluetooth, a voice message announces:
the contact name, for example: "Call David
"Please first connect a telephone" and the Call voicemail* Miller". You can also include the phone type,
voice session will be closed.
for example: "Call David Miller at home". To
Display calls*
make a call by number, say "dial" followed by
the phone number, for example, "Dial 07776
835 417". You can check your voicemail by
saying "call voicemail". To send a text, say
"send quick message to", followed by the
contact, and then the name of the quick
message you'd like to send. For example,
"send quick message to David Miller, I'll be
late". To display the list of calls, say "display
calls". For more information on SMS, you can
say "help with texting".
To choose a contact, say something like
"select line three". To move around the list
say "next page" or "previous page". You can
undo your last action and start over by saying
"undo", or say "cancel" to cancel the current
action.
* This function is available only if the telephone connected to the system supports downloading of
contacts and recent calls and if the download has been done.
10
"Text message" voice Voice commands Help messages

commands
If there is no telephone connected via Send quick message to Bill Carter, I'll be From the list of quick messages, say the
Bluetooth, a voice message announces: late name of the one you'd like to send. To move
"Please first connect a telephone" and the around the list you can say "go to start", "go to
voice session will be closed. end", "next page" or "previous page". You can
undo your last action and start over by saying
"undo", or say "cancel" to cancel the current
action.
The "Text messages" voice commands

Send SMS to John Miller, I'm just arriving Please say "call" or "send quick message to",
function allows you to dictate and send
and then select a line from the list. To move
an SMS. Send SMS to David Miller at the office, around a list shown on the display, you can
Dictate the text, taking care to make don't wait for me say "go to start", "go to end", "next page"
a short pause between each word.
or "previous page". You can undo your last
At the end of the operation, the voice
action and start over by saying "undo", or say
recognition system will automatically
"cancel" to cancel the current action.
create an SMS.
Listen to most recent message* To hear your last message, you can say
"listen to most recent message". When you
want to send a text, there's a set of quick
messages ready for you to use. Just use the
quick message name and say something like
"send quick message to Bill Carter, I'll be late".
Check the phone menu for the names of the
supported messages.
* This function is available only if the
.
telephone connected to the system supports The system only sends pre-recorded
downloading of contacts and recent calls "Quick messages".
and if the download has been done.
11
Navigation In order to be able to use the navigation, To "My home" or "My work"
it is necessary to fill in the "City", the
Choice of a destination "Street" and the "Number" on the
Press Navigation to display the
To a new destination virtual keyboard or take it from the
primary page.
list in "Contact" or in the "History" of
Press Navigation to display the addresses.
Press the "MENU" button to go to the
primary page. secondary page.
Without confirmation of the house number,
Press the "MENU" button to go to the the navigation system will show one of the Select "My destinations".
secondary page. ends of the street.
Select "Enter address".

To a recent destination Select the "Preferred" tab.
Select "My home".
Select the "Country".
primary page.
Or
Enter the "City", the "Street" and the Select "My work".
"Number" and confirm by pressing
secondary page.
on the suggestions displayed.
Select "My destinations". Or
Press "OK" to select the "Guidance
criteria". Select a preset favourite destination.
And/or Select the "Recent" tab.

Select "See on map" to select the Select the address chosen in the list to display To a contact
"Guidance criteria". the "Guidance criteria".
Press "OK" to start navigation. Press Navigation to display the

Press "OK" to start navigation.
primary page.
Zoom out/in using the touch buttons or Select "Position" to visualise the arrival Press the "MENU" button to go to the
with two fingers on the screen. point geographically. secondary page.
12
Select "My destinations". Press "OK" to start calculation of Explore the map by sliding a finger on the
the route. screen.
Touch the screen with a finger to go to the next
image.
Select the "Contact" tab. To a point on the map Press this button to display the world
Select a contact in the list to start navigation. Press Navigation to display the map.
primary page. Using the grid, select the desired
country or region by zooming.
Explore the map by sliding a finger on the
To points of interest (POI) screen.
Press this button to display or enter
Points of interest (POI) are listed in different Select the destination by pressing on the map. the GPS coordinates.
categories.
Press Navigation to display the Tap the screen to place a marker
A marker is displayed in the middle
primary page. and display the sub-menu.
of the screen, with the "Latitude"
and "Longitude" coordinates.
Press this button to start navigation.
secondary page.
Choose the type of coordinates:
Select "Points of interest". DMS for: Degrees, Minutes, Seconds.
Or DD for: Degrees, Decimals.
Press this button to save the Press this button to start navigation.
address displayed.
Select the "Travel", or "Leisure"
or "Commercial" or "Public" or
"Geographic" tab. Or
A long press on an item opens a list of
POIs nearby. Press this button to save the
Or address displayed.
Select "Search" to enter the name
and address of a POI. To GPS coordinates OR
.
Press this button to enter the value
for "Latitude" using the virtual
primary page.
keypad.
13
And Network connection provided by Network connection provided by

Press this button to enter the value the vehicle the user
for "Longitude" using the virtual
keypad. Activate and enter settings for sharing
the smartphone connection.
TMC (Traffic Message OR

USB connection
Channel) Network connection provided by Connect a USB cable.
the user The smartphone charges when
TMC (Traffic Message Channel) connected by the USB cable.
messages are linked to a European
standard on the broadcasting of traffic Bluetooth connection
information via the RDS system on FM Activate the Bluetooth function on
radio, transmitting traffic information in For the list of eligible smartphones, go to the telephone and ensure that it is
real time. the Brand's national website. visible to all (see the "Applications"
The TMC information is then displayed section).
on a GPS Navigation system map and
taken into account straight away during Wi-Fi connection
navigation, so as to avoid accidents, traffic
jams and closed roads. Select a Wi-Fi network found by the
Connected navigation system and connect.
connection
The display of danger zones depends on Network connection provided by
the legislation in force and subscription to the vehicle This function is only available if it has been
the service.
activated either via the "Notifications" or
The system is automatically
via the "Applications" menu.
connected to the internet, to the
connected services, and does not
Connected navigation require a connection provided by the Press "Notifications".
user via their smartphone.
Depending on version
Select Wi-Fi to activate it.
Depending on the equipment level of the
vehicle
14
OR With the arrival of "TOMTOM Select "Settings".

TRAFFIC", the services will be
Press Applications to display the
available.
primary page.
Select "Map".
The services offered with connected
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the Activate or deactivate:
navigation are as follows.
secondary page. - "Allow declaration of danger
A Connected Services pack:
zones".
Select "Wi-Fi network - Weather,
- "Guidance to final destination
connection". - Filling stations,
on foot"
- Car park,
- "Display recommended
- Traffic,
Select the "Secured" or "Not speed"
- POI local search.
secured" or "Stored" tab. These settings must be made
A Danger zone pack (as an option).
according to each profile.
Select a network.
Select "Alerts".
Processes and standards are constantly
Activate or deactivate:
Using the virtual keypad, enter the changing; for the communication process
- "Advise of car park nearby",
"Key" for the Wi-Fi network and the between the smartphone and the system
"Filling station alert", "Risk
"Password". to work correctly, it is recommended to
areas alert", "Accident black
update the operating system of the
Press "OK" to start the connection. spot alert" then select the
smartphone as well as the date and
alert symbol, "Give an audible
time of the smartphone and of the
warning", "Advise proximity
system.
of POI 1", "Advise proximity of
Usage restrictions: POI 2".
- With CarPlay ®, connection sharing is
only with a Wi-Fi connection.
Settings specific to
- With MirrorLinkTM, connection sharing connected navigation
is only with a USB connection. To have access to connected navigation,
The quality of services depends on the select the option: "Authorise sending
primary page.
quality of the network connection. information" in "Settings".
secondary page.
.
15
Press "OK" to save and distribute Select the "System info" tab.
It is possible to access the "Notifications"
the information.
at any time in the upper bar.
Select "View" to display the versions
Authorising sending of the different modules installed in
information the system.
The display of danger zones depends on
Press Settings to display the Select "Update(s) due".
the legislation in force and subscription to
primary page.
the service.
secondary page. It is possible to download system and map
Notification of "Danger Select "System settings". updates from the Brand's website.
zones" The update procedure is also available
there.
To issue notification of danger zones, Select the "Privacy mode" tab.
select the option: "Allow notification of
danger zones". Activate or deactivate:
- "No sharing (data, vehicle After the updates have downloaded,
position)". installation on the vehicle must be done with
- "Data sharing only" the engine running and vehicle stationary.
primary page. - "Sharing data and the vehicle
position"
Press the "Report a new danger
Displaying the weather
zone" button located in the side bars Press Navigation to display the
or the upper bar of the touch screen "Danger zones" pack primary page.
(depending on equipment). updates
Press Settings to display the Press this button to display the list of
Select the option "Type" to choose primary page. services.
the type of "Danger zone".
Select "View map".
Select the "Speed" option and enter secondary page.
it using the virtual keypad. Select "System settings".
16
Select "Weather".
The synchronisation of a smartphone CarPlay® smartphone
allows users to display applications connection
adapted to the CarPlay ®, MirrorLinkTM
Press this button to display primary Connect a USB cable. The
or Android Auto technology of the
information. smartphone charges when
smartphone on the vehicle screen. For
the CarPlay ® technology, the CarPlay ®
Press this button to display the function must be activated on the
Press "Telephone" to display the
detailed weather information. smartphone beforehand.
CarPlay ® interface.
For the communication process between
the smartphone and the system to Or
The temperature displayed at 6 a.m. will work, it is essential in all cases that the Connect a USB cable. The
be the maximum temperature for the day. smartphone is unlocked. smartphone charges when
The temperature displayed at 6 p.m. will As the principles and standards are connected by the USB cable.
be the minimum temperature for the night. constantly changing, it is recommended
that you keep the smartphone's From the system, press
operating system up-to-date, as well "Applications" to display the
as the date and time of the smartphone primary page.
and of the system.
Applications For the list of eligible smartphones, go to
Press "Connectivity" to go to the CarPlay ®
function.
the Brand's national website.
USB sockets
Press "CarPlay" to display the
Depending on equipment, for more information
CarPlay ® interface.
on the USB sockets compatible with the
CarPlay ®, MirrorLinkTM or Android Auto Connectivity
applications, refer to the "Ease of use and On connecting the USB cable, the
comfort" section. Press Applications to display the
CarPlay ® function deactivates the
primary page.
system's Bluetooth® mode.
Press "Connectivity" to go to the CarPlay ®,
MirrorLinkTM or Android Auto functions. When the USB cable is disconnected and
the ignition is switched off then back on,
.
the system will not automatically switch to
Radio Media mode, a change of source
will have to be done manually.
17
MirrorLinkTM smartphone Once the connection is established, a page Press "Android Auto" to start the
is displayed with the applications already application in the system.
connection downloaded to the smartphone and compatible
with the MirrorLinkTM technology.
The "MirrorLinkTM" function requires During the procedure, several
Access to the different audio sources remains screen pages relating to certain
the use of a compatible smartphone and
available in the margin of the MirrorLinkTM functions are displayed.
compatible applications.
display, using the touch buttons located in the Accept to start and complete the
upper bar. connection.
When connecting a smartphone Access to the menus for the system is possible
to the system, it is recommended at any time using the dedicated buttons. Different audio sources remain accessible in
that Bluetooth® be started on the the margin of the Android Auto display, using
smartphone. touch buttons in the upper bar.
There may be a wait for the availability of Access to the menus for the system is possible
applications, depending on the quality of at any time using the dedicated buttons.
the network.
From the system, press Android Auto smartphone In Android Auto mode, the function to
"Applications" to display the
primary page.
connection display the menus by pressing the screen
briefly with three fingers is deactivated.
Press "Connectivity" to go to the MirrorLinkTM The "Android Auto" function requires
function. the use of a compatible smartphone and
applications.
Press "MirrorLinkTM" to start the There may be a wait for the availability of
application in the system. applications, depending on the quality of
smartphone charges when the network.
Depending on the smartphone, it may be
necessary to activate the "MirrorLinkTM" function.
Vehicle apps
During the procedure, several From the system, press
screen pages relating to certain "Applications" to display the Press Applications to display the
functions are displayed. primary page. primary page.
Accept to start and complete the
connection. Press "Connectivity" to go to the "Android Press "Vehicle apps" to display the
Auto" function. applications home page.
18
Internet browser To complete the pairing, whichever

Connection sharing
procedure used (from the telephone or The system offers to connect the telephone
from the system), ensure that the code with 3 profiles:
primary page.
is the same in the system and in the - "Telephone" (hands-free kit, telephone
telephone. only),
Press "Connectivity" to go to the "Internet
- "Streaming" (streaming: wireless playing of
browser" function.
the audio files on the telephone),
Press "Internet browser" to display the Procedure from the system - "Mobile internet data".
browser home page.
Select the country of residence. primary page.
The "Mobile internet data" profile
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the must be activated for connected
Press "OK" to save and start the secondary page. navigation (where the vehicle does not
browser. have "Emergency and assistance call"
Press "Bluetooth connection". services), having first activated sharing of
this connection on the smartphone.
Connection to the internet is via one of
the network connections provided by the
vehicle or the user. Select "Search".
The list of telephones detected is Select one or more profiles.
displayed.
Bluetooth connection ®
Activate the Bluetooth function on the If the pairing procedure fails, it is recommended
telephone and ensure that it is "visible to that you deactivate and then reactivate the
all" (telephone configuration). Bluetooth function on the telephone. Wi-Fi connection
Select the name of the chosen Network connection by the smartphone's Wi-Fi.
Procedure from the telephone telephone in the list.
Select the system name in the list of
primary page.
devices detected.
.
Depending on the type of telephone, the
option is given to accept or not accept the
In the system, accept the connection request secondary page.
transfer of contacts and messages.
from the telephone.
19
Select "Wi-Fi network

connection".
Select the "Activation" tab to activate or
deactivate sharing of the Wi-Fi connection.
Radio
And/or Selecting a station
Select the "Secured" or "Not Select the "Settings" tab to change the name Press Radio Media to display the
secured" or "Stored" tab. of the system network and the password. primary page.
Select a network. Press "Frequency".

Press one of the buttons for an
Using the virtual keypad, enter the automatic search for radio stations.
"Key" for the Wi-Fi network and the To protect against unauthorised access
"Password". and to make the set of systems as secure Or
as possible, the use of a security code or
Press "OK" to start the connection. Move the slider for a manual search
a complex password is recommended.
for frequencies up or down.
The Wi-Fi connection and the sharing of Or

the Wi-Fi connection are exclusive. Managing connections Press Radio Media to display the
Press Applications to display the primary page.
Wi-Fi connection sharing primary page.

Creation of a local Wi-Fi network by the Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the secondary page.
system. secondary page.
Select "Radio stations" in the
Press Applications to display the Select "Manage connection". secondary page.
primary page.
Press "Frequency".
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the With this function, you can view the access
Enter the values using the virtual
secondary page. to connected services, the availability of
keypad.
Select "Wi-Fi connection sharing". connected services and modify the connection
First enter the units then click on the
mode.
decimals zone to enter the figures
after the decimal point.
20
Press "OK" to confirm. Activating/Deactivating RDS Press Radio Media to display the
primary page.
primary page. Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
Radio reception may be affected by the
secondary page.
use of electrical equipment not approved Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
by the Brand, such as a USB charger secondary page. Select "Radio settings".
connected to the 12 V socket.
The exterior environment (hills, buildings, Select "Radio settings".
tunnels, basement car parks, etc.) Select "General".
may block reception, including in RDS Activate/deactivate "Display radio
Select "General".
mode. This behaviour is normal in the text".
propagation of radio waves and does not Activate/deactivate "Station
indicate any failure of the audio system. tracking".

Playing TA messages
RDS, if activated, allows you to continue The TA (Traffic Announcement) function
Presetting a station listening to the same station by automatic gives priority to TA alert messages.
retuning to alternative frequencies. However, To operate, this function needs good
in certain conditions, coverage of an RDS reception of a radio station that carries
(refer to the corresponding section)
station may not be assured throughout the this type of message. While traffic
Press "Presets". entire country as radio stations do not cover information is being broadcast, the current
Make a long press on one of the 100% of the territory. This explains the loss media is automatically interrupted so that
buttons to preset the station. of reception of the station during a journey. the TA message can be heard. Normal
play of the media previously playing is
resumed at the end of the message.
Changing waveband
Displaying text information
Select "Announcements".
primary page. The "Radio Text" function allows
Activate/Deactivate "Traffic
.
information transmitted by the radio
To change the waveband, press "Band…" announcement".
station and related to the station or the
displayed at the top right of the screen. song playing to be displayed. Press "OK" to confirm.
21
DAB (Digital Audio Select "Radio settings".

Media
Broadcasting) radio USB socket
Select "General".
Terrestrial Digital Radio
Activate/deactivate "FM-DAB
tracking".
Digital radio provides higher quality sound.
The different "multiplexes/ensembles" Activate/deactivate "Station
offer a choice of radio stations arranged in tracking".
alphabetical order.
Press "OK".
Press Radio Media to display the Insert the USB memory stick in the USB socket
primary page. If "DAB-FM auto tracking" is activated, or connect the USB device to the USB socket
there may be a difference of a few using a suitable cable (not supplied).
Press "Band…" at the top right of the screen to
seconds when the system switches to
display the "DAB" waveband.
"FM" analogue radio with sometimes
To protect the system, do not use a USB
DAB-FM tracking a variation in volume.
Once the digital signal quality is restored,
hub.
the system automatically changes back

"DAB" does not cover 100% of the to "DAB". The system builds playlists (in temporary
territory. memory), an operation which can take from
When the digital radio signal is poor, a few seconds to several minutes at the first
"DAB-FM auto tracking" allows you to If the "DAB" station being listened to is not connection.
continue listening to the same station, available on FM ("DAB-FM" option greyed Reduce the number of non-music files and the
by automatically switching to the out), or "DAB-FM auto tracking" is not number of folders to reduce the waiting time.
corresponding FM analogue station (if activated, the sound will cut out while the The playlists are updated every time the
there is one). digital signal is too weak. ignition is switched off or a USB stick is
connected. The lists are memorised: if they are
not modified, the subsequent loading time will
be shorter.
primary page.
secondary page.
22
Auxiliary socket (AUX) Select "Source". If play does not start automatically, it may be
Choose the source. necessary to start the audio playback from the
Depending on equipment telephone.
Watching a video Control is from the portable device or by using
the system's touch buttons.
Insert a USB memory stick in the USB socket.
Once connected in streaming mode, the
Video control commands are accessible telephone is considered to be a media
only through the touch screen. source.
Press Radio Media to display the Connecting Apple® players

primary page.
This source is only available if "Auxiliary input" Connect the Apple ® player to the USB socket
has been checked in the audio settings. using a suitable cable (not supplied).
Select "Sources". Play starts automatically.
Connect a portable device (MP3 player, etc.) to
the auxiliary Jack socket using an audio cable Select Video to start the video. Control is via the audio system.
(not supplied).
First adjust the volume on the portable device The classifications available are those of
(to a high level). Then adjust the volume of the To remove the USB memory stick, the portable device connected (artists/
audio system. press the pause button to stop the albums/genres/playlists/audio books/
Management of the controls is via the portable video, then remove the memory podcasts).
device. stick. The default classification used is by artist.
To modify the classification used, return
CD player Bluetooth® audio streaming to the first level of the menu then select
Depending on equipment the desired classification (playlists for
Streaming allows you to listen to music from
example) and confirm to go down through
Insert the CD in the player. your smartphone.
the menu to the desired track.
The Bluetooth profile must be activated; first
Selecting the source adjust the volume on the portable device (to
.
Press Radio Media to display the a high level).
primary page. Then adjust the volume of the audio system. The version of software in the audio system
may not be compatible with the generation of
the Apple ® player.
23
Information and advice It is recommended that file names are less

than 20 characters long and do not contain any
Telephone
The system supports USB mass storage
special characters (e.g. " ? . ; ù) so as to avoid Pairing a Bluetooth®
devices, BlackBerry ® devices or Apple ®
any reading or display problems.
telephone
players via the USB sockets. The adapter Use only USB memory sticks in FAT32 format
cable is not supplied. (File Allocation Table). Activate the Bluetooth function on the
Device management is via the audio telephone and ensure that it is "visible to
system controls. It is recommended that the original USB all" (telephone configuration).
Other devices, not recognised on cable for the portable device be used.
connection, must be connected to the
auxiliary socket using a Jack cable (not Procedure from the telephone
CD player (depending on equipment).
supplied) or via Bluetooth streaming, Select the system name in the list of
In order to be able to play a burned CDR or
depending on compatibility. devices detected.
CDRW, select standards ISO 9660 level 1, 2, or
Joliet, if possible, when burning the CD.
If the disc is burned in another format, it may In the system, accept the connection request
not be played correctly. from the telephone.
It is recommended that the same burning
To protect the system, do not use a USB
standard be always used on an individual disc, To complete the pairing, whichever
hub.
with the lowest speed possible (4x maximum) procedure used (from the telephone or
for the best acoustic quality. from the system), ensure that the code
The audio system will only play audio files In the particular case of a multi-session CD, the is the same in the system and in the
with ".wma", ".aac", ".flac", ".ogg" and ".mp3" Joliet standard is recommended. telephone.
file extensions and with a bit rate of between
32 Kbps and 320 Kbps.
It also supports VBR (Variable Bit Rate) mode. Procedure from the system
No other file types (".mp4", etc.) can be read. Press Telephone to display the
Files of the ".wma" type should be to the wma primary page.
9 standard.
The sampling rates supported are 32, 44 and Press "Bluetooth search".
48 kHz.
Or
24
Select "Search".
Depending on the type of telephone, the The ability of the system to connect to just
The list of telephones detected is
option is given to accept or not accept the one profile depends on the telephone.
displayed.
transfer of contacts and messages. All three profiles may connect by default.
If the pairing procedure fails, it is recommended

that you deactivate and then reactivate the Automatic reconnection
Bluetooth function on the telephone. The services available depend on
On return to the vehicle, if the last the network, the SIM card and the
Select the name of the chosen telephone connected is present again, it is compatibility of the Bluetooth devices
telephone in the list. automatically recognised and within about used. Check the user guide for the
30 seconds of switching on the ignition, telephone and with the service provider
the pairing is established automatically for the available services.
Connection sharing (Bluetooth activated).
The system offers to connect the telephone The profiles compatible with the system
with 3 profiles: are: HFP, OPP, PBAP, A2DP, AVRCP,
To modify the connection profile:
- "Telephone" (hands-free kit, telephone MAP and PAN.
only), Press Telephone to display the
- "Audio streaming" (streaming: wireless primary page. Go to the Brand's website for more information
playing of the audio files on the telephone), (compatibility, additional help, etc.).
- "Mobile internet data".
secondary page.
Select "Bluetooth connection" to Managing paired telephones

Activation of the "Mobile internet
display the list of paired devices.
data" profile is obligatory for connected
This function allows the connection or
navigation having first activated sharing of
disconnection of a device as well as the
this connection on the smartphone. Press the "details" button.
deletion of a pairing.
Select one or more profiles.

Select one or more profiles. primary page.
.
secondary page.
25
Select "Bluetooth connection" to Or on the steering mounted telephone

display the list of paired devices. button.
Select "End call" on the touch
screen.
Select "Contact".
Press on the name of the telephone
Select the desired contact from the list offered.
chosen in the list to disconnect it. Making a call
Press again to connect it. Select "Call".
Using the telephone is not recommended
while driving.
Park the vehicle.
Calling a recently used
Deleting a telephone Make the call using the steering mounted number
Select the basket at top right of the controls. Press Telephone to display the
screen to display a basket alongside primary page.
the telephone chosen.
Calling a new number Or
Make a long press
telephone chosen to delete it. Press Telephone to display the
primary page.
on the steering mounted telephone
Receiving a call Enter the phone number using the button.
digital keypad.
An incoming call is announced by a ring and Select "Calls".
a superimposed display in the screen. Press "Call" to start the call. Select the desired contact from the list offered.
Make a short press on the steering
mounted telephone button to accept It is always possible to make a call directly
an incoming call. Calling a contact from the telephone; as a safety measure,
first park the vehicle.
And Press Telephone to display the
Make a long press primary page.
Or make a long press

on the steering mounted telephone
button to reject the call.
26
Managing contacts/entries Select the "All" or "Received" or Managing quick messages

"Sent" tab.
Select the detail of the message

Press Telephone to display the Press Telephone to display the
chosen in one of the lists.
primary page. primary page.
Select "Contact". Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the

Press "Answer" to send a quick
Select "Create" to add a new message stored in the system. secondary page.
contact. Select "Quick messages" to display
Press "Call" to start the call. the list of messages.
In the "Telephone" tab, enter the telephone
numbers for the contact. Select the "Delayed" or "My arrival"
Press "Play" to hear the message. or "Not available" or "Other" tab
In the "Address" tab, enter the addresses for with the possibility of creating new
the contact. messages.
In the "Email" tab, enter the email addresses Press "Create" to write a new
for the contact. Access to "Messages" depends on the message.
compatibility of the smartphone and the
The "Email" function allows email integral system.
Select the message chosen in one
addresses to be entered for a contact, but Depending on the smartphone, access to
of the lists.
the system is not able to send emails. messages or email may be slow.
Press "Transfer" to select the

The services available depend on addressee(s).
Managing messages the network, the SIM card and the
compatibility of the Bluetooth devices
Press Telephone to display the used. Press "Play" to start playing the
primary page. Check the user guide for the smartphone message.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the and with the service provider for the
secondary page. available services. Managing email
Select "Messages" to display the list
of messages.
primary page.
.
27
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the Or Setting the profiles

secondary page.
"Voice".
Select "Email" to display the list of Or primary page.
messages.
"Ringtone". Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
Select the "Received" or "Sent" or Press "OK" to save the settings. secondary page.
"Not read" tab.
Select "Setting of the profiles".
Select the message chosen in one of the lists.
The balance/distribution (or spatialisation
with the Arkamys© system) is audio
Press "Play" to start playing the
processing that allows the quality of the Select "Profile 1" or "Profile 2" or "Profile 3"
message.
sound to be adapted according to the or "Common profile".
number of passengers in the vehicle.
Access to "Email" depends on the Press this button to enter a name for
Available only with the front and rear
compatibility of the smartphone and the the profile using the virtual keypad.
speakers configuration.
integral system.
Settings The Ambience (6 optional ambiences) Press "OK" to confirm.

and Bass, Medium and Treble audio
Audio settings settings are different and independent for Press this button to add
each audio source. a photograph to the profile.
Press Settings to display the Activate or deactivate "Loudness".
primary page. The settings for "Position" (All Insert a USB memory stick containing
passengers, Driver and Front only) are the photograph in the USB socket.
Select "Audio settings". Select the photograph.
common to all sources.
Activate or deactivate "Touch tones",
Press "OK" to accept the transfer of
Select "Ambiences". "Volume linked to speed" and "Auxiliary
the photograph.
input".
Or Press "OK" again to save the
"Position". settings.
On-board audio: the Arkamys Sound
Or Staging © optimises the distribution of
"Sound". sound in the passenger compartment.
28
The location for the photograph is Modifying system settings Resetting the system to "Factory settings"
square; the system reshapes the original activates English by default, as well as
photograph if in another format. degrees Fahrenheit, and turns off summer
time.
primary page.
Press this button to reinitialise the Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
profile selected. secondary page. Select "System info" to display the versions of
the different modules installed in the system.
Select "Screen configuration".
Reinitialisation of the profile selected
activates the English language by default.
Select "Animation". Selecting the language
Select a "Profile" (1 or 2 or 3) to associate the Activate or deactivate: "Automatic Press Settings to display the
"Audio settings" with it. text scrolling". primary page.
Select "Audio settings". Select "Brightness". Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
Move the slider to adjust the secondary page.
brightness of the screen and/or of Select "Languages" to change the
Select "Ambiences".
the instrument panel. language.
Or
"Position".
primary page. Setting the date
Or
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the Press Settings to display the
"Sound".
secondary page. primary page.
Or Select "System settings".
"Voice".
secondary page.
Or
Select "Units" to change the units of distance, Select "Set time-date".
"Ringtone". fuel consumption and temperature.
.
Press "OK" to save the settings. Select "Factory settings" to return to the initial
settings.
29
Select "Date". Select the display format for the time

Every time the colour scheme is changed,
(12h/24h).
Press this button to define the date. the system restarts, temporarily displaying
Activate or deactivate summer time a black screen.
(+1 hour).
Activate or deactivate
Select the display format of the date. synchronisation with GPS (UTC). Frequently asked questions
The following information groups together the
Press "OK" to confirm. answers to the most frequently asked questions
Adjustment of the time and date is only concerning the system.
available if "GPS synchronisation" is
deactivated. The system does not automatically manage
the change between winter and summer
time (depending on the country of sale).
Setting the time
primary page.
Colour schemes
secondary page. As a safety measure, the procedure
Select "Set time-date". for changing the colour scheme is only
possible when the vehicle is stationary.
Select "Time". Press Settings to display the

primary page.
Press this button to adjust the time
using the virtual keypad. Select "Colour schemes".

Select a colour scheme in the list
Press this button to define the time then press "OK" to confirm.
zone.
30
Navigation
The route calculation is not successful. The guidance criteria may be in conflict with Check the route settings in the "Navigation"
the current location (exclusion of toll roads on menu.
a toll road).
The POIs do not appear. The POIs have not been selected. Select the POIs in the list of POIs.
The audible warning of "Danger zones" does The audible warning is not active or the volume Activate the audible warning in the "Navigation"
not work. is too low. menu and check the voice volume in the audio
settings.
The system does not suggest a detour around The guidance criteria do not take account of Select setting for the "Traffic info " function in
an incident on the route. TMC messages. the list of route settings (Without, Manual or
Automatic).
I receive a "Danger zone" alert which is not on Other than navigation instructions, the system Zoom in on the map to see the exact position
my route. announces all "Danger zones" positioned in of the "Danger zone". Select "On the route" to
a cone located in front of the vehicle. It may no longer receive alerts other than navigation
provide an alert for "Danger zones" located on instructions or to reduce the time for the
nearby or parallel roads. announcement.
Certain traffic jams along the route are not On starting, it is several minutes before the Wait until the traffic information is being
indicated in real time. system begins to receive the traffic information. received correctly (display of the traffic
information icons on the map).
In certain countries, only major routes This is perfectly normal. The system is
.
(motorways, etc.) are listed for the traffic dependent on the traffic information available.
information.
31
The altitude is not displayed. On starting, the initialisation of the GPS may Wait until the system has started up completely
take up to 3 minutes to receive more than so that there is GPS coverage by at least
4 satellites correctly. 4 satellites.
Depending on the geographical environment This behaviour is normal. The system is

(tunnel, etc.) or the weather, the conditions of dependent on the GPS signal reception
reception of the GPS signal may vary. conditions.
My navigation is no longer connected. During start-up and in certain geographical Check that the connected services are
areas, the connection may be unavailable. activated (settings, contract).
Radio
The reception quality of the tuned radio station The vehicle is too far from the transmitter of Activate the "RDS" function by means of the
gradually deteriorates or the stored stations are the station or no transmitter is present in the short-cut menu to enable the system to check
not working (no sound, 87.5 MHz is displayed, geographical area. whether there is a more powerful transmitter in
etc.). the geographical area.
The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, This phenomenon is normal and does not
basement car parks, etc.) blocks reception, indicate a failure of the audio equipment.
including in RDS mode.
The aerial is absent or has been damaged (for Have the aerial checked by a dealer.
example when going through a car wash or into
an underground car park).
32
I cannot find some radio stations in the list of The station is not received or has changed its Press on the "Update list" button in the "Radio
stations received. name in the list. stations" secondary menu.
The name of the radio station changes. Some radio stations send other information
in place of their name (the title of the song for
example).
The system interprets these details as the
station name.
Media
Playback of my USB memory stick starts only Some files supplied with the memory stick Delete the files supplied with the memory stick
after a very long wait (around 2 to 3 minutes). may greatly slow down access to reading and limit the number of sub-folders in the file
the memory stick (multiplication by 10 of the structure on the memory stick.
cataloguing time).
The CD is ejected every time or is not played. The CD is upside down, cannot be read, does Check that the CD is inserted in the player the
not contain audio files or contains audio files of right way up.
a format not recognised by the audio system. Check the condition of the CD: the CD cannot be
The CD has been recorded in a format that is played if it is too badly damaged.
not compatible with the player (udf, etc.). Check the content if it is a burned CD: consult the
The CD is protected by an anti-pirating system advice in the "AUDIO" section.
not recognised by the audio system. The audio system CD player does not play DVDs.
Due to poor quality, certain burned CDs will not
be played by the audio system.
.
33
There is a long waiting period following the Upon insertion of a new external media, This is perfectly normal.
insertion of a CD or connection of a USB the system reads a certain amount of data
memory stick. (directory, title, artist, etc.). This may take from
a few seconds to a few minutes.
The CD sound is of poor quality. The CD used is scratched or of poor quality. Insert good quality CDs and store them in
suitable conditions.
The audio settings (bass, treble, ambience) are Return bass and treble settings to 0, without
unsuitable. selecting an ambience.
Some information characters in the currently The audio system does not display some types Use standard characters to name tracks and
playing media are not displayed correctly. of characters. folders.
Playback of streaming files does not start. The connected device does not automatically Start playback from the device.
launch playback.
Names of tracks and playing time are not The Bluetooth profile does not allow the
displayed on the audio streaming screen. transfer of this information.
34
Telephone
I cannot connect my Bluetooth telephone. The telephone's Bluetooth function may be Check that the telephone has Bluetooth
switched off or the telephone may not be switched on.
visible. Check in the telephone settings that it is
"visible to all".
The Bluetooth telephone is not compatible with It is possible to check the compatibility of the
the system. telephone on the Brand's website (services).
The sound from the telephone connected in The sound depends on both the system and Increase the volume of the audio system, to
Bluetooth mode is inaudible. the telephone. maximum if required, and increase the volume
of the telephone if necessary.
Ambient noise affects the quality of the Reduce the ambient noise level (close
telephone call. windows, reduce ventilation, slow down, etc.).
Some contacts are duplicated in the list. The options for synchronising contacts are: Select "Display SIM card contacts" or "Display
synchronise the contacts on the SIM card, the telephone contacts".
contacts on the telephone, or both. When both
synchronisations are selected, some contacts
may be duplicated.
The contacts are not listed in alphabetical Some telephones offer display options. Change the telephone directory display
order. Depending on the settings chosen, contacts settings.
can be transferred in a specific order.
The system does not receive SMS. The Bluetooth mode does not permit sending
SMS text messages to the system.
.
35
Settings
When changing the setting of treble and bass, The selection of an ambience setting imposes Modify the treble and bass or ambience
the ambience setting is deselected. the settings for treble and bass and vice versa. settings to obtain the desired musical
When changing the ambience setting, the ambience.
treble and bass settings are reset.
When changing the balance setting, The selection of a distribution setting imposes Modify the balance setting or the distribution
distribution is deselected. the balance settings and vice versa. setting to obtain the desired sound quality.
When changing the distribution setting, the
balance setting is deselected.
There is a difference in sound quality between To allow for optimal listening quality, the Check that the audio settings are adapted to
the different audio sources. audio settings can be tailored to different the sources listened to. It is recommended that
sound sources, which can generate audible the audio settings (Bass:, Treble:, Balance:)
differences when changing source. be adjusted to the middle position, select the
"None" musical ambience and set the loudness
correction to the "Active" position in CD mode
or to the "Inactive" position in radio mode.
When the engine is off, the system switches off When the engine is switched off, the system's Start then vehicle's engine to increase the
after several minutes of use. operating time depends on the state of charge of charge of the battery.
the battery.
The switch-off is normal: the system automatically
goes into energy economy mode and switches off
to maintain an adequate charge in the battery.
The date and time cannot be set. Setting of the date and time is only available Settings menu/Options/Time-Date setting.
if the synchronisation with the satellites is Select the "Time" tab and deactivate the "GPS
deactivated. synchronisation" (UTC).
36
Alphabetical index
A B
Accessories.....................................................89 Battery..................................... 186, 215, 217-218 Checking tyre pressures (using the
Access to rear seats........................................55 Battery, 12 V....................................192, 215-217 kit)................................................ 199-200, 202
Active Safety Brake.................. 17, 156-157, 159 Battery, charging............................................ 217 Checks............................................189, 192-193
AdBlue ®...................................... 16, 28, 194-195 Battery, remote control........................ 41-43, 70 Checks, routine.......................................192-193
AdBlue ® tank..................................................196 Blind........................................................... 52-53 Child lock........................................................ 115
Additive, Diesel.......................................191-192 Blind spot monitoring system, active.............165 Children................................................... 110-114
Adjusting headlamps.......................................84 Blind spot sensors................................. 164-166 Children (safety)............................................. 115
Adjusting head restraints........................... 54-55 BlueHDi................................ 14, 28-29, 192, 197 Child seats ..............100, 104-105, 107, 109-110
Adjusting seats........................................... 55-56 Bluetooth (hands-free)......................... 12, 24-25 Child seats, conventional........................109-110
Adjusting the air distribution...................... 64-67 Bluetooth (telephone)...................... 12-13, 24-26 Child seats, i-Size.......................................... 114
Adjusting the air flow............................ 63, 65-67 Bonnet.....................................................188-189 Child seats, ISOFIX.................................111-114
Adjusting the date................................34, 16, 29 Boot................................................ 44-45, 47, 78 Cigarette lighter...............................................72
Adjusting the height and reach of the Brake discs.....................................................193 CITROËN Connect Nav.....................................1
steering wheel...............................................58 Brake lamps...................................................210 CITROËN Connect Radio..................................1
Adjusting the lumbar support...........................55 Brakes......................................................13, 193 Cleaning (advice)...........................................194
Adjusting the seat belt height..........................98 Braking assistance system........................ 91-92 Closing the boot...................................39, 44-45
Adjusting the temperature.........................63, 65 Braking, automatic emergency.... 17, 156-157, 159 Closing the doors.......................................39, 44
Adjusting the time................................34, 15, 30 Brightness........................................................14 Coffee Break Alert.........................................160
Advanced Grip Control.............................. 95-96 Bulbs..............................................................207 Collision Risk Alert.................................156-158
Advice on care and maintenance..................194 Bulbs (changing)..................... 206-207, 210-211 Configuration, vehicle......................................33
Advice on driving.................................... 116-117 Connection, Bluetooth...............12-13, 19, 24-26
Airbags..................................... 19, 101, 103, 106
Airbags, curtain.......................................102-103
Airbags, front..................................101-103, 106
C Connection, MirrorLink......................... 10-11, 18
Connection, Wi-Fi network..............................19
Control stalk, lighting.................................79, 81
Cable, audio.....................................................23
Airbags, lateral........................................102-103 Cable, Jack......................................................23 Control stalk, wipers............................85-86, 88
Air conditioning.................................... 62-64, 67 Capacity, fuel tank.........................................180 Controls, steering mounted....................125-129
Air conditioning, automatic........................65, 68 Cap, fuel filler.................................................180 Control, back-up boot release...................45, 48
Air conditioning, dual-zone automatic.......64, 67 CD................................................................8, 23 Control, back-up door.................................41-42
Air conditioning, manual............................ 63-64 CD, MP3.......................................................8, 23 Control, heated seats.......................................57
Air intake.................................................... 65-66 Central locking...........................................36, 39 Courtesy lamp................................................ 211
Air vents...........................................................61 Changing a bulb...................... 206-207, 210-211 Courtesy lamps................................................75
Alarm.......................................................... 49-51 Changing a fuse.............................. 212-213, 215 Cover, load space............................................76
Anti-lock braking system (ABS)................. 91-92 Changing a wheel.......................... 198-199, 203 Cruise control...........................140-141, 144-146
Anti-slip regulation (ASR).................... 18, 91-96 Changing a wiper blade...................................87 Cruise control by speed limit
Anti-theft/Immobiliser.............................. 40, 118 Changing the remote control battery...............42 recognition............................................140-141
Apple CarPlay connection......................... 11, 17 Charger, induction.......................................72-73 Cruise control, adaptive................................. 147
.
Armrest, front..............................................73-74 Charger, wireless........................................72-73 Cruise control, adaptive with Stop
Assistance call........................................... 90-91 CHECK.............................................................29 function.................................................140-141
Assistance, emergency braking........ 91-92, 158 Checking the engine oil level...........................27 Cup holder........................................................ 71
Audio streaming (Bluetooth).................... 8-9, 23 Checking the levels.................................189-191
225
Alphabetical index
D
DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) – Environment...............................................43, 70 G.P.S................................................................13
Digital radio................................................ 7, 22 ESC (electronic stability control).....................91 Grab handles.............................................55, 71
Date (setting)........................................34, 16, 29 Extended traffic sign recognition................... 141
Daytime running lamps......................79, 81, 209
Deactivating the front passenger
airbag...................................................102, 106 F H
Hands-free access...........................................47
Deadlocking............................................... 37, 40 Fatigue detection....................................159-160 Hands-free tailgate....................................45, 47
Defrosting................................................... 68-69 Filling the AdBlue ® tank.........................192, 196 Hazard warning lamps.............................89, 197
Defrosting, front...............................................68 Filling the fuel tank.........................................180 Headlamp adjustment......................................84
Demisting.........................................................68 Filter, air.........................................................192 Headlamps, automatic dipping............ 24, 83-84
Demisting, front................................................68 Filter, oil..........................................................192 Headlamps, automatic illumination........... 81-82
Demisting, rear.................................................68 Filter, particle..........................................191-192 Headlamps, dipped beam.......... 24, 79, 208-209
Demisting, rear screen....................................68 Filter, passenger compartment................62, 192 Headlamps, halogen................................84, 207
Dials and gauges........................................... 8-9 Fitting a wheel........................................ 203-206 Headlamps, main beam........24-25, 79, 208-209
Dimensions....................................................221 Fitting roof bars....................................... 187-188 Head restraints, front................................. 54-55
Dipstick..................................................... 27, 190 Fittings, boot....................................................76 Head restraints, rear.................................. 60-61
Direction indicators.................... 80-81, 208, 210 Fittings, interior................................................ 71 Heating........................................... 61, 64, 69-70
Display screen, instrument panel..................130 Flap, fuel filler.................................................180 Heating, additional..................................... 69-70
Door pockets.................................................... 71 Floor, boot, adjustable.....................................77 Heating, programmable............................. 69-70
Doors................................................................44 Fluid, brake....................................................191 Hill Assist Descent Control (HADC).......... 96-97
Driver Attention Alert.....................................160 Fluid, engine coolant......................................191 Hill start assist.........................................129-130
Driving..................................................... 116-117 Foglamps, front................................. 79, 85, 209 Horn.................................................................90
Driving aids camera (warnings).....................136 Foglamps, rear................................... 22, 79, 211
I
Driving aids (recommendations)....................135 Folding the rear seats................................ 60-61
Driving positions (storing).......................... 56-57 Frequency (radio).............................................21
Dynamic stability control (DSC)........... 18, 91-96 Fuel................................................................ 181
Ignition.............................................. 119, 121, 27
Fuel tank........................................................180
Ignition on...................................................... 121
E Fusebox, dashboard...............................212-213
Fusebox, engine compartment....... 212-213, 215
Fuses............................................... 212-213, 215
Immobiliser, electronic............................. 41, 118
Indicators, direction.................................80, 208
Economy mode..............................................186 Indicator, AdBlue ® range..................................28
Electronic brake force distribution (EBFD).... 91-92 Indicator, coolant temperature.........................27
Emergency braking assistance (EBA)....... 91-92
Emergency call.......................................... 90-91 G Indicator, engine oil level........................... 27, 29
Inflating tyres.................................................193
Emergency switching off................................ 121 Gauge, fuel....................................................180 Inflating tyres (using the kit)........... 199-200, 202
Emissions control system, SCR..............29, 194 Gearbox, automatic....8, 125-130, 132, 193, 216 Infrared camera.............................................136
Energy economy mode..................................186 Gearbox, manual...............8, 125, 130, 132, 193 Instrument panel.......................8-10, 29, 31, 137
Engine compartment.....................................189 Gear lever, automatic gearbox......................129 Intelligent Traction Control...............................92
Engines.................................................. 222-224 Gear lever, manual gearbox..........................125 Internet browser...............................................19
Engine, Diesel............ 14, 19, 181, 189, 197, 224 Gear efficiency indicator................................130 ISOFIX.....................................................111-112
Engine, petrol.........................................189, 223 Glove box......................................................... 71
226
Alphabetical index
J O
Jack.......................................... 198-199, 203, 23 Load reduction mode.....................................186 Obstacle detection.........................................167
Jump starting.................................................216 Load space cover.............................................76 Oil change......................................................190
Locating your vehicle.......................................37 Oil consumption.............................................190
K Locking....................................................... 39-41
Locking from the inside.................................... 41
Locking the doors............................................ 41
Oil, engine......................................................190
On-board tools................................. 78, 198-199
Opening the bonnet.......................................188
Key....................................................... 35, 40-42
Keyless Entry and Starting.................37-41, 120 Low fuel level.................................................180 Opening the boot.................................38, 44-45
Key not recognised........................................ 121 Lumbar.............................................................55 Opening the doors.....................................38, 44
Key with remote control..................... 35-36, 118 Opening the fuel filler flap..............................180
Key, electronic.............................................37-39
Kit, hands-free..................................... 12, 24-25 M Opening the windows......................................36
Kit, temporary puncture repair....... 198-200, 202 Maintenance (advice).....................................194

Maintenance, routine............................. 137, 192 P
L Manoeuvring aids (recommendations)..........135
Map reading lamps..........................................75
Markings, identification..................................221
Pads, brake....................................................193
Paint...............................................................221
Paint colour code...........................................221
Labels, identification......................................221
Lamps, front...................................................194 Massage function ...................................... 57-58 Park Assist...................................... 173-174, 176
Lamps, parking................................................81 Massage, multi-point................................. 57-58 Parking brake, electric...................13, 18, 21-22,
Lamps, rear............................................194, 210 Mat........................................................... 74, 137 121-124, 193
Lamp, boot...............................................78, 212 Memorising a speed......................................146 Parking sensors, audible and visual..............167
Lane departure warning system, active.... 17, 161 Menu................................................................ 11 Parking sensors, front....................................167
Lane Keeping Assist, Active.... 147, 151-153, 156 Menu short cuts...............................................33 Parking sensors, rear....................................167
Leather (care).................................................194 Menus (audio).........................................3-4, 3-4 Personalisation.............................................9-10
LEDs – Light-emitting diodes.... 81, 207, 209-211 Menu, main......................................................33 Plates, identification......................................221
Levels and checks..................................189-191 Messages.........................................................27 Player, Apple ®..............................................9, 23
Level, AdBlue ®...............................................192 Messages, quick..............................................27 Player, MP3 CD................................................23
Level, brake fluid............................................191 Mirrors, door.........................58-59, 68, 164-166 Player, USB..................................................8, 22
Level, Diesel additive..............................191-192 Mirror, rear view......................................... 59-60 Power steering.................................................23
Level, engine coolant............................... 27, 191 Mirror, vanity.................................................... 71 Pre-heater, Diesel............................................19
Level, engine oil....................................... 27, 190 Misfuel prevention..........................................180 Pressures, tyres.....................................193, 202
Level, screenwash fluid........................... 87, 191 Motorised tailgate...................................... 45-47 Pre-tensioning seat belts...............................100
Light-emitting diodes – LEDs.... 81, 207, 209-211 Mountings, ISOFIX........................................ 111 Priming the fuel system.......................... 197-198
Lighting dimmer...............................................30 Profiles.......................................................14, 28
Lighting, cornering...........................................85
Lighting, directional..........................................85 N Programmable cruise control........................144
Programmable speed limiter.........................142
Protecting children.... 101-102, 104-107, 110-114
Lighting, guide-me home........................... 37, 82 Net, high load retaining....................................77
.
Lighting, interior...............................................75 Number plate lamps....................................... 211 Puncture..................................199-200, 202-203
Lighting, ambience...........................................75
Lighting, welcome............................................82
Loading.................................................... 77, 187
227
Alphabetical index
R S
Radar (warnings)............................................136 Safety, children......... 101-102, 104-107, 110-114 STOP (warning lamp).......................................12
Radio.........................................5-6, 8, 20-21, 23 Saturation of the particle filter (Diesel)..........192 Stop & Start.................................. 23, 32, 63, 68,
Radio, digital (Digital Audio Screen menu map............................................ 11 130, 132, 180, 188, 192, 218
Broadcasting – DAB)................................. 7, 22 Screenwash, front............................................86 Storage............................................71, 73-74, 76
Range, AdBlue.........................................28, 192 Screenwash, rear.............................................86 Storage box......................................................78
RDS..............................................................6, 21 Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR).......29, 194 Storage compartments.................................... 71
Rear screen, demisting.............................. 68-69 Seat belts................................... 13, 98-100, 109 Storage wells.............................................76, 78
Recharging the battery.................................. 217 Seats, electric............................................ 56-57 Storing driving positions............................ 56-57
Recirculation, air........................................ 65-67 Seats, front................................................. 54-57 Stowing rings...................................................76
Recovery........................................................219 Seats, heated...................................................57 Sunroof, panoramic................................... 52-53
Reduction of electrical load...........................186 Seats, rear.................................................. 60-61 Sunshine sensor..............................................62
Regeneration of the particle filter..................192 Selector, gear..........................................125-129 Sun visor.......................................................... 71
Reinitialisation of the under-inflation Sensors (warnings)........................................ 137 Switching off the engine................................ 118
detection system...................................133-134 Serial number, vehicle...................................221 Synchronising the remote control....................43
Reinitialising the remote control......................43 Service indicator...................................26-27, 29
Reminder, key in ignition................................ 119
Reminder, lighting on.......................................80
Remote control................................ 35-37, 39-41
Service (warning lamp)....................................14
Servicing.................................14, 26, 26-27, 192
Settings, equipment.........................................33
T
Tables of engines................................... 223-224
Removing a wheel................................. 203-206 Settings, system.........................................15, 29 Tables of fuses................................ 212-213, 215
Removing the mat............................................ 74 Sidelamps.................................. 79, 81, 209-210 Tank, fuel........................................................180
Replacing bulbs...................... 206-207, 210-211 Side repeater.................................................209 Technical data........................................ 223-224
Replacing fuses......................................212-213 Snow chains...................................................186 Telephone............................ 72-73, 12-14, 24-27
Replacing the air filter....................................192 Socket, 12 V accessory.............................72, 76 Temperature, coolant.................................12, 27
Replacing the oil filter....................................192 Socket, auxiliary...........................................8, 23 Third brake lamp............................................ 211
Replacing the passenger compartment filter....192 Socket, Jack.....................................................23 Three flashes (direction indicators).................80
Reservoir, screenwash..................................191 Socket,, USB..........................................72, 8, 22 Ticket holder.................................................... 71
Resetting the service indicator.................. 26-27 Speed limiter...................................140-143, 146 Time (setting).......................................34, 15, 30
Resetting the trip recorder...............................30 Speed limit recognition.......................... 137, 140 TMC (Traffic info).............................................14
Reset trip..........................................................31 Speedometer......................................... 8-9, 137 Tool kit.............................................. 78, 198-199
Rev counter.................................................... 8-9 Spotlamps, side.............................................209 Top 360 Vision....................................... 168, 171
Reversing camera...................136, 168-169, 171 Stability control (ESC)....................91-92, 94-96 Topping up AdBlue ®.......................................196
Reversing lamps............................................210 Starting a Diesel engine................................ 181 Top Rear Vision..................................... 168-169
Roof bars................................................. 187-188 Starting the engine........................................ 118 Total distance recorder....................................30
Running out of fuel (Diesel).................... 197-198 Starting the vehicle.... 18, 21-22, 118-120, 125-129 Touch screen.................................................1, 1
Starting using another battery............... 121, 216 Towbar......................................................94, 182
Station, radio.......................................5-6, 20-21 Towbar with quickly detachable towball....183-185
Stay, bonnet............................................188-189 Towed loads...................................................222
Steering mounted controls, audio............. 2-3, 2 Towing another vehicle..................................219
Steering wheel, adjustment.............................58 Traffic information (TMC).................................14
Stopping the vehicle............................18, 21-22, Trailer.......................................................94, 182
118-120, 125-129
228
Alphabetical index
Trailer stability assist (TSA).............................94 Warning lamp, STOP.......................................12

Trajectory control systems......................... 91-92 Washing......................................................... 137
Triangle, warning...........................................197 Washing (advice)...........................................194
Trip computer..............................................31-32 Weights..........................................................222
Trip distance recorder......................................30 Welcome lighting....................................... 37, 82
Tyres...............................................................193 Wheel, spare.......................... 193, 198-199, 203
Tyre under-inflation detection..........19, 132, 202 Window controls.............................................. 51
Windscreen, heated.........................................68
U Wiper blades (changing)..................................87

Wipers................................................. 25, 85, 88
Wipers, automatic rain sensitive................86, 88
Under-inflation (detection)...............19, 132, 202
Unlocking............................................. 35-36, 38 Wiper, rear.......................................................86
Unlocking from the inside................................ 41
Unlocking the boot.....................................36, 38
Unlocking the doors......................................... 41
Unlocking the tailgate................................36, 38
Updating the date.................................34, 16, 29
Updating the time.................................34, 15, 30
USB........................................................ 8, 22-23
V
Ventilation.................................61-62, 64, 69-70
Visibility............................................................68
Vision, 180° forward...................................... 171
Vision, 180° rear............................................ 171
Voice commands...................................4-7, 9-11
W
Warning and indicator lamps..................... 11, 12
Warning lamps........................................... 11, 29
Warning lamp, airbag.......................................19
Warning lamp, braking system........................13
Warning lamp, Diesel engine pre-heater........19
.
Warning lamp, driver's seat belt not fastened....99
Warning lamp, low fuel level............................20
Warning lamp, parking brake...........................13
Warning lamp, seat belts.................................99
Warning lamp, Service....................................14
229
CONDUENT
4Dconcept
Automobiles CITROËN declares, by application Xerox
of the provisions of the European legislation
(Directive 2000/53) relating to End of Life
Vehicles, that it achieves the objectives set by
this legislation and that recycled materials are
used in the manufacture of the products that it
sells.
Reproduction or translation of all or part of

this document is prohibited without written
authorisation from Automobiles CITROËN.
Printed in the EU
Anglais
10-18
*18C84.0040* ANG. 18C84.0040

9999 9999 263 en-GB

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

9999 9999 263 en-GB

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

9999 9999 263 en-GB

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

HANDBOOK

Access to the Handbook

This symbol indicates the latest information

Thank you for choosing a Citroën C5 AIRCROSS. Safety warning

Overview . Access Lighting and visibility

Eco-driving . Keyless Entry and Starting

Instruments and controls 6. Courtesy lamp

front passenger airbag

Centre switch panel (lower and

1. Touch screen controls (CITROËN Connect

Optimise the use of your gearbox Drive smoothly

Limit the causes of excess Observe the recommendations on

Instrument panel with dials Colour display Digital instrument panel

Dials 1. Cruise control or speed limiter settings.

Warning and indicator

When the ignition is switched on

List of warning and indicator lamps

Red warning/indicator lamps

Fixed, associated with If one of the doors or the boot is not

Seat belt not

A seat belt has not been fastened or

Electric parking Fixed. The electric parking brake is applied.

Warning/indicator lamp State Cause Actions/Observations

Orange warning/indicator lamps

The remaining driving range is

Top up the AdBlue ®.

Warning/indicator lamp State Cause Actions/Observations

The engine management system has

There is a risk that the catalytic converter will be destroyed.

Fixed, accompanied The system has a fault. Carry out (3).

Active Lane Fixed. The system has been automatically

Warning/indicator lamp State Cause Actions/Observations

Dynamic Flashing. The DSC/ASR adjustment is

The pressure in one or more wheels

Check the pressure of the tyres as soon as possible.

Warning/indicator lamp State Cause Actions/Observations

The "automatic application" (on

Carry out (3) if automatic application/release is no

Warning/indicator lamp State Cause Actions/Observations

Rear foglamps Fixed. The lamps are on.

Hill start assist

The system has a fault.

Carry out (3).

Green warning/indicator lamps

Flashing temporarily. STOP mode is momentarily

Warning/indicator lamp State Cause Actions/Observations

Park Assist Fixed. The function is active.

Direction Flashing with audible The direction indicators are on.

Sidelamps Fixed. The lamps are on.

Dipped beam Fixed. The lamps are on.

Automatic Fixed. The function has been activated in

The front foglamps are on.

Blue warning/indicator lamps

Black/white warning/indicator lamps

Indicators Resetting the service indicator

Retrieving the service

On versions fitted with an electric oil level

Top up. Between 1,500 miles

F Press this button to temporarily display the A top-up is Between